TM Tacho Manager Modules · Help · Demo
Help centre

How to use Tacho Manager

Choose your account type to read the complete guide: every function and module, how to create documents and exports, and answers to frequent questions.

Signed in? The same guide is always available inside the app under Help in the left menu.

Try the live demo

Create a company account

Register a company account to manage many drivers and vehicles. A new company account starts on the free plan; the Billing page shows which modules each plan includes.

Company or driver account?

When you register you pick a Registration type: Company or Driver. Choose Company if you manage several drivers or vehicles. A company account can hold many drivers and vehicles, receive their tachograph files and show reports and planning for the whole fleet.

A Driver account is meant for one professional driver. It holds a single driver and no vehicles. Your drivers can create one and link it to your company with your invitation code, so that you can see their uploaded files.

Tip: Under the choice the page shows a short hint. For Company it says that the free plan covers 2 drivers and 1 vehicle, and that more modules and larger fleets are available as paid options. You can switch the type later from Profile, but only when the site administrator allows it, and a switch to driver deletes data. Read the section 'Password and account type' before you decide.
Register step by step
  1. Open the registration page. From the sign-in page press Create one. In the demo, press Register in the yellow banner.
  2. Type a Username. Use 3 to 32 characters: letters, numbers, dots, underscores or dashes.
  3. Type your Recovery email. The verification link and any later reset or confirmation emails go to this address. One email address can belong to one account only.
  4. Under Registration type select Company.
  5. Type a Password of at least 6 characters that includes at least one special character, meaning a character that is not a letter or a number. Type it again in Confirm Password.
  6. Tick the box 'By registering, I accept the' Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy. Both links open in a new tab.
  7. Press Register.

When the form is accepted, a green message appears with the link Back to sign in. The next topic explains what the message means.

Tip: If the username or email is taken you see 'This username is already in use.' or 'This recovery email is already in use.' Pick another one.
Tip: You cannot change the username later. It is shown read-only on the Profile page.
Confirm your email address

After you press Register the page answers 'Registration received. Check your email and open the verification link to activate your admin account.' Your own account is the 'admin account' meant here. The message goes to your recovery email and the link in it works for 24 hours.

  1. Open the email and click the verification link.
  2. Your account is activated at once and the app opens. You are not signed in yet, so the app can show the read-only demo first.
  3. Press Login at the bottom of the left menu, or open the sign-in page, and sign in with your username and password.
Important: Your account does not exist until you click the link, so you cannot sign in before that. Check the spam folder if the email does not arrive.

If the website has email verification switched off, the account is created at once and you see 'Registration completed successfully. You can now log in.' You can sign in straight away.

Tip: If the link is invalid or expired you see 'The verification link is invalid or expired.' and a Back to login button. After 24 hours the unconfirmed registration is deleted and you can register again with the same details. Until then it still reserves your username and email address, so the form answers 'This username is already in use.' or 'This recovery email is already in use.' If you mistyped the email, register again with the correct email and another username.
Sign up with Google

Instead of filling in the form you can press Sign in with Google on the registration or sign-in page. This works only when Google sign-in is set up for the website. Otherwise you see 'Google login is not configured.'

  1. Press Sign in with Google and choose your Google account.
  2. If no account matches yet, the page Complete your account opens. It shows the email address that will be used. Choose Company or Driver and tick the box to accept the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy Policy.
  3. Press Create account and continue. You are signed in at once and no verification email is needed. Press Cancel if you change your mind.

Your username is made from the first part of your Google email address, in lowercase. If that name is already taken, an underscore and a number are added, for example john_1. Your Google address becomes your recovery email. You can see both on Profile.

Tip: If your Google address already matches the recovery email of an existing account, you are signed in to that account instead of a new one being created.
Tip: A Google account gets a random password that nobody knows. To sign in with username and password as well, use Forgot password? with your Google address.
Tip: In the Android app, Google sign-in opens your phone browser and then brings you back to the app.
What a new company account gets

Every new company account starts on the free plan as soon as it is activated: when you confirm the email, or right after registering if verification is switched off. Google sign-up activates it at once. There is no trial period and no end date. Driver accounts are always free.

The free plan covers up to 2 drivers and 1 vehicle. The modules it includes are listed on its card on the Billing page, and the other add-on modules can be bought there. The DeCA module is free for every company account.

Tip: When you need more drivers or vehicles, choose a larger plan under Settings, then Billing. The plans and the payment steps are described in the section 'Subscription, trial and billing'.
If registration does not work
  • 'Registration is not available for the moment.' or 'Company registration is currently disabled.' The site administrator has switched registration off, completely or for that account type. Try again later.
  • 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about N minute(s).' Several attempts from the same device or email address came in a short time (5 attempts in 30 minutes are allowed). Wait for the time shown, up to about 30 minutes.
  • 'Username must be 3-32 characters and use only letters, numbers, dots, underscores, or dashes.' Change the username.
  • 'Password must have at least 6 characters.' or 'Password must include at least one special character.' Choose a stronger password.
  • 'Password confirmation does not match.' Type the same password in both fields.
  • 'Recovery email is invalid.' Check the address for typing mistakes.
  • You must tick the box for the terms and privacy policy, otherwise you see 'You must accept the Terms and Conditions and acknowledge the Privacy Policy before registering.' and nothing is created.

Sign in, sign out and reset your password

How to enter and leave your account, what to do when you forget your password, and what the sign-in screen offers.

Sign in
  1. Open the sign-in page. On the website use its sign-in link. After Logout the app brings you here. In the demo, Login at the bottom of the left menu does the same.
  2. Type your Username. The app asks for your username, not your email address.
  3. Type your Password and press Login.
  4. You arrive on the Info page, your home page.
Tip: If you are already signed in and open the sign-in page, the app takes you straight to Info. If you are only looking at the demo, the form still appears so that you can sign in.
Sign in with Google

Press Sign in with Google under the form. You are signed in when your Google account is already linked to an account, or when your Google address is the recovery email of an account. Otherwise the page Complete your account opens so that you can create a new account.

Tip: The button works only when Google sign-in is set up for the website. In the Android app it opens your phone browser and then returns you to the app.
The invitation code on the sign-in screen

Under the form you find Have an invitation code? It shows a field called Invitation code with the hint 'Required for company tenant-user logins.' Press Hide invitation code to close it again.

Leave it closed for a normal company or driver account. It is needed only for team-member logins of a company.

Reset a forgotten password
  1. On the sign-in page press Forgot password?
  2. Type the Recovery email of your account and press Send reset link.
  3. For an address that is not registered the page gives the same answer: 'If the recovery email exists, a reset link has been sent.' It does not tell you whether an address is registered.
  4. Open the email and click the link. The link works once and stays valid for 60 minutes.
  5. The page Reset password opens. Type a New password and Confirm new password. Use at least 6 characters with at least one special character.
  6. Press Reset password. You see 'Your password has been reset. Redirecting to sign in…' and then the sign-in page opens.
Important: The email goes to the recovery email saved on the account. If the account has no recovery email, no email can be sent. A frozen account cannot reset its password: you see 'This admin is frozen and cannot request or apply password resets.'
Tip: You can ask for a reset link up to 5 times in 15 minutes. After that you see 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about 15 minute(s).' If the link was already used or is too old, the page says 'Password reset token is invalid or expired.' and you ask for a new one. The button Back to login returns you to the sign-in page.
If you cannot sign in
  • 'Invalid username or password.' This message appears for a wrong password, an unknown username and also for a locked account. Check the Username (not your email) and the capital letters.
  • After 10 sign-in attempts within 5 minutes you must wait. The message reads 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about 5 minute(s).' The wording mentions registration, but it is the same waiting time for sign-in.
  • A new account cannot sign in until you have clicked the verification link in the email.
  • A frozen account can still sign in, but the app is read-only until the subscription is renewed.
Sign out
  1. On a small screen press the Menu button first to open the sidebar.
  2. At the bottom of the sidebar press Logout.
  3. The sign-in page opens.
Tip: Logging out also forgets which view (company or driver) you used last on this device. Always log out on a shared computer.

Try the public demo

A read-only example account with sample data lets you explore the app before you register.

What the demo is

The demo is a ready-made example account with sample data. You do not need to register. There are two demos: a company demo, which shows what you get as a company, and a driver demo, which shows the view of a single driver.

A yellow banner at the top says: 'Demo mode: this account is only for demonstrating the application and its data can change at any time.' The expiry dates in the sample data are moved forward once a day, so the examples always look current.

Open and switch the demo
  1. On the sign-in page find Or try the demo.
  2. Press Switch to company demo or Switch to driver demo.
  3. The app reloads inside the demo. To change demo later, press the same kind of button in the yellow banner.
Tip: If you open the app without being signed in, you are put into the driver demo automatically.
What works and what does not

You can browse the pages, open driver and vehicle details and reports, look at the Notifications panel, and view the pages under Settings. On the settings pages you can look at the options, but nothing can be saved.

You cannot upload files, add, edit or delete anything, save settings, download files or ZIP packages, change a password, change the account type or delete an account. You cannot mark notifications as read either.

  • Billing is not shown in the demo.
  • In Tools the Global ZIP download and Bulk upload are not offered.
  • At the bottom of the sidebar the demo shows Login instead of Profile and Logout.
  • If an action is blocked, the app says 'This is a read-only demo. Create your own account to make changes.'
From the demo to your own account
  1. Press Register in the yellow banner, or Login at the bottom of the sidebar if you already have an account.
  2. Register as Company, confirm your email and sign in.
Tip: Nothing from the demo is copied to your account. Your own account starts empty.

Find your way around the app

The header, the left menu, the notification bell, language and day/night switch, and how the app looks on a phone.

The parts of the screen
  • The header at the top shows the brand name or logo (press it to go to Info) and, on the right, the swap button for the driver view (see the section 'Using the app as one of your drivers'), Language, Theme and Notifications. On a narrow screen the Menu button (three lines) appears at its left.
  • The sidebar on the left holds the groups Menu, Settings and Pages, and the Help entry right under them. At its bottom you find Profile and Logout.
  • The content area on the right shows the page you opened. Notices such as the demo or account banners appear at its top.
The Menu group
  • Info: your home page. It shows the rest planner of your drivers, uploads that are due, documents and cards that expire soon, the infringements overview and, with the Payroll module, a payroll summary.
  • Work: transport orders and CMR. Needs the Work module.
  • Calendar: reserve drivers and vehicles by day range. Needs the Calendar module.
  • Drivers: the list of your drivers with the button Add driver. Open a driver to see files and reports.
  • Vehicles: your vehicles with the button Add vehicle.
  • Time Registry: the working-time registry. Needs the Time Registry (Fichaje) module.
  • Fuel tickets: fuel tickets and consumption. Needs the Fuel tickets module.
  • Tools: the Trip calculator, the Filename converter, the Global ZIP download and, for company accounts, Bulk upload for sending many tachograph files at once.
Tip: A module entry appears only when the module is active for your account (included in your plan, granted or bought) and you have not switched it off on the Modules page. Payroll Calculation and GPS Tracking have no entry of their own in this menu: set them up under Settings, then Modules. Every one of these pages has its own section in this help.
The Settings group

Press Settings in the sidebar to open or close the group. It holds:

  • Reminders: choose which expiry and upload reminders are active, how many days ahead they appear and whether they also send a push notification. You can also write your own messages there (Custom announcements).
  • Link: the invitation code that connects driver accounts to your company, and the list of linked drivers.
  • Modules: one tab for each add-on module, to set it up or to switch it on or off for your company.
  • Billing: your plan, add-on modules and payments.
  • Other Settings: the legal and report options and the file format for phone app uploads.
The Pages group

The Pages group lists the information pages published by the website operator, for example Card Readers, Terms, Privacy Policy and Cookie Policy. Press one to read it inside the app. Right under the group you always find Help, the Help centre, even when there are no pages. The section 'Pages (legal and information)' explains who can open which page.

The notification bell

The bell in the header opens the Notifications panel on the right. The number on the bell counts the messages you have not read yet, and it shows 99+ above 99. The messages cover expiring cards and documents, uploads that are due, new infringements, your subscription and your own announcements.

Tip: How to read and dismiss them, and which ones appear, is described in the sections 'Notification bell and banners' and 'Reminders'.
Language and day/night theme
  1. Press the language button in the header (the translate icon, named Language).
  2. Choose a language from the list: DE, EN, ES, FR, IT, PL or RO, meaning German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish and Romanian. The page reloads in that language.
  3. Press the Theme button, shown as a sun or a moon, to switch between the day look and the night look.

Both choices are remembered on this device. The language is stored for one year. Before you choose, the app uses your device language if it is one of the seven, otherwise English. The theme follows the site default or your device setting until you choose.

Tip: The site administrator can switch some languages off, so the list on your screen can be shorter. When the header is too narrow, Language and Theme move to the bottom of the sidebar, just above Profile.
Using the app on a phone

On a large screen the sidebar is always visible. On a phone or a narrow window it is hidden to save space.

  1. Press the Menu button, three lines at the top left, to slide the sidebar open.
  2. Press a page to open it. The sidebar closes by itself. You can also press the dark area outside it.
Tip: The same app also runs inside the Tacho Manager Android app, which adds reading the driver card with a smart-card reader.
Tip: When the operator requires a newer version of the Android app and yours is older, the app shows 'Update required' with the button Update now, which opens the Play Store.
Tip: Wide tables turn into cards on a phone: each row becomes a card with the column names next to the values, so nothing is cut off.
Notices at the top of the page

Coloured bars above the page content show the demo notice, the end of a free trial (older accounts only), a module that is about to end, a frozen account and the driver view. A highlighted greeting bar can also appear around public holidays. Each bar is explained in the section 'Notification bell and banners'.

Cookie banner, footer links and operator notices
  • A cookie banner titled 'We use cookies' can appear at the bottom of the page: 'We use cookies to keep you signed in and to improve this site. You can accept or decline non-essential cookies.' Press Accept or Decline. The banner is shown only when the website requires a consent, and it does not come back once you have decided on this device.
  • A bar at the top of the page can carry a message from the operator, for example a warning or a maintenance notice. A maintenance notice is red, a warning is yellow.
  • At the very bottom of the page a row of links opens the legal pages of the website, for example the privacy policy.

First steps checklist

A short path from a new account to a working fleet overview.

Checklist for a new company account
  1. Register, confirm your email and sign in.
  2. Follow the Quick tutorial that opens by itself on your first visit. You can skip it and replay it later from Help.
  3. Open Profile and check the Recovery email and the Report timezone.
  4. Open Drivers and press Add driver. Type the Driver name and the Card number, or use Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill to read them from a .ddd or .tgd file. Press Save.
  5. Open the driver and press Upload to add tachograph files. Files are .ddd or .tgd, up to 50 MB each, and you can pick several at once.
  6. To send many files at once, open Tools and use Bulk upload (see the section 'Bulk upload'). Files that match no driver or vehicle you added are skipped.
  7. Open Vehicles and press Add vehicle for each vehicle.
  8. Open Settings, then Link, and give drivers who have their own driver account your Invitation code.
  9. Open Settings, then Reminders, and choose which reminders you want in the bell.
  10. Open Settings, then Modules, and switch on the modules you have. Open Billing to see which modules each plan includes, to buy a module, or when you need more drivers or vehicles.
Tip: The Info page fills up as soon as driver and vehicle files are uploaded, because it is calculated from the most recently uploaded files.
Two ways to bring drivers in

A driver can come into your account in two ways. You add the driver yourself with Add driver and upload the files, or the driver registers a driver account and links it to your company with your invitation code, found under Settings, then Link. Linked drivers send their files to you automatically.

Tip: The code, its renewal, the driver limit and the messages a driver may see are described in the section 'Linking drivers to your company'.
Make the most of your plan

Try the modules your plan includes on real data from the first day; the Billing page shows which ones they are and lets you add others. Switch a module on or off on the Modules page and open its page in the menu.

When your fleet grows beyond the free plan, choose a larger plan under Settings, then Billing. See the section 'Subscription, trial and billing'.

Quick tutorial for new accounts

A short guided tour of the main screens that opens by itself on a newly registered account. You can skip it and replay it whenever you want.

What the quick tutorial is

The Quick tutorial is a window with six short steps for a company account. Each step explains one part of the app in two or three lines.

It opens by itself the first time you use a newly registered account, meaning an account created in the last 30 days. It does not open by itself in the demo or while a company is in the driver view.

Tip: The app remembers on your account, not only on this device, that you finished or skipped the tutorial. It does not open by itself again.
The six steps

The title bar shows 'Quick tutorial' and the step number, for example 'Step 2 of 6'. The steps are:

  • Welcome to Tacho Manager: a short overview of the left menu and your free plan.
  • Add your drivers: open Drivers and add the drivers you manage. Drivers with their own account can link to you with your invitation code.
  • Upload tachograph files: open a driver or a vehicle and upload their files, or use the bulk upload in Tools.
  • Read your dashboard: Info lists infringements and a rest-planner summary for each driver, plus a payroll summary when the Payroll module is on.
  • Turn on the modules you need: open Modules under Settings to switch add-ons on or off and set them up. Your plan includes all of them.
  • Help is one click away: the Help centre explains every feature step by step.
Move through the tutorial
  1. Press Next to go to the following step and Back to return to the previous one.
  2. Press Show me to open the page that the step is about. The tutorial shrinks into a button at the bottom right of the screen, 'Continue tutorial (2/6)'. Press it to carry on.
  3. On the last step press Finish.
  • Skip tutorial, or the close cross at the top right, ends the tutorial for good.
  • The Esc key, or a click on the dark area behind the window, only shrinks it into the button. You can come back to it.
Play the tutorial again
  1. Press Help in the left menu.
  2. Press Start the quick tutorial at the top of the page. The same button is at the bottom of the page.
Tip: The replay works for every account, including the demo. The demo does not store that you finished it.

Use the Help centre

The Help centre holds step-by-step guides for company and driver accounts, a search box and a list of frequently asked questions. It opens inside the app.

Open the Help centre

Press Help in the left menu. It sits right under the Pages group and is always listed. The page, titled Help centre, opens inside the app, so you stay where you are.

Tip: The Tacho Manager website also has a public Help page with the guides, so you can read them before you register.
Choose a guide

There are two guides: Company account and Driver account. Press the one you want at the top of the page.

When you are signed in, the guide for your own account opens first and carries the badge Your account. Reading the other guide shows what a driver or a company sees.

Frequently asked questions

At the end of the guide the section Frequently asked questions gathers short answers. They are grouped as Account & getting started, Files & uploads, Reports & rest rules, Documents & exports, Modules & plans and Privacy & data. Press a question to read the answer.

Your profile

The Profile page shows your username and recovery email, lets you set the report timezone and manage the company data used on documents.

Open your profile

Press Profile at the bottom of the sidebar. The page is titled Account and has two tabs: Profile and Security.

  • The card Profile shows your Username and Email (both read-only), your Recovery email and the Report timezone.
  • The card Account type shows your Current account type: Company. It adds: 'A company account manages multiple drivers and vehicles.'
  • The card Switch account type is described in the section 'Password and account type'.
  • The card Company data is described in the section 'Company data and employer profiles'.
Tip: The username can not be changed. The Email field shows the same address as the recovery email. The language is not set here: use the language button in the header.
Recovery email

The recovery email is used to recover access if you forget your password. It is also where the app sends the registration link, the code for changing the account type and the link for deleting the account.

  1. Open Profile.
  2. Type the new address in Recovery email.
  3. Press Save. You see 'Profile saved.'
Important: The address must be valid and not used by another account, otherwise you see 'That recovery email is already in use.' If you empty the field and save, the address is removed. Without a recovery email you cannot reset your password, switch the account type or delete the account.
Tip: In the demo the Save button is not shown.
Report timezone

The Report timezone is the timezone used when activity and infringement reports are drawn. You can choose Automatic (from IP location, default), UTC, Europe/Madrid (DST auto), Europe/Berlin (DST auto) or Europe/Bucharest (DST auto), then press Save. With the automatic option the timezone follows the location of your connection. When the connection does not report a timezone, Spain gives Europe/Madrid, Romania gives Europe/Bucharest and any other country Europe/Berlin.

Tip: When you change it, open reports are refreshed so they show the new times.
Company data

The card Company data on the same tab holds the companies you issue documents for. It is only for company accounts. Adding, editing and deleting them, the default company and the assignment to drivers and vehicles are described in the section 'Company data and employer profiles'.

Password and account type

Change your password or switch a company account into a driver account. Closing the account is described in a separate section.

Change your password
  1. Open Profile and choose the Security tab.
  2. In the card Change password type your Current password.
  3. Type the New password and Confirm new password. Use at least 6 characters with at least one special character.
  4. Press Change password. You see 'Password changed.'
Tip: If the current password is wrong, nothing changes and you see 'Current password is incorrect.' In the demo the button is not shown.
Tip: If you signed up with Google you do not know the current password. Use Forgot password? on the sign-in page to set one.
Switch the account type

The card Switch account type on the Profile tab changes a company account into a driver account. The card says 'Switch this account to a driver account. A 4-letter confirmation code is emailed to your recovery address.'

  1. Open Profile and find the card Switch account type.
  2. Read the warning, then press Email me a code.
  3. Open the email sent to your recovery email. It holds a code of 4 letters that is valid for 30 minutes.
  4. Type the code in Confirmation code and press Confirm switch.
  5. Confirm the question 'Switch this account to driver? This cannot be easily undone.' The app reloads as a driver account and shows 'Account changed to driver successfully.'
  • The card says 'Switching account type is currently disabled.' when the site administrator has not allowed switching.
  • You need a recovery email on the account first.
  • If registration for driver accounts is switched off, the card says 'Registration for driver accounts is currently disabled, so this switch is not available.'
  • The button is not available in the demo.
What a switch to driver deletes
Important: Switching to a driver account permanently removes all vehicles and their files, and all drivers except the first one you added, together with their files. Drivers who are linked to driver accounts are removed as well. This cannot be undone.

A driver account holds one driver and no vehicles. Any active subscription plan on the account ends with the switch. After the switch your menu changes to the driver menu and company-only features such as Drivers, Vehicles and Modules are gone.

Delete your account

To close the account for good, open Profile, choose the Security tab and press Request account deletion. An emailed link confirms it. The steps, the conditions and what is removed are described in the section 'Account data and deletion'.

Important: Deletion cannot be undone. Download the files you need first, for example with Global ZIP download on Tools.

Info page (dashboard)

The Info page is the first screen of the company app. It shows which drivers and vehicles need attention: uploads that are due, cards and documents that are about to expire, rest planning, recent infringements and the payroll forecast.

What the Info page shows

Open Info at the top of the left menu. The page is calculated from the most recently uploaded driver and vehicle files, so it is only as current as your uploads. From top to bottom it contains:

  • Driver rest planner: one row per driver with the rest-planning figures that matter right now.
  • Info: four short lists: driver files and vehicle files that are due for upload, vehicle documents that expire first, and driver cards and documents that expire first.
  • Company infringements: how many infringements each driver has in the last 56 days.
  • Payroll forecast: the current pay period of each driver. It only appears when the Payroll module is active for your company.
Tip: A grey banner titled Info at the top says that the company info is calculated from the most recently uploaded driver and vehicle files. Click the X in its corner to hide it. The choice is remembered in that browser only, so the banner can come back on another device.
Tip: In the Android app a card titled Bluetooth / Smart Card Reader (Smart Card Reader in older app versions) also appears above these cards. It is not shown in a normal web browser or in the demo. Using it is explained under Android app and card reader.
Tip: Click the title of Driver rest planner, Company infringements or Payroll forecast to fold or unfold that card. The app remembers your choice for your user.
Driver and vehicle files to upload soon

The lists Driver files to upload soon and Vehicle files to upload soon warn you before a download becomes too old. A driver card file is due 28 days after the last upload and a vehicle file 90 days after the last upload.

  • Driver or Vehicle - the driver's name (with licence and card number below it) or the vehicle registration. Click it to open that driver or vehicle.
  • Last upload: date and time of the last upload, or 'No file uploaded'.
  • Due by: the date by which the next file must be uploaded. This column is hidden on narrow screens.
  • Status: a coloured badge such as 'Due in 5 day(s)', 'Overdue by 2 day(s)' or 'No upload yet'.

A driver appears when the due date is 7 days away or closer (or already passed), a vehicle when it is 14 days away or closer. Badges are red when overdue or when there was never an upload, yellow when 3 days or less are left, and grey otherwise. The most urgent entries come first, and drivers or vehicles that never had a file are at the very top.

Tip: These look-ahead windows are fixed. They do not follow the day settings on the Reminders page, which only control the bell and phone notifications.
Tip: Trailers never appear in the vehicle list because they have no tachograph. A driver or vehicle with its upload reminder switched off is left out too.
Cards and documents that expire first

Driver cards/documents expiring first lists each driver's tachograph card and every other document registered for the driver (for example a driving licence) with its expiry date. Vehicle documents expiring first lists insurance, MOT and every other vehicle document that has an expiry date. Trailers appear here too, because their documents expire as well.

  • Document: for drivers a badge, Card for the tachograph card or Doc for another document, followed by the document name; for vehicles just the document name.
  • Expires on: the expiry date. Hidden on narrow screens.
  • Status: 'Expires in 12 day(s)' or 'Expired 3 day(s) ago', using the same colours as the upload lists.

A document appears when it expires within 30 days or has already expired, with the most urgent first. This 30-day window is fixed too.

Tip: The card expiry date is read from the driver card file you upload. Other driver and vehicle documents are added on the driver's or vehicle's own page. A document without an expiry date never appears here.
Long lists and empty lists

Each list shows its first 10 rows. When there are more, a line such as 'Showing first 10 of 14' appears together with a View all link that opens Drivers or Vehicles.

When nothing needs attention a list says so, for example 'No driver card uploads are due soon.' or 'No vehicle documents are expiring soon.'

If you have no drivers yet, the three tables say 'No drivers to plan yet.', 'No drivers to analyse yet.' and 'No drivers to forecast yet.' Add or link drivers first, then upload their files.

Driver tables: rest planner, infringements, payroll

Three per-driver tables on the Info page show rest planning, the last 56 days of infringements and the payroll forecast at a glance. They refresh by themselves when drivers upload new files.

Driver rest planner table

Driver rest planner shows one row per driver, with the newest uploads first. The figures are worked out from the driver's newest file. The card starts collapsed: click its header to expand it. While it is collapsed, the header shows the number of drivers and a yellow badge with the number of rows still to compute.

Each row starts with the driver's name (click it to open the full planner) and card number. The columns you can show are:

  • Last download: date and time of the driver's newest file.
  • Data until: the date and time the planner figures were calculated for.
  • Status: 'Resting since' a time, or 'Working'.
  • Daily rest ends: when the current daily rest can end: the regular time in bold and, when it is still possible, the reduced time. While the driver is working it shows 'next daily rest by' a time.
  • Next weekly rest by: the latest time the next weekly rest must be taken, with its duration.
  • Next regular weekly rest by: the latest time for the next regular weekly rest.
  • Driving today and Driving this week - driving time so far.
  • Can work until: how long the driver can still work, when known.

By default you see Last download, Status, Daily rest ends, Next weekly rest by and Next regular weekly rest by. A driver without a file shows 'No file uploaded yet.' and cannot be opened.

Open a driver's full rest planner
  1. In Driver rest planner, click the driver's name or press Open at the end of the row.
  2. A window opens with the title 'driver name — Rest Planning'. It has the tabs Summary, Working and Rest and opens on Summary.
  3. Read the tab you need, then close the window with the X or by clicking outside it.

Summary shows what the driver did since the last 45-hour weekly rest, Working the driving and working-time counters with the deadlines for the next rests, and Rest the current rest with its earliest end times. The section 'Rest planner' explains each tab. The window has no Infringements tab: use Company infringements or the driver's reports for that.

Company infringements card

Company infringements lists every driver with the number of infringements found in the last 56 days. It is always open and shows the drivers with the most recent infringement first.

  • Driver: the name. Click it to open the driver (only when the driver has a file).
  • Infringements: the count. A green badge such as -2 means fewer infringements than before, a red badge such as +3 means more. The comparison is with the count from before the driver's latest file was added.
  • Last infringement: what the most recent infringement was and when it ended. Hidden on narrow screens.

No badge appears the first time a driver is calculated or while the count has not changed. A row that shows Compute instead of a number has not been calculated for the driver's latest file yet. Press it to calculate that driver. If you have no drivers the card says 'No drivers to analyse yet.'

Tip: The legal options on Other Settings decide which rules are checked, so changing them changes these counts.
Payroll forecast table

Payroll forecast shows the current pay period of each driver. The whole card is hidden when the Payroll module is not active for your company.

  • Period: first and last day of the current pay period.
  • Days: days worked. Hours - hours worked. Nights out - nights spent away.
  • Km: distance driven. Base - base salary. Extras - extra pay.
  • Total: the total for the period, with the currency.

By default the table shows Period, Days, Hours, Nights out and Total. Click a driver or Open to see the full calculation in a window titled 'driver name — Payroll Calculation'.

Tip: When payroll settings, day overrides or extras change, the driver's payroll row is recalculated. Until then it shows the same waiting message as a new upload, or 'Not computed yet — press Compute.'
Compute: why some rows wait

Working out a driver's figures means reading all of that driver's files, which takes time. So the tables show saved results and recalculate a driver only when something changed: a new file was uploaded, a legal option changed, a payroll setting changed or a new day began (the 56-day window moves with the date). One calculation fills the rest planner, the infringements and the payroll rows of that driver.

  1. Look for rows that say 'New upload — will be computed automatically.' or 'Not computed yet — press Compute.'
  2. Wait a moment: while the Info page is open, a waiting driver is normally calculated by itself (see the next topic). To start it yourself, press Compute at the end of the row or in the Company infringements card. The button shows 'Computing…' while it works.
  3. To handle every waiting driver at once, expand the card and press Compute all (it shows how many are waiting). The drivers are calculated one after the other.
Important: A driver with more than 60 stored files cannot be calculated from the dashboard. Pressing Compute then shows the red message 'Too many files to compute in one request.'
Automatic refresh when drivers upload

While the Info page is open and its browser tab is visible, the page checks for new uploads every minute. A driver with a new file is recalculated in the background, one driver at a time, and the rows update in place. You do not need to reload.

A small line with a circular arrow in each table header shows what is happening, for example 'Watching for new uploads · checked 14:32' or 'New data — computing Ion Popescu…'. Rows waiting for their turn say 'New upload — will be computed automatically.' The line is hidden on narrow screens.

Tip: A scheduled background job also refreshes drivers with new uploads regularly, so rows are often ready before you open the page.
Tip: Each upload is tried automatically only once. If a calculation fails, the row stays waiting and you can press Compute. Checking pauses while the tab is hidden and is switched off in the demo.
Choose columns and rows per page
  1. Expand the card by clicking its header.
  2. Click Table settings (the sliders icon).
  3. Tick or untick the checkboxes under Columns. At least one column always stays on.
  4. Choose 5, 10, 20 or 50 under Drivers per page.
  5. Click Close.

With more drivers than fit on a page, a counter such as '1–10 of 24' and two arrow buttons let you move between pages.

Your columns, page size and whether the card is collapsed are saved to your login, so they follow you to other computers and phones. The rest planner and the payroll table each keep their own settings.

Tip: In the demo the tables start expanded and your choices are not saved.

Reminders

Reminders warn you about expiring cards and documents, overdue uploads, new infringements and the end of your subscription. You can switch each one on or off, set how early it appears and send it to your phone.

Where reminders appear

Reminders appear in the notification bell in the page header. If you use the Android app they can also arrive as push notifications on your phone. The Reminders page has no email option.

The settings are per account: what you choose here applies to your whole company account.

The reminder types

The Reminders page has one card per reminder. Every reminder starts switched on, with push on.

  • Driver card expiry: warns when a driver's card is about to expire or has expired. Starts 30 days before by default.
  • Driver document expiry: warns before a driver's registered documents (licence, CAP, medical certificate...) expire. Documents added by linked drivers sync here automatically. Starts 30 days before by default.
  • Driver upload: warns when a driver's card file is overdue. You can set up to 28 days; the default is 7.
  • Driver infringements: warns when a newly uploaded driver file contains more infringements than the previous one. It has no number of days.
  • Vehicle document expiry: warns before insurance, MOT and other vehicle documents expire. Starts 30 days before by default.
  • Vehicle upload: warns when a vehicle file is overdue. You can set up to 90 days; the default is 14.
  • Subscription expiry: warns before your subscription ends. Starts 14 days before by default.
Switch reminders on or off and set the lead time
  1. Click Settings in the left menu to open the group, then click Reminders.
  2. On a reminder's card, tick or untick Enabled. A reminder that is off disappears from the bell and from push.
  3. Set Days before: how many days ahead the reminder starts to appear. You can enter whole numbers from 0 to 3650. Driver upload accepts up to 28 and Vehicle upload up to 90.
  4. Tick Push notification if the reminder should also reach your phone. This box and Days before are greyed out while Enabled is off.
  5. Press Save reminders. The message 'Reminders saved.' confirms it.
Tip: In the Android app, saving with any push option on asks you to allow notifications if you have not done so yet.
Tip: The demo account can look at the page but has no Save reminders button. A frozen account (for example after a lapsed subscription) cannot save changes either.
Card, document and vehicle expiry reminders

A reminder appears as soon as an expiry date is inside the Days before window and stays until the document is renewed. Example of a normal line: 'Ion Popescu: driver card expires in 12 day(s) on 14/10/2026.' For documents the line names the document, and for vehicles it names the registration, for example 'Insurance for vehicle 1234ABC expires in 20 day(s) on 02/11/2026.'

Once an entry is expired it says, for example, 'expired 3 day(s) ago'. In the bell the whole group turns red as soon as one of its entries is expired. The vehicle documents group (Expiry notifications) is the exception: it is always shown as a warning, never in red.

The driver card expiry date is read from the card file you upload. Other driver documents and vehicle documents (insurance, MOT...) are added on the driver's or vehicle's own page. A document without an expiry date never triggers a reminder.

Upload reminders

Driver card files should be uploaded at least every 28 days and vehicle files at least every 90 days. Days before is how long before that limit the reminder starts. The age of the newest file is counted from its download date, which is read from the file name; if that is missing, the date of the last upload is used. With the default 7 days a driver reminder starts when the newest file is 21 days old. With the default 14 days a vehicle reminder starts when it is 76 days old.

On the day the limit is reached, and after it, the reminder turns red, for example 'The 28-day limit passed 3 day(s) ago.' A driver or vehicle that never had a file gets a red reminder asking for the first upload.

  1. To silence the reminder for a former driver, open Drivers in the left menu, open the driver and press Edit.
  2. Switch on Disable upload reminder and press Save.
  3. For a vehicle, open Vehicles, open the vehicle, press Edit, tick Disable upload reminders for this vehicle and press Save changes.
Tip: Use this for former drivers and vehicles that no longer need regular uploads. Trailers never get upload reminders because they have no tachograph. Their documents still trigger expiry reminders.
New infringement reminder

Driver infringements has no number of days. It appears when a driver's latest calculation shows more infringements in the last 56 days than before the newest file was added, for example 'Ion Popescu has 2 new infringements (5 total in the last 56 days).' It is always shown in red.

Tip: It only works for drivers whose summary has been calculated. See the Compute button on the Info page.
Subscription reminder

Subscription expiry warns before your plan ends: 'plan name expires in 10 day(s) on 12/10/2026. Renew soon to avoid interruption.' After the end date it turns red and asks you to renew the subscription to restore service. It only appears when your subscription has an end date.

Custom announcements

Below the reminder cards, Custom announcements lets you show your own messages in the bell, for example 'Tachograph download day on Friday'. An announcement is visible while it is enabled and, if you set dates, between its start and end. It appears under the title Custom reminder, in the bell of your own account. It is not sent to the accounts of your linked drivers.

  1. Press Add announcement. A block titled 'Announcement 1' (then 2, 3...) appears.
  2. Type the text in Message.
  3. Optionally set Starts at (leave empty to start immediately) and Ends at (leave empty to never expire).
  4. Keep Enabled switched on.
  5. Switch on Push notification at the top if announcements should also go to phones. This one switch covers all announcements.
  6. Press Save announcements. The message 'Announcements saved.' confirms it.
Tip: Delete removes an announcement. Announcements with an empty message are dropped when you save, and an end time that is before the start time is cleared. The demo cannot edit announcements.
Push notifications on your phone

Push notifications are delivered by the Android app. Sign in to the app and allow notifications when it asks. The app then registers your phone automatically. If you refuse the permission, no push arrives.

Push is checked once a day. For each reminder that is enabled, has Push notification ticked and currently has something to report, the phone receives one notification with the reminder's title and its first two lines. The same notification is not repeated on the same day.

Tip: Demo accounts never send push notifications.

Notification bell and banners

The bell in the page header collects everything that currently needs your attention, built from your reminder settings. You can mark items as read. Some account messages appear as bars at the top of the page instead.

Open the bell and read the list
  1. Click the bell icon in the header (Notifications). A badge on the bell shows the number of unread items, or 99+ when there are more than 99.
  2. Read the list in the Notifications panel. Items are grouped under a title such as 'Driver card expiry reminders'. All entries of a group are shown in red when the group holds something urgent: an expired document, an overdue upload, a missing first upload or new infringements. Other groups are ordinary warnings.
  3. Close the panel with the X, with the Esc key or by clicking outside it.

When nothing is waiting, the panel says 'No notifications right now.' The list refreshes by itself about every two minutes while the page is open, and straight away after you mark items as read. A change you make on the Reminders page shows up at the next refresh.

Mark notifications as read
  1. Click the tick icon (Mark as read) next to an item to clear it.
  2. Or click Mark all as read at the top of the panel to clear everything.

Read items disappear and the badge counts only unread items. The read mark belongs to your login. It ignores the changing day counters, so a line that says 'expires in 12 day(s)' does not come back tomorrow as 'expires in 11 day(s)'. A different driver, vehicle or document creates a new item, and so does a change of wording such as 'expires in' becoming 'expired'. A read mark is forgotten after 180 days, so a problem that is still open appears again.

Important: Marking as read only hides the item. It does not solve the cause and it does not stop push notifications. To stop push for a reminder, untick Push notification on the Reminders page.
Tip: The demo can look at the bell but cannot mark items as read.
What can appear in the bell

Each group in the bell follows one card on the Reminders page. A reminder that is switched off, or that has nothing to report, is not shown. The groups are:

  • Driver card expiry reminders: cards that expire soon or have expired.
  • Driver upload reminders: driver card files that are due or overdue.
  • New driver infringements: drivers whose infringement count went up. Always red.
  • Vehicle upload reminders: vehicle files that are due or overdue.
  • Driver document expiry: other driver documents such as licence or medical certificate.
  • Expiry notifications: vehicle documents such as insurance and MOT. Always a warning, never red.
  • Subscription reminders: your plan is about to end (warning) or has ended (red).
  • Custom reminder: your own announcements, one entry per announcement.
Tip: If you switch your company account to driver view, the bell still shows the notifications of the whole company.
Banners at the top of the page

Some messages are not in the bell. They appear as coloured bars above the page content:

  • A blue bar for a free trial that is ending, shown only to older accounts that were registered with a trial: 'Your free trial ends in 5 day(s), on 2026-10-07. After that only the modules included in your plan stay available.' with a Go to Billing button. It shows during the last 7 days of a trial that has not been paid.
  • A yellow bar for a module that ends: 'Access to (module name) ends in 3 day(s), on 2026-10-05.' It shows when a module you were granted for a limited time ends within 7 days.
  • A yellow bar for a frozen account: 'Your account is frozen — the app is read-only. Renew your subscription to make changes.'
  • A blue bar with a yellow Driver view badge while you use the app as one of your drivers: 'Driver view: name. Switch back to manage your company.' with the button Back to company view.
  • In the public demo a yellow notice says that it is a demo account only for demonstrating the application and that its data can change at any time. It has a button, Switch to driver demo or Switch to company demo depending on the demo you are in, and the button Register.
  • A highlighted greeting bar can appear around public holidays.

Other Settings (legal and report options)

The Other Settings page holds the legal and report options, the file formats for phone app uploads and linked drivers, and shows the report timezone in use. This section is the page reference; the legal rules are explained in the section 'Legal and report settings'.

Where to find it and how to save
  1. Open Settings in the left menu, then Other Settings.
  2. Work in the card Legal & report settings. It has the groups Legal rule options, Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle) and Linked driver file format.
  3. Press Save. The message 'Legal & report settings saved.' confirms it.

As the page itself says, these options change EU 561/2006 and Working Time Directive (2002/15/EC) analysis results. All switches are off by default.

Tip: The demo shows the page but has no Save button.
File format for phone app uploads

Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle) decides how tachograph downloads are saved when the phone app uploads them. In the list Preferred uploaded file format choose Auto, TGD or DDD.

  • For driver cards read with the Android app, Auto saves cards issued in Spain as TGD and all other cards as DDD. TGD or DDD forces that extension.
  • For truck files, Auto keeps the name you uploaded. With TGD or DDD the file is saved under the professional name V_REGISTRATION_COUNTRY_YYYYMMDD_HHMM with the chosen extension, for example V_4679MZH_E_20260430_1717.TGD. This applies to truck files uploaded in the browser and to Bluetooth downloads.
Tip: Driver-card files you upload yourself in the browser keep the name they already have.
File format for linked drivers' files

Linked driver file format (company accounts only) decides how driver-card files are stored when they are synced from a linked driver's own account into your company. In Preferred linked-driver file format, Auto keeps the driver's uploaded format as it is. TGD or DDD converts files synced from linked drivers to that format.

Report timezone

At the bottom of the form the line Resolved timezone: shows the timezone used for dates and times in your reports and on the Info page, followed by '(auto-resolved)' or '(manual setting)'. You cannot change it on this page. Choose it in Report timezone on Profile, as described in the section 'Your profile'.

What happens after you save

The new options apply to every analysis from then on. Open reports are refreshed. On the Info page the driver rows are recalculated with the new rules, so they can briefly wait to be computed, and infringement counts can go up or down.

Drivers

The Drivers page lists every driver your company manages, including drivers who linked their own driver account. From here you add drivers, open a driver's page and keep driver records up to date.

Read the drivers list

Open Drivers in the left menu. You see one row per driver. At the top right you see the number of drivers (for example 12 total). Drivers who linked through their own driver account are in the list too.

  • Name: select it to open the driver's page. A small link icon next to the name marks a linked driver.
  • Card number: the number of the driver card.
  • Licence: the driving licence number. For a driver you added yourself it stays empty until a card file has been uploaded.
  • Card expiry: the date the driver card expires. A red badge means the card has already expired. A yellow badge means it expires within 30 days.
  • Files: how many tachograph files are stored for the driver.
  • Last upload: the date of the newest stored file. This is normally the day the file was downloaded from the card.

Type in the search box (Search name, card or licence…) to filter the list as you type. Select the Card expiry or Last upload heading to sort by it, and select it again to reverse the order. Rows with an empty value always stay at the bottom.

Tip: A dash means the value is not known yet. With no drivers the page shows No drivers yet. A search without a result shows No matching drivers.
Add a driver

Add a driver when you want to start collecting that person's tachograph files. You only need a name and the driver card number.

  1. Open Drivers and select Add driver.
  2. Optional: under Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill, choose the driver's card file (.ddd or .tgd). The app reads the name and card number from the file and fills in the form. Nothing is saved yet.
  3. Check Driver name and Card number. Both are required.
  4. Select Save. The new driver appears in the list.
Tip: The file you choose for auto-fill is only read to fill in the form (up to 50 MB). It is not stored. Only driver card files work: a vehicle file is refused with Could not extract driver info from DDD file: Only driver card files (C_...) are accepted here. To keep the file, open the driver and use Upload.

Card numbers are saved in capital letters without spaces. After you add a driver, upload the driver's card file: the licence number, birth date, card expiry and card generation are then filled in from the file. In the Android app you can also put a driver card in the card reader and select Download card on the Info page. A card that is not in your list yet is then added as a new driver, if your driver limit allows it and your list already has at least one driver.

Important: Each card number can be used only once. If it already exists you see This card number is already authorized. Only drivers you add yourself count toward your account's driver limit, linked drivers do not. When you reach the limit, adding is refused with Driver limit reached for this account. and the number of allowed drivers.
Tip: Add driver is not available in the read-only demo.
Open a driver's page

Select a driver's name in the list. The heading shows the name and card number. For a linked driver you also see the badges Shared and Linked (or Unlinked when the driver has removed your company). Select All drivers at the top left to go back to the list.

  • Buttons at the top right: Edit and Delete. The link with a driver account is removed on the Link page (see the section 'Linking drivers to your company').
  • Information card: Licence, Birth date, Card expiry, Card gen. (card generation) and Last download. The last download time is shown in the Report timezone of your account.
  • Reports opens the report choices for the driver's newest file. It is disabled while the driver has no files.
  • Documents: licences and certificates with expiry dates (see the section 'Driver documents').
  • Files: every stored tachograph file, with the Download all and Upload buttons (see the section 'Upload tachograph files').
  • Trip notes: only for linked drivers who share their trip notes with you.
Tip: You set the Report timezone on the Profile tab of the Account page.
Linked and manually added drivers

Your list can hold three kinds of drivers.

  • Added by you with Add driver: the record belongs to your company. You upload the files, you can edit every detail and you can delete the driver. You can also open the app as this driver (see the section 'Using the app as one of your drivers').
  • Linked: the driver linked a driver account with your invitation code. Name, licence and card data come from the driver's own account and are refreshed whenever the driver uploads a file. New files arrive by themselves. The driver has a link icon in the list and the badges Shared and Linked on the page.
  • Unlinked: the driver removed your company. The record and the files already copied stay, with the badge Unlinked. New uploads, yours included, are refused, and the driver's shared trip notes are no longer shown.
Tip: Use Unlink in the Linked drivers table on the Link page to turn a linked or unlinked driver into a driver you manage yourself. Such a driver then counts toward your driver limit.
Tip: If you added a driver by hand and the driver later links with the same card number, the existing record becomes the linked driver. The app does not create a second one.
Edit a driver
  1. Open the driver's page and select Edit.
  2. Change Driver name or Card number if needed.
  3. Adjust the options described in the next topic.
  4. Select Save.

If you change the card number, the driver's stored files move to the new number automatically, so nothing is lost. A new card number that another driver already uses is refused with This card number is already authorized.

Important: Do not change the card number of a linked driver. The driver's own account keeps sending files under the original number, so the app can add a second entry for the same person.
Tip: For a linked driver, the driver's own account is the source of truth. Name, licence and card data are refreshed from that account each time the driver uploads a file, so changes you make to them can be overwritten. Your own switches, such as Disable upload reminder, stay as you set them.
Driver options and access switches

The Edit driver window also holds company-only options. Some of them appear only when the matching module is active for your company.

  • Disable upload reminder: use it for inactive or former drivers who no longer need regular file uploads. The driver is then left out of the upload reminders.
  • Payroll access (Payroll module): lets the driver see their own payroll forecast from their driver account.
  • Payroll tier (Payroll module, shown once you have created payroll tiers): gives the driver a custom payroll setup. Default (company settings) uses your standard payroll settings.
  • Time registry access (Time Registry module): lets the driver view and download their own time registry from their account.
  • Fuel tickets access (Fuel tickets module): lets the driver upload and see fuel tickets from their own account.
  • Working with company since (Payroll or Time Registry module): payroll and the time registry ignore all card data before this date. Leave it empty for no limit, or select Clear to empty it.
  • DNI / NIF and Social Security number (Time Registry module): used on the Time Registry PDF.
  • Company (shown when you have company profiles or the Time Registry module): the company this driver works for, printed as the employer on the driver's Time Registry. With — Not assigned — the Time Registry cannot be downloaded for this driver until you pick a company.
Tip: These switches work for linked drivers too. A linked driver sees the menu entries Payroll, Time Registry and Fuel tickets only after you switch the matching access on.
Tip: The window also has Assigned truck, explained in the topic 'Assign a truck to a driver'.
Delete a driver
  1. Open the driver's page.
  2. Select Delete.
  3. Confirm the question Delete this driver and all of its files? This cannot be undone.
Important: Deleting a driver is permanent. The driver, the driver's files and the driver's documents disappear from your company.

You can delete only one driver per day. A second attempt on the same day is refused with Only one driver can be deleted per day.

Important: Deleting a linked driver does not end the link. The link stays active, so the driver's next upload can bring the driver back into your list. To stop sharing, select Unlink on the Link page first, then delete.
Tip: To stop sharing with a linked driver but keep the driver and the files, use only Unlink on the Link page (see the section 'Linking drivers to your company').
Card expiry and upload reminders

In the list, a yellow badge marks a driver card that expires within 30 days and a red badge an expired card. The bell also warns you about expiring cards and about files that are overdue: a driver card file should be uploaded at least every 28 days, counted from the date of the driver's newest file.

Tip: Lead times, push notifications and the groups of the bell are described in the section 'Reminders'. Use Disable upload reminder on a driver who no longer needs to upload files. The card date only updates when you upload a card file made after the card was renewed.
Assign a truck to a driver

Give each driver the truck they usually drive. The trailer linked to that truck in Vehicles comes with it, and several drivers can share one truck, for example a team.

  1. Open Drivers, click the driver and press Edit.
  2. Choose the truck in Assigned truck. The list shows your trucks, each with its linked trailer. — No truck — removes the assignment.
  3. Press Save.

Below the list the app can show the truck the driver's card was last used in, for example Last driven (card): 1234ABC on 03/10/2026, read from the newest uploaded card file. When that truck is in your fleet, press Assign to pick it. The app never changes the assignment by itself.

  • DeCA, eCMR and transport order forms fill in the Tractor plate and Trailer plate from the driver's truck when you pick the driver. Only empty plates are filled; plates you typed or imported are kept.
  • The Drivers list gets a Truck column with the truck and its trailer as soon as one driver has a truck. The search also finds drivers by plate.
  • In Vehicles, each truck shows its drivers, and the truck's page lists them under Drivers.
Tip: Deleting a truck, or changing it into a trailer, removes it from the drivers it was assigned to. Only trucks can be assigned, not trailers.

Driver documents

Keep each driver's licences and certificates with their expiry dates, so you are warned before anything lapses. The documents live on the driver's page.

What driver documents are

A driver document is a named item such as a driving licence, CAP, tachograph card, medical certificate or ADR card. Each one can have an expiry date, free-text notes and up to two photos (front and back).

Find them on the driver's page, in the block above the files list. The heading shows how many documents the driver has, for example Documents (3).

Tip: Drivers with their own driver account manage their documents themselves. For a linked driver those documents are copied to your company automatically, so you can plan renewals.
Add a document
  1. Open the driver's page.
  2. Under Documents, select Add document.
  3. Type the Document name. It is required.
  4. Optional: choose a date in Expires on and write details in Document info.
  5. Select Save.
Tip: A document without an expiry date shows the grey badge No expiry set and never triggers a reminder. Add document is not available in the read-only demo.
Edit or delete a document
  1. Select the pencil icon next to the document, change the fields in Edit document and select Save.
  2. Or select the trash icon and confirm the question that starts with Delete document. This cannot be undone.
Important: For a linked driver, the driver's own account is the source of truth. When the driver adds, changes or deletes a document or photo, the list in your company is replaced with the driver's list. Changes you make to a linked driver's documents can therefore be overwritten.
Attach photos to a document
  1. Find the Front and Back slots under the document.
  2. Select Add photo and choose a picture. Use JPG, PNG or WebP, up to 10 MB. On a phone you can take the picture with the camera.
  3. To change a picture select the Replace photo icon beside it. To remove it select the Remove photo icon and confirm.
  4. Select a thumbnail to open the picture full size in a new tab.
Tip: A document holds at most two photos. They stay on the document when you edit its text.
Expiry colours and reminders
  • Green, Valid until followed by the date: more than 30 days left.
  • Yellow, Expires in followed by the number of days: 30 days or fewer left.
  • Red, Expired followed by the number of days ago: the date has passed.
  • Grey, No expiry set: the document has no expiry date.

Documents with an expiry date also feed your reminders: the bell shows a Driver document expiry group for the documents of all your drivers. Lead time and push settings are described in the section 'Reminders'.

Linking drivers to your company

Drivers with their own driver account can link to your company with an invitation code. Their tachograph files then reach you automatically, without anyone sending files by hand.

How linking works

The driver starts the link, not you. You share your invitation code and the driver enters it in their own account. A driver account belongs to one professional driver. When that driver links to your company, a copy of the driver's record and stored files appears in your Drivers list. From then on, every file the driver uploads is copied to you automatically.

  • The driver stays in control and can remove your company at any time.
  • A driver can be linked to several companies at the same time.
  • A linked driver has a link icon in the list and the badges Shared and Linked on the driver's page.
  • Your company has a driver limit. A new link is refused when the drivers already in your list, linked ones included, have reached that limit, unless the driver is in your list already.
Find and share your invitation code
  1. Open Settings in the left menu, then Link.
  2. Copy the code from the Invitation code field. It has 5 characters, capital letters and digits.
  3. Send the code to your driver. The driver enters it in their own account.
Important: A code works for one driver only. As soon as a driver links with it, the app creates a new code automatically. Open the Link page again to get the current code before you invite the next driver.
Renew the invitation code
  1. On the Link page select Renew code.
  2. Confirm Renew the invitation code? The current code will stop working for new links. Already-linked drivers are not affected.
  3. The page shows Invitation code renewed successfully. and the new code.

Renew the code when you shared it with the wrong person or you want to cancel an unused invitation. Drivers who are already linked stay linked.

Tip: The Renew code button is not shown in the read-only demo, and a frozen (read-only) account cannot renew the code.
What you can do for a linked driver
  • View every report for the driver and download the files the driver uploaded.
  • Upload new files for the driver while the link is active. They stay in your company's copy.
  • Delete your company's copy of a file. The driver's own copy is not touched.
  • Use the driver options: Disable upload reminder and, with the matching modules, payroll, time registry and fuel access.
  • See the driver's documents. They are copied from the driver's account.
  • Read the driver's trip notes if the driver chose to share them with you.
Tip: Name, licence number and card data of a linked driver come from the driver's own account and are refreshed with the driver's uploads.
Trip notes shared by a driver

A linked driver can share trip notes with your company. Sharing is off when a driver first links, and each driver decides per company. When the driver shares, a Trip notes card with the five latest notes appears at the bottom of the driver's page.

Tip: Reading the notes, and why the card may be missing, is described in the section 'Trip notes of linked drivers'.
When a driver removes your company

A driver can remove your company on their own Link page at any time. The driver and every file already copied stay in your Drivers list, but the badge changes from Linked to Unlinked.

  • You can still view and download the files already copied to your company.
  • New files no longer arrive, and your own uploads for that driver are refused with Future uploads are no longer available for this linked driver.
  • The driver's trip notes and later document changes no longer reach you.
Important: If a driver deletes the whole driver account, the driver and the copied files are removed from your list as well.
Limits and common problems
  • A driver needs a driver record before linking. Otherwise the driver sees Create your driver profile first before linking a company.
  • When the drivers in your list have reached your driver limit, the driver sees This company has already reached its driver limit, followed by the limit. Delete a driver you no longer need to free a place.
  • A wrong, used or renewed code gives This invitation code does not belong to a valid company account. Send the driver the current code from your Link page.
  • The app allows only 5 link attempts within 15 minutes from the same connection. After that the driver sees Too many attempts. Try again later.

Using the app as one of your drivers

A company account can use the app as one of its own drivers, for example when the owner also drives. You see what that driver would see and switch back with one click.

What the driver view is

Some company owners drive themselves, for example a self-employed driver who also runs the company. The driver view lets you use the app as one of your own drivers, with the driver menu (Files, Documents, Trip Notes and so on).

You stay signed in to the same account. Nothing is swapped and nothing is lost: you only change the view.

Switch to driver view
  1. Select the Switch to driver view button in the top bar (the icon with two arrows).
  2. In Select driver, search by name, card number or licence number in the box Search by name or card and choose one driver.
  3. Select Switch to driver. The app reloads in driver view.

Only your own drivers are listed. Drivers who linked through a driver account are not available in this mode. When you have none, the window says No internal drivers available. Add a driver record first; drivers linked to a driver account cannot be used.

Tip: The button is not shown in the read-only demo.
What changes in driver view
  • The left menu switches to the driver menu (Files, Documents, Trip Notes and so on).
  • The app shows only the driver you picked, the same way a driver account sees its own record.
  • A banner with the badge Driver view and the text 'Driver view: NAME. Switch back to manage your company.' stays at the top of every page.
  • Notifications stay company-wide, so you do not miss company reminders.
Go back to company view

Select Back to company view, either in the banner or in the top bar. The app reloads in company view.

Tip: A driver view lasts up to 12 hours. The app remembers your last view on this device, so when you reopen or reload it (for example the Android app) it switches back into the view you were in, as long as the driver still exists. To stay in company view, leave driver view with Back to company view. Logging out also forgets the remembered view.
Tip: The driver view is not available in the read-only demo. If your account is frozen (read-only) you cannot start the driver view, but you can always switch back.

Company data and employer profiles

Store the companies you issue registries and documents for (name, tax number, address), set a default and assign a company to each driver, truck and trailer.

What company profiles are and where to find them

Select Profile at the bottom of the left menu and stay on the Profile tab of the Account page. The Company data card is below your account details. It is for company accounts only.

A company profile stores the identity of one company: Company, CIF / NIF, Workplace, Address, Postal code, City, Country, Phone and Email. If you run more than one legal entity, keep one profile for each. The profiles are used on the Time Registry PDF, on vehicles, in the Global ZIP download and on your CMR and DeCA documents.

Tip: The public demo is read-only, so changes are not saved there.
Add, edit, delete and set a default
  1. Fill in Company. The name is required.
  2. Optional: add CIF / NIF, Workplace, Address, Postal code, City, Country, Phone and Email.
  3. Select Add company. The company appears in the list above the form.
  • Select Edit on a company to change it, then Save. Cancel drops your changes.
  • Select Set as default to make a company your default. The default carries a Default badge.
  • Select Delete and confirm to remove a company. Drivers and vehicles assigned to it become unassigned.
Tip: When you select Set as default, the name and tax number of that company are copied into your company settings. The app uses them for documents it generates for you, such as the DeCA, and as your billing contact name. In the CMR of the Work module you can pick one of these companies under Carrier — company profile to fill the carrier box. The Time Registry never uses the default: it always uses the company assigned to the driver.
Assign a company to drivers and vehicles
  • Driver: open Drivers, click the driver, press Edit and choose Company. The field is shown when you have at least one company profile or the Time Registry module. The empty choice reads — Not assigned —.
  • Vehicle: open Vehicles, add or edit a truck or trailer and choose a Company. The empty choice reads Not assigned.
Tip: The company assigned to a driver is the employer printed on the driver's Time Registry PDF, and it is shown as the employer on the driver's payroll tab. A driver who is — Not assigned — cannot get the registry PDF until you pick a company.
Where company profiles are used
  • Vehicles: once you have at least one profile, the list shows a Company column and a filter with All companies, each company and Without company.
  • Tools: the Global ZIP download card gets a Company selector, so you can download only the files of the drivers and vehicles of one company, or those Without company.
  • Work (needs the Work module): in the CMR form of a transport order, Carrier — company profile fills the carrier box from the profile (name, address, tax number and phone). In the DeCA form, Company (effective carrier) fills the carrier name and VAT/NIF.
Tip: Only Company is required. A profile without the postal fields still works for the Time Registry.
Delete a company

Press Delete on the line of the company and confirm. The drivers and vehicles that were assigned to it become unassigned.

Important: A driver without an assigned company cannot get the registry PDF until you assign another company. The confirmation text says that drivers fall back to the default company, but the registry never does that.

Upload tachograph files

Reports, the rest planner and reminders are calculated from the files you download from driver cards and tachographs. Upload them for a driver or a truck, one by one or several at once.

Which files you can upload

You can upload tachograph download files with the extension .ddd or .tgd, in capital or small letters. Each file can be up to 50 MB.

There are two kinds of file. A driver-card file is read from a driver's tachograph card and belongs to a driver. A vehicle-unit file is downloaded from the tachograph fitted in a truck and belongs to a truck.

The app looks inside the file to see which kind it is, so a file with an unusual name still works when its content is valid. Official names start with C_ for a driver card or V_ for a vehicle unit. A .TGD card name continues with the card number, the country, the date and the time. A .DDD card name written by this app continues with the date, the time, the country and the card number. A vehicle name continues with the registration, the country, the date and the time.

Tip: The app reads .ddd and .tgd files in the same way. Only the naming layout differs. You can switch a stored file from one name to the other, as described in the section about stored files.
Important: Archives are refused. A ZIP, RAR, 7z or gzip file that was renamed to .ddd or .tgd is rejected with the message 'This looks like a ZIP/archive file. Extract it and upload the .DDD/.TGD tachograph file inside.'
Add the driver or truck first

In the browser, a file can only be stored for a driver or a truck that is already in your account. Add the driver with Add driver on the Drivers page and the truck with Add vehicle on the Vehicles page, then upload as often as you need. The steps are described in the sections 'Drivers' and 'Vehicles: your trucks and trailers'.

Tip: The auto-fill in those forms (Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill) only reads a file to fill in the fields. It does not store the file, so upload it after you have saved the driver or truck. Your account also has a limit on how many drivers and vehicles it can hold, and a card number can be used only once.
Upload files for a driver
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu and click the driver's name.
  2. Above the list of files (headed Files with their number, for example Files (3)), click Upload.
  3. Click the file field and select one or several .ddd or .tgd files.
  4. Click the upload button. When you picked several files it shows their number, for example Upload 3 files.
  5. Watch the status next to each file: Waiting…, Uploading…, then Uploaded. A red label shows the reason when a file fails.

Files are sent one after another, in the order you chose them. If one file fails, the others are still sent.

When you upload a single file and it works, the window closes by itself. With several files, or when something failed, the list stays on screen and a line such as '1 of 3 files failed.' appears. Click Done when you have read it.

Tip: Only driver-card files can be stored for a driver. A vehicle-unit file is answered with 'Only driver card files (C_...) are accepted here.' Files you upload for a linked driver stay in your company's copy and do not appear in the driver's own account. The Upload button is not shown in the read-only demo.
Upload files for a truck
  1. Open Vehicles in the left menu and make sure the Trucks tab is selected.
  2. Click the truck's registration.
  3. Above the list of files (Files with their number), click Upload.
  4. Select one or several .ddd or .tgd files and click the upload button.
  5. Check the status next to each file, as for drivers.

Only vehicle-unit files are accepted. The registration found inside the file must be the truck's own registration, otherwise the upload is discarded. A driver-card file is answered with 'Only vehicle files (V_...) are accepted here.'

Tip: A trailer page has no Files list, only its documents and its log, because a trailer has no tachograph.
Files of linked drivers

A driver who works through a linked driver account shows a link icon in the Drivers list. On the driver's page the name carries the badges Shared and Linked (or Unlinked).

  • While the badge says Linked, the driver's own uploads reach your account automatically, and you can also upload files for this driver yourself.
  • When the badge says Unlinked, the files already copied to your account stay in the list, but new uploads are refused with 'Future uploads are no longer available for this linked driver.'
  • Deleting a file of a linked driver removes only your copy.
Tip: Links are managed under Link in the Settings group of the left menu.
Messages you may see when a file is refused

Before a file is stored, the app compares it with the driver or truck you chose. These are the messages you can meet and what they mean.

  • 'Upload discarded: card number in file content does not match selected driver.' The card belongs to another driver. Open the right driver and upload it there.
  • 'Upload discarded: card number in filename does not match selected driver.' The card number written in the file name is not this driver's. Upload the file to the driver it belongs to.
  • 'Upload discarded: driving licence number in file does not match selected driver.' The licence on the card is not the licence stored for this driver.
  • 'Upload discarded: registration number in file content does not match selected vehicle.' and the same message about the file name: the file comes from another truck.
  • 'Only driver card files (C_...) are accepted here.' or 'Only vehicle files (V_...) are accepted here.' You chose the wrong kind of file for this page, or the file is not a readable tachograph download.
  • 'File is too large. Maximum allowed size is 50 MB.' and 'Uploaded file is empty.'
  • 'Future uploads are no longer available for this linked driver.' The link with this driver no longer allows uploads.
  • 'Your account is frozen. Renew your subscription to make changes.' Uploads, deletions and conversions are blocked until the subscription is renewed.
  • 'This is a read-only demo. Create your own account to make changes.' The demo account cannot store files.
Tip: A renewed card is accepted. When the driving licence number in the file is the same as the one stored for the driver, the app takes the file even though the card number is new, updates the driver's card number and moves the stored files to it. If no licence number is stored yet because no card file was uploaded before, a file with a different card number is refused: press Edit on the driver, enter the new card number and upload the file again.
Duplicates and replaced files

For a truck, a file whose content is identical to a file already stored is refused as a duplicate. The message may appear as the code err_duplicate_vehicle_file_content instead of a sentence. A different file that has the same name is kept under a new name with a number, for example name (2).ddd.

For a driver, uploading a file with the same name again replaces the stored copy.

Important: By default the app keeps only one driver-card file for each calendar week (Monday to Sunday). When you upload a file whose download date falls in a week that already has a file, only the file with the newest download date stays and the others are deleted automatically. Uploading an older file for a week that already has a newer one can therefore leave the older file out of the list, although the upload looks successful.
Tip: The length of this period is a platform setting that you cannot change yourself. Truck files are not replaced this way.
What happens after a file is stored
  • The file appears in the Files list of the driver or truck, newest first. The Last upload date moves to the download date of the newest file.
  • Driver card: the licence number, birth date, card expiry, card generation and Last download of the driver are refreshed from the file you uploaded.
  • Driver card: the odometer readings recorded on the card update the last known odometer of the trucks the driver used, when those registrations are in your account.
  • Truck file: the truck page shows details read from the newest file, such as VIN, Last download, Last company, Next calibration, Certificate and Last odometer. A detail is left out when the file does not contain it.
  • Truck file: the next calibration date is saved as a document named Tachograph calibration in the truck's documents. The app updates it with every upload. Its name, date and notes cannot be edited and it cannot be deleted by hand.
  • Files uploaded by a driver who is linked to your company arrive in your account on their own, without any action from you.

Reports, the rest planner and the Info page are calculated from the newest files, so they refresh after an upload.

Upload deadlines

A driver card file should be uploaded at least every 28 days and a vehicle file at least every 90 days, counted from the download date of the newest file. The bell and the upload tables on the Info page warn you before the limit. See the sections 'Reminders' and 'Info page (dashboard)'.

Tip: To stop reminders for a driver or truck that no longer uploads, tick Disable upload reminder (driver) or Disable upload reminders for this vehicle (truck) in its Edit window.

Bulk upload

Bulk upload stores many files in one go. The app works out for each file whether it belongs to a driver or to a truck and finds the matching driver or truck for you.

Upload a whole folder of files
  1. Open Tools in the left menu and find the Bulk upload card.
  2. Click the Files field and select all the .ddd and .tgd files you want to store, up to 50 MB each.
  3. Click Upload all. The button shows the number of files, for example Upload all (12).
  4. Watch the Result column. Each file shows Waiting…, then Uploading…, then its outcome.
  5. Read the line at the end, for example '10 uploaded, 2 skipped.'

The app sorts the files by the date written in their names, or by the last-modified date of the file on your computer when the name has none, and sends the oldest first, one at a time.

Tip: Bulk upload is only on company accounts. It is not shown to driver accounts or in the read-only demo.
How files are matched to drivers and trucks

For each file the app reads the content. A driver-card file goes to the driver with the same card number. When there is none, the app tries the driving licence number found in the file. A vehicle-unit file goes to the truck with the registration found in the file.

Only drivers and trucks that are already in your account are used. Bulk upload never adds new drivers or trucks.

Once matched, the file is stored with the same checks and rules as a single upload.

Reading the results
  • Assigned to followed by a driver name or a registration: the file was stored for that driver or truck.
  • Skipped: followed by a reason: the file was readable but no matching driver or truck exists in your account. The reason is 'Upload rejected: card number is not authorized by admin.' for a driver or 'Operation rejected: vehicle is not authorized by admin.' for a truck. Add the driver or truck, then upload the file again.
  • A red message: the file could not be stored. Typical reasons are an empty file, a file over 50 MB, a duplicate truck file, a linked driver whose uploads are no longer allowed, or a file that is not a readable tachograph download, such as an archive ('Invalid filename format: ...').

A skipped or failed file never stops the rest of the batch. The final line counts the files that were uploaded, skipped and failed.

Tips for a clean bulk upload
  • Add all drivers and trucks first, so that nothing is skipped.
  • Do not select ZIP archives. Extract them and select the files inside.
  • Remember that by default only one driver-card file per calendar week is kept for each driver (see the topic 'Duplicates and replaced files' in the section 'Upload tachograph files').
  • To retry, select only the skipped files. Selecting everything again shows an error for each truck file that is already stored, because it is a duplicate.

Stored files: reports, download, convert and delete

Every driver and every truck has a list of stored files. From it you open reports, download the original file, change its name between .DDD and .TGD, or delete it.

Where your files appear

Open a driver from Drivers or a truck from Vehicles. The list headed Files with their number shows the stored files, newest first, with these columns:

  • Name: the file name. Click it to open the report menu.
  • Date: normally the download date and time of the file, read from its name or from the file itself.
  • Size: the file size (hidden on small screens).
  • Actions: the download, convert and delete icons.

The Drivers list and the Trucks tab of the Vehicles list also show how many files each driver or truck has and the download date of the newest one (columns Files and Last upload). A truck without any file carries the badge Files due. See the sections 'Drivers' and 'Vehicles: your trucks and trailers'.

Open a report from a file
  1. Click a file name in the Files list. The window File reports opens.
  2. Pick a report. It replaces the file list on the same page.
  3. Click Back to files to return to the list.
  • Driver files: Infringements, Activities, Rest planning, Work summary, Speed report, and Payroll when the payroll module is active.
  • Truck files: Activities, Speed report, Over-speeding, Faults & events and All data.
  • Both: Map history opens a route map of the positions stored in the newest files (see the section 'Route history and location maps').

The Reports button on the information card of a driver or truck opens the same menu for the newest file. The reports are described in the sections 'Driver reports' and 'Vehicle reports'.

Download a stored file
  1. Open the driver or truck.
  2. In the Files list, click the download icon in the Actions column.

You get the original .ddd or .tgd file under its stored name.

Tip: The read-only demo hides the download icon and refuses downloads.
Convert a file between .DDD and .TGD

A stored file can change its name from .DDD to .TGD or the other way round. Only the name changes. The content stays exactly the same.

  1. Open the driver or truck.
  2. In the Files list, click the arrows icon (its tooltip is Convert) in the Actions column.
  3. The list refreshes and shows the new name.
  • A driver-card file gets the official layout of the new extension: C_CARDNUMBER_COUNTRY_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.TGD for .TGD and C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_COUNTRY_CARDNUMBER.DDD for .DDD. Spain appears as the country code E.
  • A truck file keeps its name, written in capital letters, with the new extension.
Tip: The current name must follow an official pattern: V_ or C_ names, or the alternative card name C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD, using only letters, digits, dots, hyphens and underscores. Otherwise the app answers that the file name could not be converted.
Tip: If another stored file already has the new name, the conversion is refused with 'A file with the converted name already exists.' Conversion is also blocked in the demo and on a frozen account.
Delete a stored file
  1. Open the driver or truck.
  2. In the Files list, click the trash icon in the Actions column.
  3. Confirm the question 'Delete file ... ? This cannot be undone.'
Important: A deleted file cannot be restored. Upload it again if you still have it.
Tip: A file that came from a linked driver is a separate copy stored in your account. Deleting it removes only your copy.
File format for new files

The file format for cards read with the Android app, for truck files saved from the phone and for the card files that linked drivers send you is set under Settings, then Other Settings, in the groups Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle) and Linked driver file format. See the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)'.

Tip: Driver-card files you upload yourself in the browser keep the name they already have.

ZIP downloads and the filename converter

Download all the stored files of one driver, one truck or your whole account as a ZIP, or rename a file on your own computer between .DDD and .TGD.

Download all files of one driver
  1. Open the driver and click Download all above the Files list.
  2. In the window Download files (date range), set From and To. They start with the dates of the stored files. The quick buttons Last 6 months, Last 12 months and This year fill them in for you.
  3. Click Download all. The browser saves a ZIP named driver_ followed by the card number and _files.zip, with the files side by side.

Both dates are needed, and From must not be after To. The range applies to the date saved with each file, which is normally its download date. When no file falls in the range, the app answers 'No files to download for that range.'

Tip: The button only appears when the driver has files. It is hidden in the demo.
Download all files of one truck
  1. Open the truck. In the header of the Documents block, click Download all.
  2. In the window Download files (date range), pick From and To, or clear both to get the full history. The quick buttons are Last 6 months, Last 12 months, Last year and This year.
  3. Click Download ZIP. The browser saves a ZIP named vehicle_ followed by the registration and _files.zip.
Tip: If you fill in only one date, the app asks for both or neither. The button only appears when the truck has files, so a trailer never shows it. When no file falls in the range the app answers 'No files to download for this range.'
Download everything from the Tools page

The Global ZIP download card on Tools packs every stored file of your account into one archive. It can be limited to one company and can add DeCA and eCMR PDFs. It is described in the section 'Tools: ZIP download, converter, bulk upload, trip calculator'.

Tip: A single driver or truck is downloaded from its own page, as described above.
Rename a file on your computer
  1. Open Tools and find the card Filename converter.
  2. Choose the File on your computer (.ddd or .tgd).
  3. Choose the Target: TGD or DDD.
  4. Click Convert. The browser saves the same file under its new name and the card says 'Converted to ...'.

Nothing is stored in your account. Only the name is rewritten to the official format, the content is not touched. Alternate card names such as C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD are converted to the official C_CARDNUMBER_COUNTRY_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.TGD format.

Tip: The file can be up to 50 MB and its name must follow an official V_ or C_ pattern, or the alternate card name C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD. Otherwise the converter explains that the file name is not valid.

Android app and card reader

The Android app runs the same screens as the website and adds a USB smart-card reader, Bluetooth download from a tachograph and phone notifications.

What the Android app adds
  • Reading a driver card with a USB smart-card reader and uploading the file straight away.
  • Connecting to a tachograph over Bluetooth to download a driver card or, on company accounts, the vehicle-unit file (app version 3.1.0 or newer).
  • Writing the current date to the driver card with Mark card as downloaded.
  • Phone notifications for your reminders.
  • A notice when a newer version of the app is required.
Tip: You do not need the app to upload files. Uploading from a browser also works on a phone. The app is needed for the card reader, Bluetooth and phone notifications.
Find the reader panel

The panel is at the top of the Info page. It is called Smart Card Reader, or Bluetooth / Smart Card Reader in app versions that support Bluetooth. It only appears inside the Android app and only when you are signed in with a real account. The read-only demo never shows it.

The panel checks for a reader regularly and opens by itself when a reader is plugged in. Tap its title to open or close it by hand. The status line shows 'Checking smart-card reader...', then a message such as 'Reader connected' with the reader's name, or 'No compatible smart-card reader detected.'

Tip: A company account with no driver yet sees the panel locked open, with a lock icon. With a USB reader, Download card stays grey until the account has at least one driver. Add the driver first. The grey button shows the tooltip 'Upload is not available for this driver.' A Bluetooth connection does not have this condition.
Read a driver card with a USB reader
  1. Plug the USB smart-card reader into the phone and allow the USB permission when the phone asks.
  2. Insert the driver card in the reader. The status line shows the reader's name.
  3. Open Info and check that the reader panel is open.
  4. Tap Download card.
  5. Wait until the message 'Smart-card file uploaded.' appears. Do not remove the card before that.

During the read the panel shows two bars: Overall progress and Current block. The block is named after the part of the card being read, such as Driver activity, Events, Faults, Vehicles used, Places or Border crossings. The status line moves through 'Reading smart card...', 'Saving a local copy...' and 'Uploading smart-card file...'.

The app saves a copy of the file on the phone before it uploads. On Android 10 and newer the copy goes to a folder called TachoManager inside the phone's Downloads folder. If the upload fails, the copy stays on the phone, so you can upload it later from the website.

When something fails, the line starts with 'Smart-card error:' followed by the reason.

Which driver does the card go to?

On a company account the card goes to the driver in your Drivers list whose card number or driving licence number matches the card. Matching the licence number means a renewed card still reaches the right driver, and the driver's card number is updated.

If nobody matches, the app adds the driver from the file when your account has room for one more. When the driver limit of your account is reached, the upload is refused with 'Driver limit reached for this account.' followed by the allowed number.

After the match, the file goes through the same checks and rules as an upload in the browser.

Mark a card as downloaded

The button Mark card as downloaded writes the current date and time into the last-download record of the card. When the driver is in your list, the same date is stored in your account as the driver's Last download.

The button is shown whenever a USB reader is connected and works once a card is inserted. The status line says 'Updating LastCardDownload...' and then 'LastCardDownload written successfully.'

Important: This writes to the driver card itself. Use it only when the data of the card has really been downloaded.
Connect a tachograph over Bluetooth

Bluetooth needs app version 3.1.0 or newer. Older versions show no Bluetooth buttons. The Bluetooth buttons also stay hidden while a USB reader is plugged in.

  1. Insert the driver card in the tachograph (driver 1 slot).
  2. Make the tachograph discoverable. On a VDO, open the driver 1 entry in the menu and select Bluetooth. On a Stoneridge, press the menu button, go to Settings, then Bluetooth, and enable Bluetooth pairing.
  3. In the reader panel tap Connect via Bluetooth.
  4. Pick your tachograph from the list, strongest signal first, and confirm the code shown on the tachograph display.
  5. When the panel says Connected with the device name, the download buttons appear.

The link Do you want help connecting to your tachograph? shows the same steps for VDO and Stoneridge. If nothing is found you see 'No tachograph found. Make sure you're in range, then try again.' Tap Disconnect to end the connection. Searching for a tachograph also asks for permission to show notifications.

Download from the tachograph
  • Download card reads the driver card that is inserted in the tachograph and uploads it, in the same way as with a USB reader.
  • Download tachograph is only on company accounts. It opens a window with two choices: From last download (only the data recorded since the last download, faster) and Full download (all the data the tachograph still holds, can take longer).

The progress bars work as for a card. The vehicle-unit file is matched to a truck by the registration found inside it, with the message 'Downloading tachograph…' while it runs. If the buttons are grey, the tooltips say 'Connect a tachograph over Bluetooth' or 'Insert a card or connect Bluetooth'.

Important: A truck that is not in your Vehicles list yet is added to it automatically, as long as your plan's vehicle limit allows. When the limit is reached, the file is refused with a message naming the truck: remove a vehicle or choose a larger plan, then download again.
Other things the app does
  • Phone notifications: after you sign in, the app asks for permission to show notifications and registers your phone. Each reminder on the Reminders page has its own Push notification switch.
  • Updates: when the platform requires a newer version, a full-screen Update required message with the button Update now appears, or a button New version available — update now shows above the reader panel. Both open the Play Store.
  • PDF documents of the Work module, such as eCMR and DeCA, open in a viewer inside the app. Download saves the PDF through the phone's download manager and Share hands the document's link to the phone's share menu.
  • Signing in with Google opens your phone's browser for the Google step and brings you back into the app.
  • On phones the app asks the phone to keep the screen on while the app is open. This is done on a best-effort basis.

Driver reports

Turn any uploaded driver-card file into a report: infringements, activities, rest planning, work summary and more. You open them from the driver's page.

Open a report for a driver file

Every report is built from one tachograph file. You open it from the driver's page.

  1. Open Drivers in the left menu.
  2. Click the driver's name.
  3. In the files list, click the name of the file you want to analyse. To use the newest file, click Reports in the details card instead.
  4. In the File reports window, choose Infringements, Activities, Rest planning, Work summary or Speed report. Payroll is listed too when the payroll module is active. Map history has its own topic.
  5. Click Back to files to return to the list.
Tip: The Reports button is disabled until the driver has at least one file. Add one with Upload first.
Tip: Reports for trucks are described in the section 'Vehicle reports'. The tables on the Info page are described in the section 'Driver tables: rest planner, infringements, payroll'.
Tip: A report only knows what is inside the file you opened. Open the newest file for the current situation, or an older file to look back. In the read-only demo you can open reports, but Upload, download and delete are hidden.
Choose the period

Infringements, Activities and Work summary show a date filter above the report.

  • From and To let you pick two dates.
  • 7d, 30d, 60d and 90d set the period to the last 7, 30, 60 or 90 days, ending today.
  • All removes the limits.

Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today. Activities opens on the last 14 days. Work summary opens with no limits. Rest planning and Speed report have no date filter.

Tip: The filter only decides which days and findings you see. The check itself always runs on the whole file.
Tip: On Work summary the filter does not change the figures. The totals always cover the whole file.
Tip: In Infringements and Activities, the start date also sets where the day strip begins: an earlier From date or a longer quick button adds days to the strip, a later one removes them. All removes the limits for the findings table but does not change the strip. Click Load 14 more days to go further back. If every day in the file is older than the chosen period, the strip shows the 14 newest days of the file instead.
Work summary

Work summary adds up everything recorded in the file.

  • Driving, Other work, Availability and Break / rest give the time spent in each activity.
  • Total work is driving, other work and availability together.
  • Total tracked is all four together, rest included.
  • Distance is the number of kilometres driven. The Vehicle and Kilometers table splits it by registration plate.
  • Window shows the first and last moment covered by the file.

A doughnut chart shows how the tracked time splits between the four activities.

Tip: Kilometres come from the odometer readings when the card was put into a vehicle and taken out again. A session without both readings, or one where the registration changes, is not counted.
Activities: day strip and timeline

Activities shows the file one day at a time.

  • The day strip has a button for each day with the date (day/month), the driving time and, when there is any, the other work time. Days with an infringement carry a red warning mark.
  • Click a day to open Activity detail for it. The newest day opens first. Click Load 14 more days to go further back.
  • The heading Activity detail shows the date. For a day on which a working day starts, it also shows the start and end of that working day with the total driving and other work time.
  • The timeline spans 24 hours. Each activity is a coloured bar with its own symbol. Hover over a bar to see its type, start, end and duration. A long rest bar also carries a small label with the length of the rest.
  • A workday bar shows the span and total length of each working day. Team driving is marked on it when the data shows two drivers.
  • A red band on the timeline marks the time of an infringement that lasts a day or less. Longer ones, such as a weekly rest or a weekly driving limit, are marked only on the day strip, on their first and last day.
  • Card insertions and withdrawals appear as small round markers with a down or up arrow.
  • The table under the timeline lists each activity with Type, Start - End and Duration. Rows that fall inside an infringement are highlighted.

Below the day detail, Activities also shows the findings table Infringements (N) for the chosen period. It is the same table as in the Infringements report.

Tip: The activity types are Driving, Other Work, Availability and Break/Rest.
Zoom the timeline

You can zoom the 24-hour timeline in on any day.

  • Scroll the mouse wheel over the timeline, or pinch with two fingers on a touch screen.
  • Press the minus and plus buttons under the timeline, or drag the slider between them. A read-out next to them shows the zoom, for example 2.0x.
  • Zoom goes from 1x to 8x. When zoomed in, drag the timeline sideways to move along the day.
Places, border crossings and card events

Under the timeline, collapsible sections list what the card recorded that day. A section appears only when that day has such records. Each title has a count badge. Click a title to open it.

  • Place entries: the country and region entered when work began (Begin country) and ended (End country), and manual entries (Manual entry).
  • Card events: each Card insertion and Card ejection, with the vehicle registration, the odometer (Odo) and the place (Loc) when they are known.

The activity table also lists place entries, Border crossing rows and card events in time order. Entries that carry coordinates show a pin. Click the pin to open Location map.

Tip: Pins appear only where the file holds coordinates. Not every card or place entry has them.
Speed report from vehicle files

A driver card does not store detailed speed. The Speed report therefore looks at the vehicles the driver used and reads the speed records from the vehicle-unit files you have uploaded for those vehicles.

  • Only the periods in which the driver had the card in the vehicle are used.
  • It looks at up to four vehicles, the most recently used ones, and reads the two newest vehicle files of each.
  • The line Speed from vehicle files names each source, with the registration and the number of minute records.

You see Days with data, Peak max and Avg of daily avg, a row of day buttons, a line chart of Max km/h and Avg km/h for each minute of the chosen day, and a table with one row per day (Minute blocks, Max km/h and Avg km/h). Click a day button or a table row to show that day.

Tip: If no vehicle file covers the driver's trips you see 'No detailed speed found in the vehicle files for the periods this driver used them.' Upload the truck's file under Vehicles.
Map history

Map history shows on a map the GPS positions stored on the driver card. Choose it in the File reports window after you click a file name. The window opens on the last 24 hours and reads the driver's three newest files.

Tip: The periods, the map symbols and the limits are described in the section 'Route history and location maps'.
Download or keep a copy

Reports are views on the screen. The app has no separate print or PDF button for them.

  • Click the download icon in the files list to save the original tachograph file.
  • Click Download all next to Upload to get a ZIP of the files uploaded in a date range. See the section 'ZIP downloads and the filename converter'.
Tip: Downloads are hidden in the read-only demo because the files hold real personal data.

Infringements and EU rules

How the app checks driving time, breaks and rests against EU Regulation 561/2006 and what it shows when it finds a problem.

Read the Infringements report

Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today. It shows the day strip and timeline from Activities, with the findings table underneath.

The heading Infringements (N) counts the rows. A red badge shows the number of Violations. A green Clean badge and the line 'No infringements detected.' mean the period is clear.

  • Severity: the level of the finding, in a coloured badge.
  • Rule: what went wrong, in plain words with the legal basis.
  • Period: when the finding started and ended. Click the start date to jump to that day.
  • Measured / Limit: what the file shows, above the legal limit.

Click any row to open that day in the timeline. The row of the day you are viewing is highlighted. The newest finding is listed first.

Tip: In this report the table follows the day strip. Click Load 14 more days and older findings appear in the table too.
Tip: A single report analyses one file. The company dashboard looks at all of a driver's files for the last 56 days, so the two counts can differ.
Severity levels

Every finding has one of four levels. The app sets the level from the kind of rule that was broken. The levels are aligned with the categories of Directive 2006/22/EC Annex III.

  • Minor (light blue): a missing manual entry.
  • Serious (yellow): no break after 4 h 30 of driving, more than two extended driving periods in a week, more than three reduced daily rests, missing compensation for a reduced weekly rest, a missing country entry, and the optional working-time checks.
  • Very serious (red): more than 10 hours of driving in a driving period, more than 56 hours in a week, no daily rest of at least 9 hours, a daily rest that started too late, or an incomplete split rest.
  • Most serious (red, bold): more than 90 hours in two weeks, a weekly rest below 24 hours, two reduced weekly rests in a row, or a weekly rest that started too late.

Some rows end with 'Possible fine:' and an amount. It is an indicative range based on Spanish fine bands: EUR 301-400 up to 20 percent beyond the limit, EUR 1,501-2,000 more than 20 percent beyond it, and EUR 3,301-4,600 more than 50 percent beyond it.

It appears only on findings for the 4 h 30 break, driving over 10 hours in a period, driving over 56 hours in a week, driving over 90 hours in two weeks, a daily rest that is too short or too late, and a weekly rest below 24 hours. In Spanish and Romanian the sentence is translated. In the other languages it stays in English.

Important: The analysis uses recorded data only. Some situations, such as where a weekly rest was spent, cannot be confirmed from the tachograph alone, so an inspector may judge differently.
Driving time and breaks

These checks follow Regulation (EC) No 561/2006.

  • Break: after 4 h 30 of driving a break is needed: 45 minutes, or two parts, first 15 minutes and then 30 minutes. A break shorter than 15 minutes does not count. In this check, break/rest and availability both count as break time.
  • Daily driving: up to 9 hours between two daily rests. Twice a week it may be extended to 10 hours. Driving is counted between daily rests, not by calendar day.
  • Extended days: a third extended driving period in the same week is flagged. A period over 10 hours is flagged on its own and still uses up one of the two extensions.
  • Weekly driving: up to 56 hours in a calendar week, Monday to Sunday.
  • Two weeks: up to 90 hours in two weeks in a row.
Daily and weekly rest
  • Daily rest: within 24 hours after the end of the last daily or weekly rest, a new daily rest is needed. It is regular at 11 hours or more, reduced at 9 hours up to 11 hours (three times at most between two weekly rests), or split into 3 hours plus 9 hours.
  • When the card data shows that two drivers were on board, the window is 30 hours instead of 24. If the card carries no crew information, the app may assume two drivers from the pattern of availability time and says so in a review warning.
  • Weekly rest: every calendar week with driving needs one. Regular is at least 45 hours. Reduced is 24 hours up to 45 hours. One rest is chosen for each week, the most favourable one.
  • Two reduced in a row: after a reduced weekly rest the next one must be regular. The international goods option in the legal settings allows two in a row.
  • Six days: a weekly rest must start no later than six 24-hour periods after the end of the previous one.
  • Compensation: the shortfall of a reduced weekly rest must be taken back in one block, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction. The finding appears only once the file reaches that deadline.
Tip: Weeks that the file covers only in part, at its start or end, are not judged for weekly rest.
Recording rules

Two findings are about what was entered on the tachograph, not about hours.

  • Missing manual data entry (Minor): the card was out for at least 24 hours and a country was recorded when it was taken out, but nothing was recorded when it was put back: no manual entry and no country. Legal basis: Article 34(3)(b) of Regulation (EU) No 165/2014.
  • Symbol of country not entered in recording equipment (Serious): the card was out for at least 24 hours and a country was recorded when it was taken out, but no country was recorded when it was put back. Legal basis: Article 34(6)(f) and Article 34(7).
Tip: When a missing manual entry is confirmed, other findings that overlap the same period are left out of the list.
How the data is read
  • Time with no recording of nine hours or more is counted as rest.
  • For the break check, break/rest and availability segments that touch each other count as one break.
  • Calendar weeks run from Monday 00:00 to Sunday in the report timezone.
  • A single recorded minute of activity inside a long rest, such as a card insertion, does not end the rest when the rest carries on for at least 30 minutes afterwards. An inspector may count it as an interruption.
  • Each report analyses one file. Open the newest file for the current situation.
Tip: Review warnings, such as reduced daily rests used or country entries that cannot be confirmed, are shown in the free file inspector, not in the findings table.

Rest planner

Shows how much driving and working time a driver has used, when the next rest must start, and the earliest end of the rest in progress.

Where to find the rest planner
  • On Info, open the card Driver rest planner. It starts collapsed, so click its title. Click a driver's name, or Open, to see the full planner in a window titled with the driver's name and Rest Planning. The card itself is described in the section 'Driver tables: rest planner, infringements, payroll'.
  • On a driver's page, click a file name and then Rest planning.

The planner works from the file and from the current time, so it tells you the situation now, not on the day the file was downloaded. On Info it uses the driver's newest file. If the file ends more than a week before today, the planner works as of the last recorded activity.

Tip: The company view has the tabs Summary, Working and Rest. For findings, use the Infringements report.
Summary tab

Summary is the tab that opens first. It lists what the driver did since the last weekly rest of at least 45 hours.

  • A coloured pill is a rest of 7 hours or more, with its length inside (for example 9h30). Green is a weekly rest of 45 hours or more, yellow is a reduced weekly rest, grey is a daily rest. The start of the rest is on the left and the end on the right. Shorter breaks stay inside the working period.
  • A line with a truck icon is a working period, from where it started to where it ended, shown as short place codes.
  • A route through three or more regions shows +N between start and end. Click +N to see every region, and click the small collapse button to fold it again.
  • Click the pin next to a place to open it on a map.
  • Click the question-mark icon for the figures of that working period: Start, End, Work day, Driving, Other work and Km driven, with the average speed.
  • A red warning triangle, or a red pill, marks a rest or working period that overlaps an infringement. Hover over it to see the rule.

If the data holds no 45-hour break, the tab says 'No 45h break in the available data — showing everything recorded.' If nothing was recorded since the last weekly rest it says 'No activity since the last weekly rest.'

Tip: Places come from the place records on the card. When the GPS Tracking module is active and a tracker is linked to the truck, the GPS position is used instead, and its pin is blue.
Working tab

Working answers two questions: how much has the driver used, and when must the next rest start? Times are shown as hours and minutes.

  • Driving Time: Daily (max 10 hours) is the driving since the last rest of at least 9 hours, next to the limit that applies now: 10:00, or 09:00 once both extensions are used. Extended Day (max 2) shows stars for the extended driving periods used this week. Weekly (max 56 hours) and Fortnightly (max 90 hours) show the driving of this week, and of last week plus this week.
  • Next Daily Rest: No later than is the latest start of the next daily rest. Duration (possible reduced) is 09:00, or 11:00 once three reduced rests are used. Reduced (max 3) counts the reduced rests used since the last weekly rest.
  • Next Weekly Rest: the latest start and the possible duration: 24:00, or 45:00 when the last weekly rest was reduced.
  • Next Regular Weekly Rest: the latest start of a 45-hour rest.
  • Working Time: Weekly (max 60:00), 4 months average (max 48 hours) and Daily (today's working time). Driving, other work and breaks shorter than 15 minutes count, availability does not. The 4-month average uses the weeks that are in the file.
Tip: When the previous weekly rest was reduced, Next Weekly Rest shows a warning that the next one must be a regular rest of 45 hours.
Rest tab

Rest works while the driver is resting. When the planner cannot treat the driver as resting, the tab says 'Last activity is not rest. Rest projections are shown when current state is rest.' This mostly happens when the file ends more than a week before today and its last activity is not a rest.

  • Current Rest Period: Began shows when the rest started. A green line, You can still work until, shows the time by which the next daily rest has to start, while that time is still ahead.
  • Possible End Times: the earliest end of the rest if it were Reduced Daily (9 hours), Regular Daily (11 hours), Reduced Weekly (24 hours) or Regular Weekly (45 hours). A bar under each line shows how much of that rest has passed. An option that is no longer possible is struck through in red.
  • Compensation: the reduced weekly rests that still have to be paid back. See the compensation topic.

The Reduced Weekly (24 hours) line turns yellow when the last weekly rest was reduced. A 24-hour rest is then possible only if a 45-hour rest can still follow in time, and a note gives the deadline. The line turns red and struck through when the next weekly rest has to be a regular 45 hours.

Reduced and regular rest
  • Daily rest: regular is 11 hours, or 3 plus 9 hours split. Reduced is 9 hours up to 11 hours. Up to three reduced daily rests are allowed between two weekly rests, and the planner counts them in Reduced (max 3).
  • Weekly rest: regular is 45 hours or more. Reduced is 24 hours up to 45 hours. After a reduced one the next must be regular, unless the international goods option is on.
  • Deadline: a weekly rest has to start within six 24-hour periods after the end of the previous one. Next Weekly Rest shows that moment under No later than.
Tip: A split daily rest of 3 plus 9 hours counts as regular. The planner does not count it as reduced.
Weekly rest compensation

When a weekly rest was shorter than 45 hours, the missing hours must be taken back in one block, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction.

  1. Open the Rest tab. The Compensation card lists every outstanding reduction with the length of the missing rest, the time left before the deadline (or how long it is overdue) and its Deadline.
  2. An overdue item is shown in red.
  3. Tick an item to see its effect. The Possible End Times move by the ticked hours and Selected compensation shows the total.
Tip: If nothing is outstanding the card says 'No reduced weekly rest compensation is currently outstanding.' The card is shown while the driver is resting.
Tip: A reduction whose deadline passed more than a week ago is no longer listed here. It appears as an infringement in the Infringements report instead.
When the driver is resting now
  • If the newest activity in the file is a rest, the planner treats it as the current rest and counts from its start.
  • If the data ends before now, up to one week, the planner assumes the driver has rested since the last recorded activity. A card taken out after the last activity points the same way.
  • A rest in progress does not count as a finished daily or weekly rest. The Next Weekly Rest deadline therefore does not move forward while the driver rests.
  • In Summary, the rest in progress shows its start and a question-mark badge, because its final length is not known yet.
  • A rest in progress is not used to pay off a compensation either. It is settled by the next download.

Legal and report settings

Switches that change how infringements are analysed and which extra checks are included in every report of your account.

Open the legal settings
  1. Open the Settings group in the left menu and click Other Settings.
  2. Find the card Legal & report settings. It says 'These options change EU 561/2006 and Working Time Directive (2002/15/EC) analysis results.'
  3. Switch the options you need, then click Save.

These settings belong to the whole account. They apply to every driver and to the figures on Info.

Tip: After you save you see 'Legal & report settings saved.' Reports and the figures on Info are then recalculated with the new settings.
Tip: The same card also holds the file-format options for phone-app uploads, described in the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)'. Save stores everything on the card in one go.
Tip: In the read-only demo the Save button is hidden.
Working-time checks

Four extra checks from the Working Time Directive 2002/15/EC are under Legal rule options. All four are off by default. Working time counts driving and other work only. Breaks and availability do not count.

  • Working time exceeded 6h without the required 30-minute break total. Legal basis: Article 5 of Directive 2002/15/EC. Over 6 hours of work needs breaks of 30 minutes in total, over 9 hours needs 45 minutes. Breaks count in parts of at least 15 minutes.
  • Weekly working time exceeded 60h. Legal basis: Article 4(a) of Directive 2002/15/EC.
  • Average weekly working time over 4 months exceeded 48h. Legal basis: Article 4(b) of Directive 2002/15/EC.
  • Working time exceeded 10h on a day with night work. Legal basis: Article 7 of Directive 2002/15/EC.

Under Night time window (Directive 2002/15/EC, Art. 3(h)), choose when night starts (00:00 to 03:00) and ends (04:00 to 07:00). Use the period your national law defines, at least four hours between 00:00 and 07:00. For example Spain 00:00 to 07:00, Germany and the UK 00:00 to 04:00.

Tip: All the findings from these checks are Serious.
Passenger transport options

Three switches describe passenger transport: Passenger transport by bus, Single occasional passenger service and Journey form available on board.

Only when all three are on, and only for activity on or after 22 May 2024, the analysis applies the passenger-service derogations of Regulation (EU) 2024/1258:

  • The second part of a split break may be 15 minutes instead of 30.
  • A daily rest may start up to one hour later, once if the analysed period lasts 6 days or more and twice if it lasts 8 days or more, when the driving before it did not exceed 7 hours.
  • A weekly rest may start up to 12 days after a regular weekly rest.
Important: Switch these on only for an occasional passenger service under Regulation (EC) No 1073/2009. They loosen the checks for every report in the account.
International goods transport

The option International goods transport: allow two consecutive reduced weekly rests (Reg. 2020/1054, Art. 8(6)). is for drivers in international carriage of goods who take their rests outside the country of establishment.

When it is on, two reduced weekly rests in a row are accepted if there are at least four weekly rests in any four consecutive weeks, two of them regular. Both reductions must be compensated in one block before the next weekly rest.

Tip: When this option is on and the last weekly rest was reduced, the Reduced Weekly (24 hours) line in the rest planner shows a yellow note that the option is allowed under the derogation and that compensation will be owed.
Report timezone

Times in reports, the start of each day and the start of each week (Monday 00:00) use the report timezone. You choose it in Report timezone on Profile, as described in the section 'Your profile'. The line Resolved timezone: at the bottom of the Legal & report settings card shows which zone is in use.

Free file inspector

A public page that reads one tachograph file without signing in. It is handy for a quick look at a file from someone who is not in your account yet.

Inspect a file

The Free file inspector lets anyone read a driver-card or vehicle-unit file on the spot. You do not need an account.

  1. Open the page at tachomanager.com/app2/inspect. It is a public page without the left menu.
  2. Choose Driver card or Vehicle unit.
  3. Pick a .ddd or .tgd file of up to 50 MB.
  4. For a driver card, choose the Report type: Activities, Infringements, Work summary or Rest planning.
  5. Click Inspect file.

In Vehicle unit mode one upload gives you the tabs Overview, Speed, Over-speeding, Faults & events and Activities.

What the inspector shows
  • Activities: a plain table with Type, Start, End and Duration. Only the first 1000 rows are listed.
  • Infringements: the figures Violations, Activities and Total driving, a chart Weekly driving vs best rest (hours), one card for each finding, a Warnings box and the Legal basis line.
  • Work summary: the same figures as in your account.
  • Rest planning: at present this option shows 'No rest planner data available.' The live planner is available in an account.
  • Overview (vehicle unit): the unit's own data as cards. Speed is a plain list of Time, Max km/h and Avg km/h. Over-speeding, Faults & events and Activities look like the vehicle reports without the day strip.
Tip: A Parser notes box above the report lists anything the file reader had to warn about. The inspector has no day strip or timeline. Create a free account to get them.
Limits and privacy
  • Nothing is saved. The file is read once and discarded, and the page says 'Nothing is saved.'
  • A file can be up to 50 MB. Driver card mode accepts only driver-card files and Vehicle unit mode only vehicle files.
  • The site administrator can switch the inspector off.
Important: You can inspect up to 10 files in 5 minutes in each mode. After that you see 'Too many file inspections were requested. Please wait a few minutes and try again.'
Tip: To keep files, track drivers and get reminders, create a free account.

Vehicles: your trucks and trailers

The Vehicles page is the register of your fleet. Add every truck and trailer, keep their details up to date and open a vehicle to reach its tachograph files, reports, documents and log.

What the Vehicles page is for

Open Vehicles in the left menu to see all the trucks and trailers of your company account. A truck can hold the files downloaded from its tachograph. Every vehicle, truck or trailer, can also hold dated documents such as insurance, and a log of the work done on it.

The top of the page shows how many vehicles you have, for example 12 total, and the Add vehicle button.

Tip: Vehicles are for company accounts only. A driver account has no Vehicles entry in its menu. No add-on module is needed. A few extra columns and buttons appear only if you have the Fuel tickets or GPS Tracking modules.
Tip: In the public company demo you can browse vehicles, files and reports, but Add vehicle, uploads, downloads and every edit or delete button are hidden. Create your own account to make changes.
Important: If your account is frozen because the subscription lapsed, you can still look at your vehicles and open reports. Every change (adding, editing, uploading, deleting, documents and log entries) is refused until you renew the subscription.
Find a vehicle in the list

The list has two tabs, Trucks and Trailers. Each tab shows how many vehicles it holds, and the page opens on Trucks. Click a registration to open that vehicle. Until you add your first vehicle the page says 'No vehicles yet.'

  • Trucks tab columns: Registration, Make, Model, Company, Consumption or Country, Files and Last upload.
  • Company appears only after you have created at least one company profile.
  • Consumption (litres per 100 km, from your confirmed fuel tickets) replaces Country when you have the Fuel tickets module.
  • Trailers tab columns: Registration, Make, Model, Company and Assigned truck.
  1. Type in the search box to filter by registration, country code, make, model or company name.
  2. Once you have at least one company profile, a company drop-down appears next to the search box. Pick All companies, one company, or Without company.
  3. On the Trucks tab, click the Last upload heading to sort by date. The first click puts the oldest first, and a second click reverses the order. Trucks with no date always stay at the bottom.
  • The yellow badge Files due means the truck has no file at all yet.
  • The grey badge Sold/Retired marks a retired truck. Retired trucks are always listed last.
  • A small line under a truck's registration lists the trailer assigned to it.
  • A red location pin next to a truck's registration means a GPS device is mapped to it. Click the pin to see where the truck is now.
Tip: Last upload is the date and time recorded for the truck's newest file. The app takes it from the file name or from the file itself when it can, and uses the moment you uploaded otherwise. When a search or filter finds nothing, the list says 'No matching vehicles.' An empty Trailers tab says 'No trailers yet.'
Add a truck or a trailer
  1. Open Vehicles, choose the Trucks or Trailers tab and press Add vehicle. The form opens with the type of the tab you are on.
  2. Check Vehicle type: Truck or Trailer.
  3. For a truck you may choose a vehicle-unit file under Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill. The app reads the registration from the file and fills in Registration for you. Check it.
  4. Check or type the Registration. Spaces are removed and letters are turned into capitals, so 4679 mzh is saved as 4679MZH.
  5. Optionally fill in Make and Model (up to 64 characters each) and choose the owner under Company.
  6. For a truck, tick Disable upload reminders for this vehicle only if it no longer needs file uploads.
  7. Press Add vehicle. The button stays disabled until a registration is entered.

Auto-fill only reads the file. It does not save the file and does not create the vehicle. After you add the truck, upload the file on the truck's own page. The auto-fill box appears only when you add a truck, not when you add a trailer or edit a vehicle.

Auto-fill accepts a .ddd or .tgd file downloaded from a vehicle unit, up to 50 MB. A driver-card file is refused with the message 'Only vehicle files (V_...) are accepted here.'

Important: A registration can exist only once in your account. A second one is refused with 'A vehicle with this registration already exists.' Your account also has a maximum number of vehicles. When you reach it, the app refuses to add another one and says 'Vehicle limit reached.'
Tip: The Company drop-down lists your company profiles, with Not assigned as the first choice. The form hint says the owner company is used on the CMR and on vehicle documents. Add companies by opening Profile at the bottom of the left menu and using the Company data card (see the section 'Company data and employer profiles').
Edit a vehicle
  1. Click the registration in the list to open the vehicle.
  2. Press Edit at the top right.
  3. Change what you need and press Save changes.
  • Vehicle type, Registration, Make, Model and Company.
  • Assigned trailer (trucks only).
  • Disable upload reminders for this vehicle (trucks only).
  • Sold/Retired (trucks only, and only if you have the Fuel tickets module).
Tip: If you change the registration, the stored files move with the vehicle and the page reopens under the new registration. You cannot use a registration that another vehicle already has.
Important: Changing a truck into a trailer unlinks the trailers assigned to it, and a trailer page has no Files section. Changing a trailer into a truck removes its link to a truck. Change the type only to correct a mistake.
Trucks, trailers and trailer assignment

A truck has a tachograph, so it has files and reports. A trailer has no tachograph, so it only has documents and a log. You can link a trailer to the truck that pulls it. Add the trailer first, then link it.

  1. Open the truck and press Edit.
  2. Choose the trailer under Assigned trailer. Choose — none — to remove the link.
  3. Press Save changes.
  • A truck has one assigned trailer at a time.
  • A trailer that already belongs to another truck is marked (reassign). Choosing it moves it to this truck.
  • You assign from the truck side only. The trailer's own form has no truck field.
  • The truck page shows its trailer as a link after Assigned trailer. The trailer page shows Assigned to truck with a link back, and the Trailers tab shows the truck in Assigned truck.
  • If you delete a truck, its trailers stay in your list and become unassigned.
Sold or inactive vehicles

To stop file-upload reminders for a truck you no longer use, open it, press Edit and tick Disable upload reminders for this vehicle. The truck then drops out of the upload reminders and out of the Vehicle files to upload soon table on Info.

If you have the Fuel tickets module, tick Sold/Retired as well. The truck is hidden from the Fuel tickets truck list, gets the Sold/Retired badge in your list and moves to the end.

Tip: Neither option deletes anything. The files and reports of the truck stay available. Document expiry reminders still apply to the vehicle.
Delete a vehicle
  1. Open the vehicle and press Delete.
  2. Read the confirmation and accept it.
  3. The app returns you to the list.
Important: The confirmation says the vehicle and its uploaded files are removed and that this cannot be undone. The vehicle's documents are removed too.
Important: You can delete only one vehicle per day. A second attempt on the same day is refused. If you only want to stop reminders, use the options in Sold or inactive vehicles instead.
Where your vehicles are used
  • Info: the tables Vehicle files to upload soon and Vehicle documents expiring first list vehicles that need attention and link to them.
  • Calendar (module): you can reserve vehicles, as well as drivers, for a range of days.
  • Fuel tickets (module): consumption is worked out per truck and shown on the Vehicles page.
  • GPS Tracking (module): each GPS device is mapped to one of your trucks.
  • Tools: Bulk upload sends each vehicle file to the vehicle with the same registration and skips files for registrations you have not added. Global ZIP download includes vehicle files, one folder per registration, and can be limited to one company.

Vehicle page and tachograph files

Open a truck to see its tachograph details, upload the files you download from the tachograph, and download, convert or delete them.

Open a vehicle page

Click a registration in the Vehicles list. The link All vehicles at the top takes you back.

  • A truck page shows: the registration with the badge Truck, make, model and company, the information card, Documents, Vehicle log and the Files list.
  • A trailer page shows the badge Trailer, then Documents and Vehicle log. It has no information card and no files, because trailers have no tachograph.
  • The buttons Edit and Delete are at the top right. On a truck, Live location appears there too when you have the GPS Tracking module.
Read the vehicle information card

The card at the top of a truck page summarises the truck. The values marked below are read from the newest file you uploaded, and the app names that file at the bottom of the card. A value is shown only when the file contains it.

  • Consumption and AdBlue consumption: litres per 100 km from your confirmed fuel tickets. This needs the Fuel tickets module. Without it the card shows Country instead.
  • Last upload: the date and time recorded for the newest file.
  • VIN (from the file): the vehicle identification number.
  • Last download (from the file): when data was last downloaded from the tachograph.
  • Last company (from the file): the latest company name found in the file.
  • Next calibration (from the file): the date of the next calibration.
  • Certificate (from the file): Passed or Failed. The app checks the digital signatures stored in the file.
  • Last odometer: the latest odometer reading in km that the app has recorded, from vehicle files and from driver-card files that used this truck.

The button Reports on the card opens the reports for the newest file. It is greyed out until the truck has a file.

Upload vehicle files

Open the truck and press Upload next to the Files heading, choose one or several .ddd or .tgd vehicle-unit files and start the upload. Only vehicle-unit files are accepted, up to 50 MB each, and the registration in the file must be the truck's own. Their names usually look like V_4679MZH_E_20250602_1342.TGD. A trailer page has no Upload button, because trailers have no tachograph.

After a successful upload the app updates the Last upload date and, when the file has one, the last odometer reading. If the file gives a next calibration date, it also creates or updates the document Tachograph calibration (see the section 'Vehicle documents and expiry reminders').

Tip: The full steps, the messages for refused files and the Bluetooth download in the Android app are described in the sections 'Upload tachograph files' and 'Android app and card reader'. To upload many files for many trucks and drivers in one go, use Bulk upload in Tools.
Download, convert or delete a stored file

The Files list shows every stored file, newest first, with the columns Name, Date, Size and Actions. Size is hidden on narrow screens. Click a file name to open its reports.

Tip: The download, Convert (two arrows) and trash icons in Actions work as described in the section 'Stored files: reports, download, convert and delete'.
Download all files of a vehicle as a ZIP

Press Download all in the header of the Documents block to download the original files of the truck as one ZIP. The button appears only when the truck has files. The date range, the quick buttons and the file name are described in the section 'ZIP downloads and the filename converter'.

The 90-day rule and upload reminders

A vehicle file should be uploaded at least every 90 days: the due date of a truck is the date of its newest file plus 90 days. Reminders start 14 days before by default, continue after the limit has passed and also cover a truck with no file at all. Set the lead time in the card Vehicle upload under Settings, then Reminders.

  • The Info page lists these trucks in Vehicle files to upload soon.
  • Trailers are never reminded, and neither are trucks where you ticked Disable upload reminders for this vehicle.
Tip: See the sections 'Reminders' and 'Info page (dashboard)'.

Vehicle reports

Open a stored vehicle file as an on-screen report: daily activities, speed, over-speeding, faults and events, all the stored data, and a map of the route.

Open a report
  1. Open the truck. Press Reports on the information card to use the newest file, or click the name of any file in the Files list.
  2. In the File reports window choose Activities, Speed report, Over-speeding, Faults & events, All data or Map history.
  3. The report opens on its own page, titled with the report name and the file name. Press Back to files to return.

Reports are built from the stored file each time you open one, and they are shown on screen. There is no PDF button on the vehicle report pages. To keep a record, download the original file. Times are shown in the report timezone of your account.

Tip: If the app could read the activities of a file only partly, a box called Parser notes appears above the report with a warning, for example that the report may be incomplete. Treat the timeline with caution then. Reports need at least one file on the truck, and trailers have none.
Tip: The names of events, faults and their purposes, and the card titles and field names in All data, always come out in English, whatever language you use in the app.
Activities report

This report shows what the tachograph recorded day by day: Driving, Other Work, Availability and Break/Rest, drawn on a 24-hour timeline for each day.

  1. Pick a day in the day strip under Day Selector. It opens on the newest day of the file, and each day button shows its driving and other-work time.
  2. Press Load 14 more days to go further back, or set From to a date. The buttons All, Last 7 days, Last 30 days and Last 90 days fill the dates in for you.
  3. Zoom the timeline with the mouse wheel, by pinching on a touch screen, or with the plus and minus buttons and the slider under the timeline.
  4. Read the activity table under the timeline: type, start, end and duration. A pin button next to a place opens the Location map.
Tip: The quick buttons count back from today. A file downloaded long ago may be older than that, and then the strip simply shows the newest 14 days of the file. Use Load 14 more days to go further back.

Under the timeline, the report adds sections for the selected day. A section appears only when the file has data for it: Odometer at Midnight, Place entries, GNSS Places (satellite positions), Over Speeding Events, Event Data, Fault Data, Driver Sessions (who inserted a card and from when to when) and Card events.

Speed report

The report summarises the detailed speed records of the file with three figures: Days with data, Peak max and Avg of daily avg. Below them you pick a day to see a line chart of Max km/h and Avg km/h for every minute of that day.

A table lists each day with its number of Minute blocks and its maximum and average speed. Click a row to load that day in the chart.

Tip: Not every file contains detailed speed data. If yours does not, this report stays empty.
Over-speeding report

When the file holds over-speeding control data, four figures come first: Overspeed events since last control, Stored records since control, First since and Last control. A table follows with the type, purpose, begin, end, Max km/h, Avg km/h, driver card and Similar of each stored event. Without events the page says 'No over-speeding events.'

  • The tachograph keeps only a sample: the last 10 days and the 5 most serious events of the year. Each record stands for the number of similar events shown in Similar.
  • The tachograph counts events in a single byte, so the counter stops at 255. You then see 255+, which means 255 or more.
Faults and events report

The report has two tables, Events and Faults, newest first. Each row has a type, a purpose such as Active or ongoing, a begin and an end time. Events also show Similar. If the file has none, the page says 'No events or faults in this file.'

All data report

This report lists the data the app read from the vehicle unit, in cards called Overview, Technical and, for newer tachographs, Card data. Use it when you need a detail the other reports do not show. If the file has no vehicle-unit data, the page says 'No vehicle-unit data in this file (driver-card or Gen1 file).'

Map history

Map history also exists for trucks. Choose it in the File reports window of any vehicle-unit file. It plots the position records stored in the truck's newest files, at most three, and is described in the section 'Route history and location maps'.

Live location of a truck

With the GPS Tracking module you can see where a truck is right now: click the red pin next to its registration in the list, or press Live location on the truck page. The tracker must first be mapped to the truck. Setting up the trackers and reading the live map are described in the section 'GPS Tracking module'. The button is not available in the public demo.

Vehicle documents and expiry reminders

Keep insurance, inspection and other dated papers for every truck and trailer, attach the scans, and get warned before something expires.

What vehicle documents are

Every vehicle page has a block called Documents with the number of documents in brackets. A document has a name, an optional expiry date, optional notes and any number of attached scans or PDFs. Use it for insurance, inspection, tax, service or anything else with a date.

It works the same for trucks and trailers.

Add a document
  1. Open the vehicle and press Add document.
  2. Type the Document name. The field suggests Insurance, MOT, Tax, Service and Inspection, and you can type any other name (up to 255 characters).
  3. Choose the Expiry date. It is optional.
  4. Add Notes if you want. They are optional.
  5. Pick the scans or PDFs under Scans / PDFs of the document if you have them.
  6. Press Save.
Tip: The document and its files are saved together in one step. You do not have to save first and attach afterwards.
Attach, view and remove scans
  • Accepted files: JPG, PNG, WEBP images and PDF. The app checks the real content, so a renamed file of another type is refused.
  • Each file can be up to 20 MB. You can attach up to 20 files, and at most 24 MB in total, in one save. You can save again later to add more.
  • Files you picked show the label uploads on save until you press Save. Press Cancel next to one to drop it.
  1. To view a scan, click its file name in the document row. PDFs open inside the page and images are scaled to the screen.
  2. To remove a stored scan, press the pencil on the document, press Remove file next to the scan and press Save. Press Cancel next to it to change your mind.
Read the expiry badges
  • Grey, No expiry set: the document has no date.
  • Red, for example Expired 3d ago: the date has passed.
  • Yellow, for example Expires in 12d: 30 days or fewer remain.
  • Green, for example Valid until 31/12/2026: more than 30 days remain.

The 30-day limit of the colours is fixed. It does not depend on your reminder settings.

Edit or delete a document
  1. To change a document, press the pencil on its row, edit the fields in Edit document and press Save.
  2. To delete a document, press the trash can on its row and accept the confirmation.
Important: Deleting a document also deletes its attached scans, and this cannot be undone.
Tip: In the public demo you can read documents and open scans, but the buttons to add, edit and delete are hidden.
The automatic Tachograph calibration document

When you upload a vehicle file that contains a next calibration date, the app creates a document named Tachograph calibration with that date. Each later upload with a new date updates it in place, and it keeps the scans you attached.

  • You cannot change its name, date or notes, and you cannot delete it. The app answers that it is managed automatically.
  • You can still attach scans to it, for example the calibration certificate.
  • You cannot give another document the same name. This works in every interface language.
Get warned before a document expires

Documents of trucks and trailers that expire soon or have already expired are reported in three places.

  • A yellow box called Expiry notifications at the top of the Vehicles page. It says how many days ahead it looks and lists lines such as 'Insurance for vehicle 1234ABC expires in 12 day(s) on 14/10/2026.' Close it with the cross.
  • The notification bell, and phone notifications if you switch them on.
  • The table Vehicle documents expiring first on Info.
Tip: How early the box and the bell start, and push notifications, are set in the card Vehicle document expiry under Settings, then Reminders; see the section 'Reminders'. If Vehicle document expiry is switched off, the box on the Vehicles page does not appear. The Info table has its own fixed window, which only the platform administrators change.

Vehicle log

A notebook for every truck and trailer. Write down the work that was done or any note you want to keep, with the date and who wrote it.

What the vehicle log is

The card Vehicle log sits on every vehicle page, under Documents. Each entry is free text. Typical entries are a service, a repair, a tyre change or a note about damage. A number next to the title shows how many entries the vehicle has.

Tip: The log is for company accounts. In the public demo you can read it but not write in it.
Add an entry
  1. Open the vehicle.
  2. Click the box in the Vehicle log card and write what was done or noted.
  3. Press Add entry.

The app adds the date and time and the user name of the person who wrote it. An entry can have up to 4000 characters, and a longer text is cut off.

Read the older entries

The card shows the newest 5 entries. When there are more, press Show all 12 entries (the number is your total). A window opens with 10 entries per page, the total, and arrows to move between pages.

Delete an entry
  1. Press the trash can next to the entry.
  2. Accept the question 'Delete this log entry?'
Important: Entries cannot be edited, only deleted, and a deleted entry cannot be restored. To correct a mistake, add a new entry.

Tools: ZIP download, converter, bulk upload, trip calculator

The Tools page gathers four helpers: a trip calculator, a tachograph filename converter, a download that packs your files into one ZIP archive and a bulk uploader.

What is on the Tools page

Open Tools in the left menu. The page shows up to four cards, one under the other: Trip calculator, Filename converter, Global ZIP download and Bulk upload.

  • Trip calculator and Filename converter are always shown.
  • Global ZIP download is hidden in the read-only demo, because it hands out real files.
  • Bulk upload is for company accounts and is also hidden in the demo, because it writes data.
Tip: Only Global ZIP download and Bulk upload deal with the files stored in your account. The calculator and the converter work on what you type or pick and save nothing.
Download all your files as one ZIP

The Global ZIP download card packs the tachograph files stored in your account (driver-card files and vehicle-unit files) into a single archive. Use it when you want a copy of everything outside the app.

  1. Open Tools and find Global ZIP download. The card tells you how many files are available.
  2. Check the From and To dates. They are filled in with the dates of your first and your latest upload, so by default everything is included.
  3. Optional: press Last 6 months, Last 12 months, Last year or This year to fill both dates with one click. Last year means the previous calendar year.
  4. Optional: pick a company, or tick the DeCA and eCMR boxes (see the next topics).
  5. Press Download ZIP. Your browser saves the archive.

The dates select files by the day they were uploaded to Tacho Manager, not by the date written inside the tachograph file. The ZIP covers the drivers and vehicles of your own account. Drivers that are linked to a driver account are not included: download their files with Download all on the driver's page.

Tip: Fill in both dates or neither. If only one is filled, the app shows 'Both the from and to dates are required.' If From is later than To, it shows 'The from date must not be after the to date.' With both dates empty, every file is included.
Download one company at a time

Once you have created at least one company profile, the card shows a Company menu above the dates. You create the profiles with Profile at the bottom of the left menu: the Company data card is on the Profile tab.

  • All companies: every file in the date range.
  • One entry per company, with its number of files in brackets.
  • Without company: files of drivers and vehicles that have no company assigned.

A file belongs to the company that is assigned to its driver or vehicle. Assign a vehicle's company with Company in the vehicle's edit form. A driver's company is set with Company (Time Registry) in the driver's edit form, which only appears while the Time Registry module is active. When you pick a company, the archive name ends with the company name (or with no_company for Without company).

Tip: Without company profiles the Company menu is not shown and the ZIP simply contains everything in the date range.
Add DeCA and eCMR documents to the ZIP

When they apply to your account, two tick boxes appear: Include DeCA documents and Include eCMR documents, each with the number of documents that can be exported. The DeCA box needs the DeCA module (free). The eCMR box needs the Work module.

  • The documents are added as PDF files in two folders, deca and ecmr.
  • Issued and cancelled documents are exported. Drafts are not.
  • A cancelled document gets _cancelled added to its file name.
  • Only stand-alone eCMR notes are exported. The CMR of a transport order is not included.
  • The date range and the company menu do not filter the documents: every exportable document is included.
Tip: You can download documents only: with a box ticked, Download ZIP stays available even when no tachograph file matches.
Important: At most 200 documents of each type are included, newest first, and the app stops creating PDFs after about 15 seconds. With a very large number of documents the folders can be incomplete, and the app does not warn you.
What the ZIP contains and its limits
  • Driver-card files are in folders named drivers, followed by the card number. Vehicle-unit files are in folders named vehicles, followed by the registration.
  • The archive is called all_uploaded_files_ followed by a code that identifies your account, and by the company name when you picked one.
  • You can start at most 5 ZIP downloads in 10 minutes. Over that limit the download fails until the time is up, and your browser reports it as a failed download.
  • If no file matches the dates and no document box is ticked, the download also fails in the same way. Change the dates and try again.
  • No email code is needed. You only have to be signed in.
Tip: If your account is frozen (the app is read-only, for example after a subscription lapses) the download button is disabled and the reason is shown under it.
Convert a tachograph file name (.DDD and .TGD)

The Filename converter card changes only the name of a .ddd or .tgd file from your computer to the other naming convention, for example from C_[card number]_[country]_[YYYYMMDD]_[HHMM].TGD to the .DDD layout. The contents stay exactly the same and nothing is stored in your account.

Tip: The steps, the official name layouts and the conditions for the file name are described in the section 'ZIP downloads and the filename converter'. A file that is already stored is renamed with its Convert icon, see the section 'Stored files: reports, download, convert and delete'.
Upload many tachograph files at once

Bulk upload stores many .ddd and .tgd files in one go. You do not choose a driver or vehicle first: the app reads each file and attaches it to the matching driver or vehicle of your account. A frozen account cannot upload, and the read-only demo does not show the card.

Tip: The steps, the matching rules and the result messages are described in the section 'Bulk upload'.
Trip calculator

The Trip calculator gives a quick estimate of the diesel needed for one trip and what is left of the trip price. It runs in your browser. Nothing is saved or sent.

  1. Enter Empty kilometres and Loaded kilometres.
  2. Enter the Trip price you are paid and the Diesel price per litre.
  3. Enter Consumption (empty) and Consumption (loaded) in litres per 100 km.
  4. Read the results under the fields. They update as you type.
  • Litres (empty) and Litres (loaded): kilometres multiplied by consumption, divided by 100.
  • Total litres: the two added together.
  • Profit: the trip price minus the diesel cost of both legs.
Tip: The fields start with sample values (1, 1, 1, 1.4, 26 and 32), so replace them. The profit counts diesel only and has no currency symbol: use the same currency for the trip price and the diesel price. Tolls, wages and other costs are not included.

DeCA: national transport control document

DeCA is the electronic control document for national road transport in Spain (Orden FOM/2861/2012). You create it, issue it and share the PDF with its inspection QR code. It is free for every company account.

Free module: DeCAOpen in the app
What a DeCA is and who can use it

DeCA stands for Documento Electrónico de Control Administrativo. The app describes it as the Electronic Administrative Control Document of Orden FOM/2861/2012, and says it is mandatory in electronic format from 5 October 2026 for national road transport. The PDF carries a QR code for roadside inspection.

  • DeCA is a free module. Every company account has it, with no plan or purchase needed.
  • Only company accounts create and manage DeCA documents.
  • Driver accounts can only view the DeCA documents assigned to them (see the driver guide).
  • In the read-only demo, New DeCA, Edit, the duplicate button and the cancel button are disabled. You can still open the PDFs and the QR codes.
Tip: On a frozen account the app is read-only: you can open and download documents, but you cannot create, issue, edit or cancel them.
Open the DeCA list
  1. Open Work in the left menu.
  2. Press DeCA list. The page is titled DeCA and carries a Free badge.
  3. To start a new document right away, press Create document and choose New DeCA instead.

The table has the columns Reference, External reference, Route (origin to destination), Date (the transport date), Status and Actions. It shows your 300 most recent DeCA documents.

  • Search with the Search… box. It looks in the reference, external reference, status, loader name, origin, destination and plate.
  • Sort with the menu: Newest first, Oldest first, Reference or Status.
  • Filter with All statuses, Draft, Issued or Cancelled.
Tip: Until the first DeCA exists the page only says 'No DeCA documents yet.' The search box, the sort menu and the filter appear after that. Issued is the normal state and has no badge: only Draft and Cancelled show one. After you edit an issued document, a version such as v2 appears next to its reference.
Tip: DeCA has no entry of its own in the left menu. You reach it from the Work page, and the Work entry is shown while the Work module is active for your account (included in your plan, granted or bought, and not switched off under Settings, then Modules). The DeCA module itself stays free.
Create a DeCA
  1. In the DeCA list, press New DeCA. A form opens.
  2. Optional: pick the Driver at the top of the form (see 'Assign a DeCA to a driver').
  3. Fill in the loader: pick a saved loader in Contractual loader — name, which fills the name, VAT/NIF and address, or type Contractual loader — name, Loader — VAT/NIF and Loader — address (see 'Saved contractual loaders').
  4. Fill in the carrier: Effective carrier — name and Carrier — VAT/NIF.
  5. Fill in Origin, Destination, Nature of the goods, Weight (kg), Packages and Transport date.
  6. Pick the Tractor plate and, if you use one, the Trailer plate from your vehicles, or type a plate that is not in your fleet. Add Special authorisation (if applicable), External reference and Observations when needed.
  7. Press Save. The form closes and the document appears in the list with the Draft badge.

A new form starts with today's date as Transport date. The carrier name and VAT/NIF are pre-filled with your company details when your account has them stored, so check them.

If your account has more than one company profile, a Company (effective carrier) menu appears at the top. Picking a company fills in the carrier name and VAT/NIF.

Tip: External reference is your own number, for example the customer's order number. It gets its own column in the list and is searchable.
Tip: The form has a Driver menu at the top and a plain Driver field further down. Use the menu to assign the document: it also records the driver's card. The plain field only holds the name that is printed on the PDF.
Tip: A draft is private to your company. It has no reference, no public link and no QR code yet. Issue it to get them.
Tip: When you pick a driver who has an assigned truck, the empty plate fields are filled with that truck and its trailer.
Issue the DeCA

Issuing turns a draft into the official document. It receives a reference number, a public link and the QR code.

  1. In the list, press the pencil icon (Edit) on a draft.
  2. Check the data. Any change you make in the form is saved when you issue.
  3. Press Issue. The form closes and the Draft badge disappears.

These fields must be filled in, otherwise the app refuses and answers 'Missing mandatory data:' followed by the names of the empty fields: Contractual loader — name, Loader — VAT/NIF, Loader — address, Effective carrier — name, Carrier — VAT/NIF, Origin, Destination, Nature of the goods, Weight (kg), Transport date and Tractor plate.

The reference is your carrier VAT/NIF (letters and digits only, in capitals) followed by -DeCA-, the year and a running number, for example B12345678-DeCA-2026-1. Each new DeCA gets a number one higher than the highest one already used, and the count does not restart each year. When the VAT/NIF is empty, an account code is used in its place.

Tip: The Issue button is in the form of an existing draft. When you open New DeCA you first press Save, then open the draft again and press Issue.
Important: An issued DeCA cannot be deleted. You can edit it (a new version is created) or cancel it.
Create a DeCA from a transport order

If you use the Work module, a DeCA can be pre-filled from an order, so you do not retype addresses and plates.

  1. Open Work and click the order's title.
  2. Press Issue DeCA.
  3. If the order already has a DeCA, it opens. Otherwise a new one is created from the order and the form opens.
  • The loader name comes from the sender of the order's CMR when it has one, otherwise from the first loading stop. The loader address and the Origin come from the first loading stop.
  • The Destination comes from the last unloading stop.
  • Goods, weight, packages, packing and marks come from the order's CMR, when it has them. Without a CMR, the goods text is taken from the order's 'loading and unloading conditions and goods description'.
  • The plates and the driver come from the order. The order's reference is copied into External reference, and the freight payment text of the order goes into Observations.
  • The transport date is today, and the carrier is your company.

If every mandatory field is already filled, the DeCA is issued straight away. Otherwise it stays a draft and you complete it in the form that opens.

Tip: Once an order has a DeCA, a button on the order page shows its reference, version and status and opens its PDF. In the orders table, the Documents button of an order lists its CMR and DeCA and lets you open their PDF with View PDF.
The DeCA PDF
  1. In the DeCA list, press the PDF icon (tooltip PDF) on the row.
  2. The PDF opens in the app's viewer. Use the page arrows, the zoom buttons and the Fit width button to read it.
  3. Press Download at the top to save the file. It is named after the title shown at the top of the viewer: DeCA followed by the reference.

The PDF is an A4 form titled 'Carta de porte'. It shows the reference, the status and the version, the transport date and the QR code. Below come the loader (name, VAT/NIF, address), the carrier (name, VAT/NIF, plate, trailer, driver and driving licence number when known), the consignee text from Destination, the nature of the goods, the gross weight, the place of reception from Origin, and the observations.

Once the DeCA is issued, a second page called 'Histórico / Traceability' lists the issue and every later change or cancellation, with times in UTC.

The DeCA PDF is always in Spanish, with the status also shown in English, whatever language the app uses.

Tip: Packages, Special authorisation (if applicable) and External reference are kept in your list but are not printed on the PDF.
Tip: You can open the PDF of a draft too. It has no reference yet and no QR code. If the viewer cannot load a PDF, it shows 'Could not load the PDF' and an Open in browser button.
Share a DeCA: QR code, inspection link and tracking page

Once a DeCA is issued it has two public web addresses. Neither needs a login, and neither changes when you edit the document, so the printed QR keeps working.

  • The PDF address. The QR code on the PDF points to it, so an inspector who scans the code sees the PDF straight away.
  • The tracking page. It is a web page in Spanish with the parties, the transport, the goods, the references, the status, the version and the history of events, plus a button to download the official PDF.
  1. To show the code on screen, press View QR on the row. A large QR opens with its address below.
  2. To copy the tracking page address, press the small QR icon (tooltip Copy inspection link). The app copies it silently, without a confirmation message.
  3. To send the document, open its PDF from the DeCA list and press Share. The viewer shares the tracking address, not the file.

If the device has no share menu, the app tries WhatsApp Web with the link, and as a last resort copies the link.

Tip: View QR is disabled for drafts and for cancelled documents. In the form of an issued document, the line Inspection link shows the PDF address. The addresses of a cancelled DeCA still open and show it as cancelled.
Important: Anyone who has one of these addresses can open the document without signing in. Share them only with people who need them.
Edit, duplicate, cancel or delete
  • Edit (pencil icon): a draft changes freely. An issued DeCA can still be edited, but you must enter a Reason for the change. Saving creates a new version (v2, v3 and so on) with the same reference, address and QR, and the old values stay in the history together with the reason. Changing a plate is recorded as a vehicle change. A cancelled DeCA cannot be edited.
  • Duplicate DeCA (copy icon): opens a new form filled with the data of that document, including its transport date, so check the date. Press Save to create a new draft. To assign the copy to a driver, pick the driver in the Driver menu again (choose the empty entry first if the name is already shown). Handy for a route you drive often.
  • Cancel (circle-slash icon on issued documents, also inside the form): after you confirm, the DeCA stays in the list marked Cancelled and cannot be edited or issued again.
  • Delete (inside the form, drafts only): after you confirm, the draft is removed for good.
Important: Cancelling cannot be undone. To replace a cancelled DeCA, duplicate it and issue the copy.
Tip: Cancelled documents are still included in the Tools ZIP, with _cancelled in their file name.
Assign a DeCA to a driver

Pick a person in the Driver menu at the top of the form. The menu lists the drivers of your account.

  • An issued DeCA appears for that driver under Work, in the My DeCA button of their own account, as long as their driver account is linked to your company.
  • If the driver has a linked driver account and notifications are set up, the driver also gets a notification 'New DeCA assigned'.
  • Drivers see only issued documents, never drafts or cancelled ones, and only those issued or changed in the last 14 days. They can view them but not change them.
Tip: The notification is sent when you issue the document, or when you save an issued document with a different driver. Saving a draft sends nothing.
Create a DeCA from a CMR document

A new DeCA form has the button Add DeCA from CMR. It reads a CMR you received, for example the CMR of a customer, and fills the DeCA for you. The button is only in the form of a new DeCA, not when you edit one.

  1. Press New DeCA, then Add DeCA from CMR.
  2. Choose the CMR as a PDF or a photo.
  3. Wait while the form says Reading document…. A PDF with text is read in an instant; a photo or a scanned PDF is read with AI and can take a minute or more.
  4. Check the filled fields. Anything the CMR did not contain is listed under Still required — fill in by hand:.
  5. Complete the form and press Save or issue it.
Tip: Always check the result against the CMR before you issue the DeCA. The reference of an Amazon CMR (VRID) goes into External reference.
Saved contractual loaders

Loaders you work with often can be saved, so you do not retype their name, VAT/NIF and address. The saved loaders appear in the loader name list of the DeCA and eCMR forms.

  • Save from a form: fill in the loader and press Save loader.
  • Manage the list: press Loaders at the top of the DeCA or eCMR list. In Saved contractual loaders you can Add loader, edit a loader with the pencil, or remove it with the trash icon.
  • Use a saved loader: start typing in Contractual loader — name and pick it. The name, VAT/NIF and address are filled in.
Tip: The list is shared by all users of your company account. Removing a loader from it does not change documents you already created.

Stand-alone eCMR (CMR without a transport order)

A stand-alone eCMR is a CMR consignment note that you fill in directly, without a transport order. You issue it, a driver can sign it on a phone, and you share the PDF with its QR code.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
What the stand-alone eCMR is and what you need

The Work module can create a CMR inside a transport order (see the section 'Work: transport orders and eCMR'). The stand-alone eCMR is a separate list of notes that are not tied to any order. The app describes it like this: fill the boxes, issue and share the PDF with its inspection QR. Issued notes stay editable with the same address and QR.

  • It needs the Work module (included in your plan, granted or bought). The Work entry in the left menu is the way in.
  • Only company accounts create and manage these notes. Drivers can view and sign the ones assigned to them.
  • In the read-only demo the buttons are disabled, and a frozen account cannot create, issue, edit or cancel notes.
Open the eCMR list
  1. Open Work in the left menu.
  2. Press eCMR list. To start a note directly, press Create document and choose New eCMR.

The table has the columns Reference, Route (sender to place of delivery), Date (the day the note was created), Status and Actions. It shows your 300 most recent notes.

  • The Search… box looks in the reference, CMR number, sender, consignee and place of delivery.
  • Sort with Newest first, Oldest first, Reference or Status.
  • Filter with All statuses, Draft, Issued or Cancelled.
Tip: As with DeCA, only Draft and Cancelled carry a badge, and a version such as v2 appears after you change an issued note. Until the first note exists, the page shows the text 'No DeCA documents yet.' (the same message as the DeCA list), and the search box and filters appear after that.
Fill in a new eCMR
  1. In the eCMR list, press New eCMR. A large form opens that follows the numbered boxes of the paper CMR.
  2. Optional: pick the Driver at the top, to assign the note to a driver.
  3. Fill in the boxes (see the list below). You can leave optional boxes empty.
  4. Press Save to keep a draft, or Issue to finish the note (next topic).
  • Parties and places: 1. Sender with Sender VAT/NIF, 2. Consignee, 3. Place of delivery, 4. Date and place of handover, 5. Documents attached.
  • Carrier side: Carrier — company profile (when you have company profiles), 16. Carrier, 17. Successive carriers, 18. Carrier's reservations.
  • Goods, under 6-12. Goods (one line per item): 6. Marks and Nos, 7. Number of packages, 8. Method of packing, 9. Nature of the goods, 10. Statistical number, 11. Gross weight (kg) and 12. Volume (m³). Press Add goods line for more items. The trash icon removes a line. Up to 20 non-empty lines are saved. The PDF adds up the weights and the volumes of all lines, so type them as plain numbers such as 1250.
  • Dangerous goods: ADR class, ADR number and ADR letter.
  • Instructions and payment: 13. Sender's instructions, 13. Transhipment not allowed, 13. Insurance instructions, 15. Carriage payment (Franco or Non franco), 15. Carriage charges, Supplementary charges, Customs duties, Other charges, 15. Charges paid by (Sender, Consignee or Other), 20. Special agreements, Cash on delivery amount.
  • Closing boxes: 21. Established in, 21. Established on, Net load (kg), Carrier reference, 18. Seal number, 18. TIR carnet.
  • Control data: Origin, Transport date, Tractor plate, Trailer plate, the International transport tick box (left empty, the note is national) and Observations.

A new note starts with today's date in 21. Established on and in Transport date, and with your company name in 16. Carrier. Choosing a company in Carrier — company profile fills box 16 with that company's name, address, postal code, city, country, CIF and phone.

Tip: Box 23 (driver) and the other signatures are not typed here. They are signed on the driver's device after you issue the note.
Tip: Tractor plate and Trailer plate let you pick from your vehicles or type a plate, and in the DeCA part Contractual loader — name offers your saved loaders. Picking a driver who has an assigned truck fills empty plates with that truck and its trailer.
Issue the eCMR
  1. In the form, press Issue. You can do this straight on a new form, without saving first, and any change in the form is saved with it.
  2. If something is missing, the form shows 'Missing mandatory data:' followed by the names of the empty boxes. Fill them in and press Issue again.
  3. When it succeeds, the form closes and the PDF opens in the app's viewer.

These boxes must be filled in: 1. Sender, 2. Consignee, 3. Place of delivery, 4. Date and place of handover and 21. Established on.

Issuing gives the note a reference, a public link and the QR code. The reference starts with your company VAT number when it is stored in your account (otherwise with an account code), then -CMR-, the year and a running number, for example B12345678-CMR-2026-1. The CMR number printed on the form is the same as the reference.

Tip: A note you only Save stays a draft: private to your company, with no reference and no QR code.
The eCMR PDF
  1. In the eCMR list, press the PDF icon (tooltip PDF) on the row.
  2. Read the document in the viewer and press Download to save it. The file is named after the title at the top of the viewer.
  • Page 1 is the standard boxed CMR form with its labels in French, English and German, and a National or International tick at the top. The labels are fixed text and do not follow your app language. Boxes 11 and 12 show the totals of all goods lines.
  • Under the form there is the QR code, the public address of the PDF and a line with a SHA-256 fingerprint of the content.
  • Signatures appear as images in boxes 22 (sender), 23 (driver) and 24 (consignee), with the typed name, ID number and time of each signer.
  • A last page called 'Histórico / Traceability' (in Spanish) lists the issue, every change and every signature, with times in UTC. A note that has been issued has it.
Tip: The tractor and trailer plate, Origin, Transport date and Observations from Control data are kept with the note and shown on its public tracking page, but the printed CMR form has no place for them. Only the International transport tick appears on the form.
Tip: A draft can also be opened as a PDF. It has no QR code and no reference yet.
Share an eCMR

An issued note has two public web addresses. Neither needs a login and neither changes when you edit the note.

  • The PDF address. The QR code on the PDF points to it, so scanning the code shows the PDF straight away.
  • The tracking page, in Spanish. It shows the parties, the transport, the goods, the references, the status and the version, with a button to download the official PDF.
  1. To copy the tracking page address, press the small QR icon on the row (tooltip Copy inspection link). The app copies it without a confirmation message.
  2. To send the note, open its PDF and press Share. The viewer shares the tracking address, not the file.
Tip: The eCMR list has no View QR button. The QR code is printed on the PDF.
Important: Once you cancel a note, its PDF address answers 'This document has been cancelled.' and the PDF can no longer be opened with it.
Assign a driver and collect signatures

Pick a person in the Driver menu at the top of the form. After you issue the note, the driver finds it under Work, in the My eCMR button of their own account, and can sign it there. The driver account must be linked to your company.

  • When you issue a note that has a driver, the driver gets a notification 'New eCMR to sign'.
  • When you add or change the driver of a note that is already issued, the driver gets 'New eCMR assigned'.
  • The driver can sign three times: as the sender, as the driver and as the consignee. All three signatures are captured on the driver's device.
  • The signatures show up on the PDF, in boxes 22, 23 and 24.
Tip: The eCMR list has no signing button for company users. Signing happens in the driver's account.
Edit, duplicate, cancel or delete
  • Edit (pencil icon): a draft changes freely. An issued note can still be edited. Saving creates a new version, keeps the same reference, address and QR, and writes the changes to the history. When the note is also the DeCA, you must enter a Reason for the change. Existing signatures are kept. A cancelled note cannot be edited.
  • Duplicate DeCA (copy icon; the tooltip says DeCA, but it copies the eCMR): opens a new form filled with the data of the note. Save or Issue it.
  • Cancel (circle-slash icon on issued notes, also inside the form): after you confirm, the note stays in the list marked Cancelled. A cancelled note cannot be issued or signed again.
  • Delete (inside the form, drafts only): after you confirm, the draft is removed for good.
Important: An issued eCMR cannot be deleted, only cancelled. Cancelling cannot be undone.
The CMR of a transport order is a different document

A CMR created inside a transport order is kept with that order, not in the eCMR list. Open Work, click the order and press Issue eCMR. The boxes, the signatures, the locking and the PDF of that CMR are described in the section 'eCMR consignment note for an order'.

Tip: This note does not appear in the eCMR list, in My eCMR or in the Include eCMR documents option of the Global ZIP download.
Use the eCMR as the DeCA (Spanish national transport)

For a national transport in Spain, one eCMR can also be the DeCA, so the driver carries a single document. Tick This eCMR is also the DeCA (unified document) and fill in the DeCA particulars: the contractual loader, the effective carrier's VAT/NIF, the plates, the date, the goods and the weight. The option is not available for international transport.

  • Whether the eCMR is also the DeCA is fixed when you issue it. To change it, cancel the eCMR and issue a new one.
  • After issue, the DeCA particulars must stay complete: a change that empties one of them is refused.
  • Every change to an issued unified eCMR needs a Reason for the change. The new data, the reason and the previous values are kept in its history, which is printed on the PDF for the inspector.
Tip: The CMR of a transport order follows the same rules once the order is assigned, in progress or completed: see 'Edit an order'.

Everything the app can generate

A complete list of the documents, archives and codes you can create in the app, who can create each one, where to find it and in which language it comes out.

PDF documents

The app creates five kinds of PDF. The DeCA, eCMR, CMR and load order PDFs open in the app's own viewer, with Download, Share, page arrows and zoom buttons. The time registry PDF is saved directly by your browser.

  • DeCA PDF. Work → DeCA list → PDF icon. Company accounts, free module. Always in Spanish, with the status also in English.
  • Stand-alone eCMR PDF. Work → eCMR list → PDF icon, and it opens by itself after Issue. Company accounts with the Work module. French, English and German box labels, Spanish history page.
  • CMR PDF of a transport order. Work → click an order → CMR PDF, or the Documents button of the order in the orders table → View PDF. Work module. Same trilingual form as the eCMR, plus one page for each signature and check-in. The CMR of an order is described in the Work section of this guide.
  • Load order PDF. Work → click an order → PDF (top right). Work module. It comes out in the language set for your account. See the section 'PDFs, QR codes and sharing'.
  • Time Registry PDF. Time Registry → choose the driver, the month and the year → Download PDF. Needs the Time Registry module, an employer company assigned to the driver and card data for that month, otherwise the button stays disabled. A4 landscape, always in Spanish. See the section 'Time Registry (registro de jornada)'.
Tip: When you press Download in the viewer, the file is named after the title shown at the top of the viewer, for example DeCA followed by the reference. Inside the Tools ZIP the documents are named DeCA_[reference].pdf and CMR_[reference].pdf.
Tip: The detailed steps are in the sections 'DeCA: national transport control document', 'Stand-alone eCMR (CMR without a transport order)', 'Work: transport orders and eCMR' and 'Time Registry (registro de jornada)'. In the Android app the viewer hands the download to the phone.
ZIP archives, original files and file names
  • ZIP of all your files. Tools → Global ZIP download → Download ZIP. It can also hold DeCA and eCMR PDFs. See the Tools section above.
  • ZIP of one driver's files. Drivers → open the driver → Download all (next to the Files heading) → choose both dates → Download all. File name driver_[card number]_files.zip. The button appears when the driver has files.
  • ZIP of one vehicle's files. Vehicles → open the vehicle → Download all (next to the Documents heading; it packs the vehicle's tachograph files, not the scanned documents) → choose the dates or leave both empty for the full history → Download ZIP. File name vehicle_[registration]_files.zip.
  • One original file. In a driver's or vehicle's file list, press the download icon.
  • Renamed file. Tools → Filename converter makes a renamed copy of a file from your computer. The arrows icon in a stored file's row renames the stored file itself between .DDD and .TGD.
  • Files from the phone app. In the Android app, the smart-card reader reads a driver card and uploads it as a .DDD or .TGD file, and Bluetooth vehicle downloads are saved with the professional file name. The format is set under Settings → Other Settings (see the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)').
Tip: The ZIP buttons and the file downloads are not available in the read-only demo.
QR codes and public links
  • A QR code is printed on every issued DeCA PDF and every issued eCMR PDF, and on the CMR PDF of an order.
  • View QR in the DeCA list shows the DeCA's QR code on screen, large enough to be scanned from another phone.
  • Each issued DeCA and stand-alone eCMR also has a public tracking page in Spanish.
  • All these addresses work without a login. They are described in the DeCA and eCMR sections above.
Tip: The CMR of a transport order has its own public link, and it stops working 30 days after the order was completed.
What the app does not export

Reports, infringements, the rest planner, payroll, GPS tracking and fuel tickets are shown on screen. The web app has no PDF, CSV or Excel export for them.

The Documents cards on a driver's or vehicle's page keep photos and files of documents such as insurance or licences, with expiry dates for reminders. They store what you upload and do not create new documents.

Work: transport orders and eCMR

The Work module is where you create transport orders, send them to your linked drivers, follow their loading and unloading check-ins, and produce the CMR consignment note and PDFs.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
What the Work module does

Work is the page for dispatching. You create a transport order with loading and unloading stops, assign it to a driver, and follow it until the last stop is done. The driver works the order from the phone: accepts it, checks in at each stop, takes photos and signs the CMR on the screen.

  • Orders with loading and unloading stops. Each stop has a place, an address, a time window, instructions and an optional map pin.
  • Assignment to a linked driver account. A driver who uses the Tacho Manager Android app also gets a push notification.
  • Check-ins marked Loaded or Unloaded, stamped with the time, the driver's remarks and the phone position.
  • An eCMR consignment note for each order, signed on the phone.
  • PDFs: the load order, and the CMR with a QR code that opens without a login.
Tip: Drivers only see the orders assigned to them. The Driver account guide explains their view.
What you need before you start
  • Module active. Work comes with your plan when the plan includes it. It can also be granted to your account or bought as a module. If it is missing, the Work tab in Settings, then Modules shows Not active and a Go to Billing button.
  • Module switched on. Open Settings, then Modules, choose the Work tab and check that the switch Enabled for your company is on. If you turn it off, the Work entry disappears from your menu and your drivers no longer see their orders.
  • Linked driver accounts. You can only assign an order to a driver who has their own driver account linked to your company and a driver card on that account (orders are matched by card number). The linking steps are described in the section 'Linking drivers to your company'.
  • Account not frozen. If your account is frozen, for example after a lapsed subscription, you can still open the pages, but saving an order, checking in, adding photos and signing are refused until you renew.
Tip: The public demo is read-only. You can open the Work pages, but the form fields and buttons that change data are disabled or hidden and nothing is saved.
The Work page

Open Work in the left menu. It sits right under Info. The buttons at the top of the page are:

  • Create document: opens a small menu with New order, New eCMR and New DeCA.
  • DeCA list and eCMR list: open the lists of those documents. They are not tied to an order and are described in the sections 'DeCA: national transport control document' and 'Stand-alone eCMR (CMR without a transport order)'.

Until you create the first order the page says 'No transport orders yet. Create the first one with 'New order'.' After that you see a table with the columns Ref., Title, Driver, Next stop and Status. The Driver column shows the driver's card number. Next stop shows the first stop that is not checked in yet. At the end of each row there are three buttons: Documents, a pencil to edit the order, and a slash icon to cancel it. Click an order title to open the order page.

Type in Search… to filter by reference, title, truck, trailer, driver card or place name. Sort with Newest first, Oldest first, Reference or Status. The counter on the right shows how many orders match out of the total.

Order statuses
  • Draft: the order has no driver yet, or you removed the driver before work started.
  • Assigned: a driver is set and nothing has been checked in yet.
  • In progress: the driver has checked in at the first stop.
  • Completed: every stop has been checked in.
  • Cancelled: you cancelled the order. It stays in the history and cannot be reopened.

The status changes by itself. The first check-in moves an order from Assigned to In progress, and the last check-in makes it Completed.

Create, assign and manage orders

Create a transport order with its stops, assign it to a linked driver, edit it while it runs, and cancel or delete it.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
Create a new order
  1. Open Work in the left menu.
  2. Press Create document and choose New order.
  3. Type a Title. It is the only required field of the order itself.
  4. Fill in the truck, trailer, driver and notes if you know them.
  5. Add at least one stop with Add loading or Add unloading and give it a Place name.
  6. Press Save. The form closes and the order appears in the list.
Tip: Save stays disabled until the Title is filled in. An order needs at least one stop with a Place name; without it the app answers 'At least one stop with a place name is required.' Stops without a place name are dropped when you save.
Order details
  • Title: the name shown in the lists and on the driver's phone.
  • Ref.: leave it empty to get an automatic reference such as WO-2026-001 (the year and a running number). Type your own reference if you prefer.
  • Truck and Trailer: the registration plates. They are printed on the PDFs.
  • Assigned driver: the driver who will work the order. See the topic on assigning below.
  • Notes: free text shown at the top of the order page, for you and the driver.
Load order fields

Under the order details there is a section called Load order (transport contract). What you type here is printed before the stop list on the load-order PDF.

  • For (customer / consignee) and Customer address.
  • Vehicle requirements (e.g. ATP fridge, 33 euro pallets).
  • Loading/unloading conditions and goods description.
  • Transport price.
  • Freight terms (paid at origin/destination).
Tip: If you leave the customer empty, the PDF uses the consignee of the order's CMR, or else the place of the last unloading stop.
Add and arrange stops
  1. Press Add loading or Add unloading for each place the truck must visit.
  2. Fill in the Place name (required) and the Address.
  3. Optionally set Window from and Window until (date and time) and write Instructions for the driver.
  4. Use the up and down arrows to change the order of the stops. Use the trash icon to remove a stop.

Stops are numbered in the order of the list, for example 1. Loading, 2. Unloading. The driver sees them in that order and can check in on any stop that is still open.

Tip: When you edit an order, stops you keep stay checked in. A stop you remove from the list is deleted from the order.
Pin a stop on the map
  1. On the stop, press Pick on map.
  2. Click on the map or drag the red pin to the exact loading or unloading point.
  3. Check the coordinates shown under the map.
  4. Press Use this location. The stop now shows its coordinates instead of 'no coordinates'.

The map is OpenStreetMap. If the stop has no pin yet, the map opens zoomed out on Spain. If it already has one, the map opens there. Cancel closes the map without changing the stop.

The pin has two uses. The turn-sign button next to the stop (tooltip Navigate to this stop) opens directions to it, and every check-in is compared with it.

Tip: A stop without a pin still works. The driver can check in, but no distance check is done. The navigation button still appears when the stop has an address, and then uses the place name and address. A stop with neither a pin nor an address has no navigation button.
Assign an order to a driver

Choose the driver in Assigned driver. The list contains your linked driver accounts only, shown as name and card number. The first entry, — not assigned —, leaves the order without a driver.

  1. Pick the driver in Assigned driver.
  2. Press Save.

When you save with a new driver, an order that has not started becomes Assigned and an Assigned entry is added to the activity log. The driver's Tacho Manager Android app, if notifications are allowed, receives a notification titled New transport order. It says that your company assigned the order and tells the driver to open Work. The text comes in the driver's own language.

  • If you change the driver, the new driver gets the notification. The previous driver is not told; the order simply disappears from that driver's list.
  • Saving again without changing the driver sends no new notification.
  • Choosing — not assigned — on an assigned order sends it back to Draft, unless work has already started. The driver gets no notification and the order leaves their list.
Tip: Notifications are best-effort and only reach drivers who use the Android app. If one does not arrive, the order still shows in the driver's Work list, which refreshes by itself every minute.
Edit an order
  1. In the Work list, press the pencil at the end of the order row.
  2. Change what you need.
  3. Press Save.

Every change made after the order was created is written to the activity log as Order modified, listing the parts that changed, for example the title or the stops.

Tip: The driver is not notified when you edit an order. Only assigning and cancelling send a notification. Tell the driver yourself if you change stops during a run.
Tip: The Cancel button next to Save only closes the form without saving. It does not cancel the order; for that use Cancel order.
Important: When the order is assigned, in progress or completed and its CMR is also the DeCA, changing the plates or the loading or delivery points needs a Reason for the change. The reason goes into the history of the CMR. The tractor plate cannot be emptied, and once the CMR is signed the plates cannot be changed.
Cancel or delete an order

Cancel order is the slash icon in the list, the button on the order page, and the button in the editor. You are asked to confirm. The order stays in your history marked Cancelled and cannot be reopened.

  • A cancelled order accepts no more check-ins, and the Loaded, Unloaded and Photo buttons disappear.
  • The CMR of the order is cancelled too, and kept in the history.
  • A driver with the Android app gets a notification titled Order cancelled, once.

Delete is the red button in the order editor. It removes the order together with its stops, check-ins, photos and CMR. A DeCA that was made from the order is not removed; it stays in the DeCA list.

Important: Deleting cannot be undone. An order whose CMR was signed less than one year ago cannot be deleted at all (the app answers that the signed CMR must be retained for one year). Cancel it instead.

Follow progress and check-ins

See where each order stands, read the check-ins with their GPS position and distance flags, and look at the photos the driver took.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
The order page

Click the title of an order in the Work list to open it. The page shows:

  • The title, the status badge, and the buttons PDF and Cancel order.
  • A line with the reference, the truck and trailer, and the driver's card number, then the notes.
  • The card Loading / unloading stops: each stop with its number and type, place, address, time window and instructions. A stop that is done shows a green badge with the check-in date and time. While the order is open, each open stop has a Loaded or Unloaded button and a Photo button, and a turn-sign button that opens directions when the stop has a pin or an address.
  • Photo thumbnails under each stop.
  • Buttons for the documents of the order: Issue eCMR and Issue DeCA, plus CMR PDF and Sign CMR once a CMR exists, and a button with the DeCA reference once a DeCA exists.
  • The Activity log at the bottom.
Tip: The order page shows the state at the moment you open it and does not update while it stays open. Reload the page or open the order again to see new check-ins.
How check-ins work

The driver checks in each stop once: Loaded at a loading stop, Unloaded at an unloading stop. A check-in records the time, the driver's remarks and, when the phone could provide it, the GPS position. It also marks the stop as done.

  • You can check in at the stops in any order.
  • The first check-in turns an Assigned order into In progress. When all stops are done it becomes Completed.
  • A check-in cannot be undone, and a closed order (Completed or Cancelled) accepts no more.

You can also check in a stop yourself from the order page, for example if the driver cannot: press Loaded or Unloaded on the stop, write optional Remarks / reservations (optional), and press Confirm check-in. It is recorded under your user name and uses the location of the device you are working on, not the truck's position.

The activity log

The Activity log lists everything that happened on the order, each line with date and time. The entry types are Assigned, Accepted by driver, Loaded, Unloaded, Photo added, CMR signed, Order modified and Cancelled.

  • On Assigned lines you see the driver's name.
  • On Loaded and Unloaded lines you see the remarks typed at check-in.
  • On CMR signed lines you see the role and the signer's name.
  • On Order modified lines you see the names of the parts that changed.

A pin icon at the end of a line opens a map with the recorded position. Entries without a position have no pin.

Tip: The times in the log come from the server clock and are in UTC, like the times printed on the PDFs.
Distance flags

When a stop has a map pin and the check-in has a GPS position, the app measures the straight-line distance between the two. If the phone was more than 2 km from the pin, the log line gets a yellow warning badge with the distance in km. Hover over it to read 'Check-in was … km away from the declared stop location.'

Tip: A flag is a hint for you to review, never a block. A driver with a weak signal can still check in. The distance also appears in the activity log of the load order PDF and as a note on the check-in page of the CMR PDF.
Driver acceptance

After you assign an order, the driver sees a banner with the button Accept order until the first check-in. When the driver presses it, the log shows Accepted by driver with the time and, if available, the position.

Tip: Accepting is a confirmation of receipt. The driver can still check in without it.
Stop photos

Photos appear as small pictures under the stop they belong to. Click one to open it full size in a new tab. Each photo adds a Photo added line to the log.

The driver adds them with the Photo button on the stop. You have the same button on the order page. Photos can be JPEG, PNG or WebP, up to 10 MB each. The Photo button disappears once the order is completed or cancelled.

Tip: There is no way to delete a photo from the app. If many photos are sent in a short time, the app answers 'Too many uploads, slow down.' Wait a little and try again.
When a check-in has no GPS

The app waits up to 15 seconds for the phone's position. If it cannot get one, for example because location access is blocked or there is no signal, it asks 'Could not get the device location. Check in without GPS?'. If the driver continues, the check-in is saved without a position. There is then no pin in the log and no distance check.

Tip: Ask your drivers to allow location access for the app or browser. Photos, acceptance and signatures are saved without a position when none is available. On the CMR PDF, the page of a check-in or signature without a position says 'GPS: n/a'.

eCMR consignment note for an order

Fill in the numbered boxes of the CMR for an order, then have it signed on the driver's phone. The content locks with the first signature.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
What the order CMR is

The CMR is the road consignment note. In Work, each order can have one digital CMR with the numbered boxes of the standard form. You fill it in; the sender, the driver and the consignee sign it on the screen of the driver's phone.

Tip: This CMR belongs to an order. To make a consignment note without an order, see the section 'Stand-alone eCMR (CMR without a transport order)'.
Create the CMR
  1. Open the order from the Work list.
  2. Press Issue eCMR. The CMR form opens in a window, with boxes already filled from the order.
  3. Check the boxes and complete what is missing.
  4. Press Save CMR. The Issue eCMR button at the bottom of the window does the same. Cancel at the bottom only closes the window.

These boxes are prefilled from the stops: 1. Sender from the first loading stop, 2. Consignee and 3. Place of delivery from the last unloading stop, 4. Date and place of handover from the first loading stop and its window start, 21. Established in from the first loading place, 21. Established on with today's date, and Carrier reference with the order reference.

To open the form again later, press Sign CMR on the order page. Saving changes to an existing CMR adds an Order modified line to the log.

Fill in the boxes

At the top of the form you can type the CMR Nr and tick International transport. The tick switches the printed form from National to International. The link Hide boxes or Edit boxes collapses or opens the boxes.

The CMR of an order has the same numbered boxes as the stand-alone eCMR: parties and places, carrier side, goods lines, dangerous goods, instructions, payment and closing boxes. They are listed in the topic 'Fill in a new eCMR' of the section 'Stand-alone eCMR (CMR without a transport order)'. In the CMR of an order many boxes are already prefilled from the stops, as described above.

Tip: The CMR of an order has the field CMR Nr at the top and no Control data group: the truck and trailer plates printed in box 27 come from the order.
Carrier box and company profiles

If you have saved company data under Profile, then Company data, a list called Carrier — company profile appears above the carrier box. Choose a profile to fill 16. Carrier with its name, address, postal code, city, country, tax number and phone. Choose '— select a company profile —' to type the carrier yourself.

Tip: If 16. Carrier is left empty, the PDF fills it from the company name, address and VAT number saved in your account.
Who signs and how

The CMR has three signature roles: Sender, Driver (carrier) and Consignee. Each role signs once. On the driver's phone all three can be signed. From your desktop you can sign only as the Sender.

  1. Open the order and press Sign CMR.
  2. Next to Sender, press Sign.
  3. Type the Signer name (required). You may add a DNI/ID (optional) and Remarks / reservations (optional).
  4. Draw the signature inside the box with the mouse, finger or stylus. Clear starts again.
  5. Press Accept signature. The button stays disabled until there is a drawn signature and a name.

A signed role shows the time, the signer's name and any remarks. The Sign buttons next to Driver (carrier) and Consignee are visible, but if you press them from your desktop the app answers that this signature is collected on the driver device. The remarks of the sender and the driver are printed in box 18, and those of the consignee in box 24.

Locking after the first signature

Until the first signature, you can edit the boxes and press Save CMR as often as you like. After the first signature the content is locked and the form says 'The CMR content is locked because it already carries a signature.'

Important: There is no way to edit a signed CMR. Check every box with the sender before the first signature. Cancelling the order also cancels its CMR.

PDFs, QR codes and sharing

Open and download the load order and the CMR as PDFs, share the CMR with its public link, and start a DeCA from an order.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
Open, download and share a PDF

PDFs open in a viewer inside the app, with page arrows, zoom buttons and Fit width. At the top of the viewer there are Download and Share. Download saves the file under the title shown at the top of the viewer.

Share passes on the public link of the document when it has one, as the CMR does. Otherwise it shares the document address, which needs a login to open. On a phone it opens the share menu of the phone.

The load order PDF

The load order is the transport-contract sheet of an order: the transport conditions come first and the stop list comes at the end. It is separate from the CMR and the DeCA. Open the order and press PDF at the top right.

  • Page 1, titled LOAD ORDER: the order title, reference, company name and status, the date the order was created, the customer (For), the vehicle requirements, the loading and unloading conditions with the goods description, the transport price and freight terms, the truck and trailer plates, the driver when known, and the table of all stops with window and instructions.
  • An annex page: the Activity log (GPS) with date, event, stop, position and detail (distance in km, with a warning sign when flagged), and up to 12 photo thumbnails. Extra photos are not shown, only counted.

The headings come out in the language set for your company account, English if none is set. The status, the event names and the column heads of the activity log are printed in Spanish and English together.

Tip: The load order is a company document. The driver's order page has no PDF button for it.
The CMR PDF

Press CMR PDF on the order page. You can also press PDF inside the CMR window, or Documents in the list and then View PDF.

  • Page 1 is the form with numbered boxes, labelled in French, English and German whatever language the app uses. It shows National or International, the CMR number, the goods grid, the signatures in boxes 22, 23 and 24 with the typed name, ID and time, the driver's name and licence number (or card number when no licence number is saved) in box 23, and the truck and trailer plates in box 27.
  • Empty boxes are completed from the order where possible, for example the loading and unloading check-in times.
  • One amendment page for every signature and every Loaded or Unloaded check-in, with the time and the position as 'GPS: latitude, longitude' (or 'GPS: n/a'). Signature pages also show the signer and the remarks.
  • A control strip with a QR code and the public link, plus the integrity fingerprint once the CMR has been signed.
Tip: Times in the PDF are marked UTC. Labels use your company's theme colour.
Tamper protection

With the first signature on the CMR of an order, the app stores a SHA-256 fingerprint of the CMR number and box content. Every time that PDF is made, it is checked against the fingerprint. The control strip then prints 'integrity verified', or a warning that the content differs from the signed version.

Tip: Remarks written at signing are stored separately, so they do not change the sealed content.
Documents of an order

Press Documents at the end of an order row. The window lists what exists for that order: the CMR with its number, a QR icon for the public link and View PDF, and the DeCA with its reference, a status badge if it is not issued, and View PDF. If nothing exists you read 'This order has no generated documents.'

Start a DeCA from an order

DeCA is a separate document with its own DeCA list, free for every company account. On an order, Issue DeCA creates a DeCA prefilled from the order, or opens the one that already exists: an order has one DeCA. The order page then shows a button with the DeCA reference, its version and its status.

Tip: The prefill rules, the mandatory fields and the issuing steps are described in the section 'DeCA: national transport control document'.

Payroll module: overview

Payroll turns each driver's tachograph card files into a pay forecast: a base salary plus kilometres, hours, nights away and weekly rests, at the rates you set. You configure it once and review every driver day by day.

What payroll does

Payroll reads the driver-card files you have already uploaded and works out what each driver should be paid for the current pay period and for earlier ones. You see the result on screen, day by day, as a pay forecast.

A forecast has two parts. Base is a fixed amount per pay period. Extras is the sum of all the daily amounts on top of it: kilometres, worked hours, nights away from base, weekly rests and any manual extras you add. Total amount is Base plus Extras.

Tip: Amounts are always in euros (EUR). Payroll is shown on screen only: the app does not create a payslip, a PDF or a spreadsheet from it.
What you need before you start
  • You need a company account. Driver accounts cannot configure payroll.
  • The Payroll module must be active for your company: included in your plan, granted to you, or bought on the Billing page.
  • Enable payroll calculation module must be ticked in the payroll settings. It is not ticked on a new account, and payroll only runs while it is on.
  • Driver-card files must be uploaded for your drivers. A driver with no file has nothing to calculate.
Tip: If the module is not active, the Payroll Calculation tab under Modules shows a lock and a Not active badge. Open it to read Module not active, then press Go to Billing to reach the page where you can activate the module.
Important: The public demo is read-only: you can look at everything but change nothing. If your account is frozen because the subscription lapsed, saving payroll settings, saving or deleting tiers, adding extras and changing nights is refused until you renew.
Where to find payroll
  • Settings and rates: Settings in the left menu, then Modules. The Payroll Calculation tab is the first tab.
  • All drivers at a glance: Info in the left menu, card Payroll forecast.
  • One driver: Drivers in the left menu, click the driver, click a file name, then choose Payroll in the File reports window. The forecast opens on its own page, and Back to files returns you to the list.
  • Per-driver payroll options: Drivers, click the driver, then Edit.
Tip: Company accounts have no Payroll entry in the left menu. That entry belongs to driver accounts.
Set up payroll in six steps
  1. Open Settings, then Modules, then the Payroll Calculation tab.
  2. Tick Enable payroll calculation module.
  3. Choose the Pay period, the Period start day and the Base salary per period.
  4. Tick the Payment variant options you actually pay and enter their rates.
  5. Set your origin (the country, optionally a region, or a point on the map) so payroll can tell when a driver is away from base, then press Save.
  6. Open Info and expand Payroll forecast to see the first results. Rows are built automatically while the page is open. If a row stays unbuilt, press Compute on it, or Compute all.
Tip: Optional next steps: create Payroll tiers for drivers with different rates, set Working with company since for new hires, and tick Payroll access so drivers can see their own figures.
Things to know before you rely on the numbers
  • The current period is an estimate built from each driver's newest file. It changes when a newer file is uploaded.
  • Days and pay periods are cut at midnight UTC, not at local midnight.
  • Pay periods that start before 1 January 2026 are not calculated.
  • Card data from before a driver's Working with company since date is ignored.
  • Earlier periods that contain data are listed under the current one, up to 60 of them.
  • The figures depend on what the card recorded. Missing places or odometer readings mean missing allowances or kilometres. A driver card keeps only a limited number of place records, so upload files regularly. You can correct nights and add extras by hand.

Configuring payroll

Everything you set under Settings, then Modules, then Payroll Calculation: pay period, base salary, payment variants, rates, origin and the notice drivers see.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
Open and save the settings
  1. Click Settings in the left menu, then Modules.
  2. Open the Payroll Calculation tab. It is the first tab.
  3. Change the fields you need. Some fields only appear when the matching option is ticked.
  4. Press Save. The message Payroll settings saved. confirms it. If the settings cannot be saved, a red message tells you why.
Tip: One set of settings applies to the whole company. To give some drivers different values, use payroll tiers.
Tip: After you save, each driver's row in the Payroll forecast table on Info is rebuilt, and saved closed months get a Settings changed badge when a setting that affects the calculation has changed. Changing only the Announcement / notice does not do either.
Turn payroll on or off

The switch Enable payroll calculation module turns payroll on or off for your whole company. Switch it off and the Payroll forecast table disappears from Info, Payroll disappears from the file reports, the payroll switches disappear from the Edit driver window, and your drivers no longer see their payroll page. Your other settings are kept.

Pay period, start day and base salary
  • Pay period: Monthly, Biweekly or Weekly.
  • Period start day: for monthly, the day of the month a period starts (1 to 28; a higher number is treated as 28). For biweekly, the first cut day (the on-screen hint says 1 to 15); the second cut is 14 days later. For weekly, the weekday a week starts: 1 is Monday and 7 is Sunday.
  • Base salary per period: a fixed amount added once to every pay period, whatever the driver does. The total is the base plus the calculated extras.
Tip: For a driver who starts in the middle of a period, the base is pro-rated (see the rules section).
Payment variants

Under Payment variant, tick every way of paying that applies. The amounts of all ticked variants are added up for each day.

  • Per kilometer: kilometres driven that day times Rate per km.
  • Per work hour: counted work hours that day times Rate per work hour.
  • Per night outside origin: a fixed amount for each night spent away from origin, at the national or the international rate.
  • Per 24h weekly rest outside origin: a fixed amount, once per week, for a weekly rest of 24 to 45 hours taken away from origin.
  • Per 45h+ weekly rest outside origin: the same for a weekly rest of 45 hours or more.
Tip: Max payable hours per day appears with Per work hour, Minimum daily rest (h) with Per night outside origin, and each weekly-rest rate with its own variant. A variant you leave unticked pays nothing, even if its rate is filled in.
What counts as work and the hourly limit

Under What counts as work, tick the activities that count towards hours: Driving, Other work and the third option, for breaks shorter than 15 minutes (its label starts with Breaks and ends with 15 min). Availability, longer breaks and rests never count. A new account starts with all three ticked.

  • Rate per work hour: the amount paid for each counted hour.
  • Max payable hours per day: at most this many hours are paid per day, even if the driver worked more. It accepts 0 to 24, and 0 means no limit. A new account starts with 10.
Tip: The hours shown in the forecast are the hours that really counted as work. The payable limit only affects the money.
Origin: where home base is

The origin tells payroll when a driver is away from base.

  • Origin country (ISO): the two-letter country code, for example ES, FR or DE. It is saved in capitals.
  • Origin region (optional): if filled in, a place in another region of the same country also counts as away, but at the national rate. The name is compared, ignoring capital letters, with the region recorded for the place. A place with no recorded region is judged by country alone.
  • Origin radius (km) and Origin location: press Pick on map, click the map or drag the pin, then press Use this location. The circle shows the radius. The radius can be 0 to 5000 km and the default is 100 km. Clear removes the location.
  • A place counts as away when it is farther from the origin location than the radius. This distance rule is used for places that have coordinates. Places without coordinates, and every place when no location is set or the radius is 0, are judged by country and region instead.
Tip: Whether a night is national or international depends only on the country: a night in a different country from Origin country (ISO) is international, anything else is national.
Rates and minimum daily rest
  • Rate per km and Rate per work hour: pay per kilometre and per counted hour.
  • Rate per night (national) and Rate per night (international): the amount for each night outside origin, by zone.
  • Rate per 24h weekly rest (outside origin) and Rate per 45h+ weekly rest (outside origin): the weekly-rest amounts. Each one appears when its variant is ticked.
  • Minimum daily rest (h): the shortest uninterrupted rest that counts as a daily rest (default 9). It is used by the GPS night check and to list rests in the break details of the forecast.
Tip: Rates are stored with two decimals.
Daily pay cap and announcement
  • Daily pay cap: the most that kilometres, hours and nights together can pay for one day. 0 means no cap. Weekly-rest allowances and manual extras are not capped.
  • Announcement / notice: free text, up to 2,000 characters, shown at the bottom of the summary card of the forecast, to you and to your drivers. Plain text; line breaks are kept.

How a day and a period are paid

The rules the calculation follows: which hours count, how kilometres are measured, when a night counts as outside origin, weekly rests, the daily cap, the base salary and the pay periods.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
How one day is paid

Every day of a pay period goes through the same steps. A day is a calendar day counted in UTC.

  1. Work out the amount of each ticked variant: kilometres times the km rate, payable hours times the hourly rate, and the night rate if the night counts.
  2. Add them up. If a Daily pay cap is set, limit the sum to the cap.
  3. Add the weekly-rest allowance if a qualifying weekly rest started that day. It is not capped.
  4. Add any manual extras for that day. They are not capped either.
  5. The result is the Amount for the day.

The period total is the base salary plus the sum of all daily amounts.

Worked hours

Hours worked are the time, within the day, of every activity that counts as work under What counts as work. An activity that crosses midnight UTC is split between the two days. A day with any counted work is shown as a work day (Yes).

Payable hours are the worked hours limited by Max payable hours per day. They are paid at Rate per work hour.

Kilometres from the card odometer

Per-kilometre pay uses the odometer value that the driver card stores with its place records. The kilometres between two consecutive readings are counted on the day of the earlier reading.

  • At least two readings are needed.
  • Readings of 16,000,000 km or more are ignored.
  • If a reading is lower than the one before (another truck or a reset), no distance is counted for that step and the count starts again from the new reading.
  • If two readings are more than 3,000 km apart, no distance is counted for that step and the count starts again from the new reading.
  • On days where the card gives no distance, the distance from GPS tracking can be used instead (see the section 'GPS data in payroll and the rest summary'). The card always wins where it has data.
Tip: Kilometres are not shown in the day-by-day table. The Km column of the Payroll forecast table on Info (add it under Table settings) shows the total for the current period.
When a night counts as outside origin

A night allowance is only paid when Per night outside origin is ticked. Without GPS data, the app decides from the places on the driver card whether the night of a day counts as outside origin:

  • It looks at the places recorded for that calendar day: the locations entered at the start and end of work periods and, on newer tachographs, the recorded satellite position.
  • If any place that day is outside origin, the day counts as a night out. The country and region of the first such place are used.
  • If every place that day is at origin, it does not count.
  • If the card has no place for the day, the last known place is used when the card shows some activity that day and that place was recorded no more than 36 hours before the end of the day. Otherwise it does not count.
  • A place with neither a country nor coordinates is ignored.

The country of the night sets the zone: a different country from the origin country is international, anything else is national. The matching night rate is paid.

Tip: Minimum daily rest (h) does not change this card-based check. It is used by the GPS night check and by the break details.
Tip: With the GPS Tracking module, tracker positions can replace the card places for the region and for the night check. The setup and the rules are described in the section 'GPS data in payroll and the rest summary'.
Weekly rest allowance

The two weekly-rest variants pay a fixed amount for a long rest taken away from origin.

  • A weekly rest is an uninterrupted stretch with no driving, other work or availability. It can be a recorded rest or a time with the card out of the vehicle.
  • A rest of 24 hours up to 45 hours counts for the 24h variant. A rest of 45 hours or more counts for the 45h variant. They never overlap.
  • The location is the place recorded around the start of the rest. A rest with no known location neither pays nor cancels.
  • Rests are grouped by calendar week (Monday to Sunday) and by variant. Per week and variant the allowance is paid once, and only if at least one rest was outside origin and no rest of the same variant was taken at origin that week.
  • The amount is added to the day the first outside rest started. A variant with a rate of 0 pays nothing. Rests are looked at across the whole file, so a week can run over two pay periods.
Tip: The allowance is part of that day's Amount. It is not shown as a separate line.
The daily cap and the night rate

Daily pay cap limits the combined pay from kilometres, hours and nights for one day. If the night rate for that day is higher than the cap, the cap for that day is raised to the night rate, so a night allowance is never cut.

Tip: Weekly-rest allowances and manual extras are added after the cap. The base salary is added once per period and is not touched by the cap.
Base salary and the employment start date

The base is added once per pay period. If you set Working with company since for a driver, days before that date earn nothing. They appear with No and 0,00 EUR, and you cannot add extras or nights to them.

When the start date falls inside a period, the base is pro-rated: base times the days employed divided by the days in the period.

Which pay period is current
  • Monthly: a period runs from the start day of one month to the day before the start day of the next. With start day 1 it is the calendar month.
  • Biweekly: two periods per month, the first starting on the start day and the second 14 days later. With start day 1, periods run from the 1st to the 14th and from the 15th to the end of the month.
  • Weekly: seven days starting on the weekday you chose (1 is Monday, 7 is Sunday).
  • The current period is the one that holds the most recent record in the driver's newest file. Records dated in the future are ignored. If the newest file stops in the middle of an earlier period, that period is the current one.
  • Earlier periods that contain data are listed below it.

Tiers and per-driver payroll options

Give groups of drivers their own rates with payroll tiers, and set payroll access, the employment start date and the tier on each driver.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
What a payroll tier is

A tier is a named set of payroll settings, for example Tier 1. A driver assigned to a tier is calculated with the tier's values. A driver without a tier uses the default settings.

Tip: A tier keeps its own copy of every payroll value, including the Announcement / notice. If you later change the default settings, tiers do not follow. Edit the tier too.
Create a tier
  1. Open Settings, Modules, Payroll Calculation.
  2. Scroll to Payroll tiers and press Add tier.
  3. Type a Tier name, for example Tier 1. The name is required.
  4. Adjust the values. The form starts with your current default values already filled in.
  5. Press Save, or Cancel to leave without saving.
Tip: A tier form has no switch for the module and none for GPS. A tier copies the Use GPS tracking data in payroll setting from the moment it was created.
Edit or delete a tier
  • Press Edit next to the tier, change the values and press Save.
  • Press Delete and confirm. Drivers assigned to the tier fall back to the default settings.
Tip: Changing a tier changes the next calculation for its drivers and marks their closed months Settings changed.
Assign a tier to a driver
  1. Open Drivers and click the driver.
  2. Press Edit.
  3. Choose a value in Payroll tier. Default (company settings) uses the default configuration.
  4. Save the driver.
Tip: Payroll tier only appears once at least one tier exists and the payroll module is active.
Payroll access: let the driver see their forecast

In the Edit driver window, the switch Payroll access lets the driver see their own payroll forecast from their own account. It is only shown while the payroll module is active and switched on.

  • The driver needs their own driver account linked to your company. The linking steps are described in the section 'Linking drivers to your company'.
  • The card number on your driver record must be the driver's own card number. That is how the forecast is matched to the driver's account.
  • The driver sees the current period and the earlier periods back to the first day of last month. The driver cannot change anything.
  • The tab on the driver's Payroll page carries your company name, with the company details you have filled in. If you assigned the driver an employer company under Company (Time Registry) in the same window, that company's name, CIF / NIF and Workplace are shown instead.
  • You can always see a driver's forecast yourself, whether Payroll access is ticked or not.
Working with company since

The date field Working with company since is in the same Edit driver window. Payroll and the time registry ignore all card data before this date. Leave it empty for no limit and press Clear to remove a date. The field is shown while the payroll module or the time registry module is active.

Tip: For payroll it also pro-rates the base for the first period.
Tip: Changing the date does not put a Settings changed badge on saved closed months. Press Recalculate on a saved month to apply the new date.

Reviewing forecasts

Where to read each driver's forecast: the Payroll forecast table on Info, the full forecast window, closed months and recalculation.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
The Payroll forecast table on Info

The card Payroll forecast on Info lists every driver with the current pay period. It only appears while payroll is switched on, and it starts collapsed. By default it shows Period, Days (days with work), Hours, Nights out and Total. Km (the total for the current period), Base and Extras can be added under Table settings.

  • Nights out counts the days whose night counted as outside origin. Nights you added are included and nights you cancelled are not.
  • Click a driver's name, or press Open, to see the full forecast.
Tip: Table settings, the page size and the collapsed state are described in the section 'Driver tables: rest planner, infringements, payroll'.
Computing and refreshing the table

A driver whose figures are out of date is rebuilt automatically while Info is open, or by hand with Compute on the row and Compute all. This happens after a new upload and after a change to settings, extras, nights or the start date. The row shows New upload — will be computed automatically. while it waits and Computing… while it is rebuilt. A driver with no file shows No file uploaded yet.

Tip: A driver with more than 60 files cannot be computed on this card and the row shows an error. Open that driver's forecast from Drivers instead. The refresh is described in the section 'Driver tables: rest planner, infringements, payroll'.
Open one driver's forecast
  1. Open Drivers and click the driver.
  2. Click a file name in the files list. The File reports window opens.
  3. Choose Payroll.

You can also click the driver in the Payroll forecast table on Info. The forecast opens in a window titled with the driver's name and Payroll Calculation.

Tip: The forecast is always built from the driver's newest file, whichever file you clicked. The line Forecast from latest file names it. The Payroll option is only offered while payroll is active.
The summary card
  • Total amount: the total for the current period, with Base and Extras beneath it.
  • On the right: Pay period, Variant (the payment variants in use; the two weekly-rest variants appear under short technical names), Period (from and to) and Origin (the country, and the region if you set one).
  • Your Announcement / notice appears at the bottom of the card.
  • A yellow box lists warnings, for example when the file contains no activities and payroll cannot be calculated.
  • The green ? button opens How is this calculated?, a short list written from the settings that apply to this driver: pay period, active variants and rates, base salary, counted work, daily cap and the night rules.
The day-by-day table

Press a period to open it. Each day is one row.

  • Date.
  • Location: country and region. A day that started in one country and ended in another shows one country, an arrow, then the other. The small ? next to it (tooltip Break details) opens a box with the Zone (national or international) and the Break start, Break end and Duration of the rest, at least as long as Minimum daily rest (h), that covers most of the day. Times use the Report timezone from your Profile page.
  • Work day: Yes with the hours worked, or No.
  • Night outside: Yes when the night of that day counts as outside origin, otherwise No. A Yes only adds money when Per night outside origin is ticked. The next section describes the buttons you can use here.
  • Amount: the day's total in EUR, with the notes of any extras below it.
Tip: Amounts are written like 1.234,56 EUR, with a comma for decimals.
Current and closed periods
  • The first line has a Current badge. It is the period that holds the newest record in the newest file. It is normally a live estimate that changes with every new upload.
  • A period that has ended is calculated once, from the first file downloaded after it ended, with the settings in force then. It is then saved, and later uploads do not change it. A note reads Saved snapshot from the first download after the month ended, followed by the file name. The line marked Current is saved the same way when the newest file was downloaded after that period had already ended.
  • A period that has just ended but has no later file yet stays live.
  • Adding or removing extras or nights for a driver clears that driver's saved periods. They are calculated again when you open them.
Recalculate a closed period

If you change settings after a period was saved, it keeps the old figure. A yellow badge Settings changed warns you. Press Recalculate on that period to calculate it again from the same file with today's settings, extras and nights, and save the new result.

Tip: Recalculate and Settings changed only appear for company accounts, and Recalculate only on saved periods. Drivers do not see them. The read-only demo refuses the action.

Adjusting nights and adding extras

Cancel or add a night allowance for a single day and add a per-day extra amount with a note. The driver sees the reason or note.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
Who can adjust a forecast
  • Only company accounts. A driver cannot change their own forecast.
  • The buttons appear in a driver's forecast: in the window opened from Info and in the Payroll report of a driver's file.
  • They do not appear in the read-only demo, and changes are refused while the account is frozen.
  • Days before the driver's Working with company since date have no buttons.
Tip: Nights only pay when Per night outside origin is ticked.
Cancel a night allowance
  1. Open the driver's forecast and the period that holds the day.
  2. In the Night outside column, press Nullify next to Yes.
  3. Type the reason in the box that opens and press OK. The driver will see it. A reason can be up to 500 characters. Cancel leaves the day unchanged.
  4. The Yes is struck through, a red Nullified badge appears with your reason, and the day no longer pays a night.

To undo it, press Restore on the same day.

Tip: A night can show a yellow GPS: at origin badge. Hold the mouse over it to see how far from origin the truck was. When you press Nullify on such a night, the reason box is already filled with a suggested text that you can change.
Add a night the app did not detect
  1. In the Night outside column, press Add night next to No.
  2. Type the reason in the box that opens and press OK. The driver will see it.
  3. The day shows Yes with a blue Added by company badge and your reason.

The night is paid at the national or the international rate, depending on the country where the driver was at the end of that day. Press Remove to take it away again. A reason can be up to 500 characters.

Tip: This is meant for a night spent driving away from base, which the automatic detection cannot see. The button is not offered on days before Working with company since.
Add an extra amount to a day
  1. Under the day's Amount, press Add extra.
  2. Type the Amount. A comma or a dot works. A negative amount is a deduction. It cannot be 0 and cannot go above 100,000 either way. A zero or invalid amount is ignored.
  3. Type a note, for example Truck wash. The note is optional, is visible to the driver and can be up to 200 characters.
  4. Press Save, or Cancel to close the form.

The extra is shown under the day's amount, for example Truck wash · +20,00 EUR. It is added to that day's Amount, and so to Extras and Total amount. Extras are not limited by the daily cap. A day can have several extras.

To delete one, press the small cross next to it (tooltip Remove this extra).

What happens after an adjustment
  • The driver sees the new figures, the reason and the notes on their own Payroll page.
  • The driver's row in the Payroll forecast table on Info is rebuilt.
Important: Every adjustment deletes all of that driver's saved closed periods. They are calculated again the next time they are opened, with the settings in force at that moment. A month you saw earlier can therefore change.

GPS Tracking module

Connect the GPS trackers you already use, map each tracker to a truck and open a live map of that truck. The stored positions also refine locations in payroll and in the rest summary.

Module: GPS trackingOpen in the app Learn more
What GPS Tracking does and who can use it

GPS Tracking links Tacho Manager to the GPS trackers that are already fitted in your trucks. You keep using your own tracker provider. Tacho Manager reads your devices and their positions from your provider account.

  • Connect one or more tracker providers.
  • Map each tracker to one of your trucks.
  • Open a live map of a truck from Vehicles.
  • Let the stored positions refine the locations and regions in the rest summary, and the locations, night-outs and distance in payroll.

GPS Tracking is an optional module for company accounts. Driver accounts do not have it. It comes with your plan when the plan includes it, and it can also be granted to you or bought on the Billing page; see the section 'Modules'.

Tip: The tachograph stays the source of truth. GPS only adds location detail. It never replaces the working time recorded on the driver card.
Tip: In the read-only demo you can look at the settings but not change them. A frozen account is read-only too.
Where to find the settings
  1. Open Settings in the left menu to expand it.
  2. Click Modules.
  3. Open the GPS Tracking tab.

If the tab shows a lock and the label Not active, your company does not have the module yet. The tab then shows Module not active and a Go to Billing button.

When the module is active, the tab has two cards. GPS providers holds the connection settings. Devices lists your trackers and lets you map them to trucks.

Connect your GPS provider
  1. In the GPS providers card, switch on Enable GPS tracking. This is the master switch for the whole module.
  2. Switch on your provider, for example PAJ-GPS. The login fields for that provider appear below its name.
  3. Fill in every field the provider asks for. The next topic lists them.
  4. Click Test connection under the provider. The app logs in with the values you typed. It shows a message that starts with Connection OK and gives the number of devices found, or the reason why the login failed.
  5. Click Save at the bottom of the card. The message Saved. confirms it.
Tip: When all required fields of a provider are filled in and saved, a green configured badge appears next to its name.
Tip: Passwords, tokens, API keys and client secrets are write-only. After you save them they are never shown again and the field shows a placeholder that ends with leave blank to keep. Leave the field empty to keep the saved value, or type a new value to replace it.

A successful Test connection also saves everything you typed in the card, including the provider switches. If the test fails, nothing is saved.

You can switch on several providers at the same time. Each truck is tracked by one device from one provider.

Tip: If you switch off Enable GPS tracking and save, the module is paused for your company. New positions are no longer stored, the live map of a mapped truck shows an error, the Devices card asks for your credentials again, and payroll and the rest summary stop using GPS.
Supported providers and what each one needs

The app supports 15 tracker providers. When you switch a provider on, its card shows only the fields it needs. A Server URL, API host (optional) or Server (optional) field can stay empty for the providers where it is optional. The app then uses the provider's standard address.

  • PAJ-GPS: Email, Password.
  • Traccar: Server URL, Email, Password.
  • Wialon: Access token. API host (optional) can stay empty.
  • Webfleet: Account, Username, Password, API key.
  • Flespi: Access token.
  • Samsara: Access token.
  • Geotab: Database, Username, Password. Server (optional) can stay empty.
  • Navixy: Email, Password. Server URL can stay empty.
  • Ruptela (FM-Track): API key. Server URL can stay empty.
  • Mapon: API key. Server URL can stay empty.
  • GPSWOX: Server URL, Email, Password.
  • Motive (KeepTruckin): API key.
  • rFMS (truck OEM): Server URL, OAuth2 token URL, Client ID, Client secret.
  • ABAX: Client ID, Client secret.
  • Quartix: Username, Password. Server URL can stay empty.
Tip: Use the access data from your own tracker provider account. If you are not sure which values to enter, ask your provider.
Map each tracker to a truck

Once Enable GPS tracking is on and at least one provider is saved with all its required fields, the Devices card lists every tracker that your provider account holds. The list is refreshed from your provider when you open the card. Until then the card says that you must enter and enable your credentials.

Each row shows the Provider, the Device (name and device number), the IMEI, the Last position and the Mapped truck. On a narrow screen the IMEI and Last position columns are hidden. Last position is filled in once the app has received a position for that tracker. Its time is shown in UTC.

  1. Find the row of the tracker.
  2. Open its Mapped truck list and choose the registration number of the truck that carries the tracker.
  3. To remove the link again, choose — not mapped —.
Tip: The change is saved the moment you pick a truck. There is no save button in the Devices card.
Tip: Only trucks are offered, and only trucks that already exist under Vehicles. Add a missing truck with Add vehicle first. Trailers cannot be mapped. A truck can have only one tracker: if you pick a truck that is already linked to another tracker, the link moves to the tracker you are editing.
Tip: Click Refresh after you add a new tracker at your provider. If your provider cannot be reached, the trackers already known to Tacho Manager stay in the list. If your account holds no trackers you see No devices found on this account.
Open the live location of a truck

The live map shows where the tracker of a truck reported its latest position. It needs a truck with a mapped tracker.

  1. Open Vehicles in the left menu.
  2. On the Trucks tab, click the red pin next to the registration number of a truck that has a tracker. Hover over it to read Live location.
  3. A Live location window opens with a map of the truck's position.

You can also open the truck itself and click Live location, next to Edit at the top of the page.

  • The marker pulses and glides to each new position, and the map follows it. While the window is open the app asks your provider for a fresh position about every 10 seconds.
  • Under the map you see the device name, the speed in km/h, the battery level in percent, the date and time of the position and its coordinates. Items that your provider does not send are left out.
  • The date and time is when the tracker last reported. It can be older than the current time, for example when the truck is parked.
  • The footer shows when the data was last updated. Click Close to leave the window.
Tip: If the truck has no tracker mapped, the window says that no GPS device is mapped yet and points you to the GPS Tracking page, which is Settings, then Modules, then GPS Tracking. If your provider has no position for the tracker, the map shows no marker.
Tip: The red pin and the Live location button are for trucks only. The pin appears on the Trucks tab only. The button on the truck page is shown while the module is active and is not shown in the demo.
How positions are stored in the background

Besides the live view, Tacho Manager copies the positions of every mapped truck into its own storage. This runs in the background about every 30 minutes, for companies that have Enable GPS tracking switched on. Payroll and the rest summary read this stored copy, so they keep working when your provider is temporarily offline.

  • The first run starts with the most recent 14 days. Later runs add the positions that arrived since.
  • Older history is added step by step, going back as far as your provider keeps data. If your provider does not report a limit, the app goes back up to 400 days.
  • At most one position per minute is kept for each truck.
  • For the last five days the app looks for holes of more than six hours and tries to fill them again from your provider.
Tip: The history of a newly mapped truck fills in over several runs, so it is not complete right away.
Tip: The stored positions have no map of their own in the app. You see their effect in payroll and in the rest summary. The next section explains how.
Troubleshooting
  • The Devices card asks for your credentials: switch on Enable GPS tracking, switch on a provider, fill in all its required fields and click Save.
  • Test connection fails: the message names the provider and the reason. Check the values and try again. If a required field is empty, the app asks you to enter the credentials first.
  • A tracker is missing in the Devices list: click Refresh. Make sure the provider that holds it is switched on and saved.
  • A truck is missing in the Mapped truck list: only trucks are offered, not trailers, and the truck must exist under Vehicles.
  • There is no red pin next to a truck in Vehicles: no tracker is mapped to that truck yet, or you are looking at the Trailers tab.
  • The live window shows GPS tracking is turned off.: switch on Enable GPS tracking again in Settings, then Modules, then GPS Tracking and save.
  • The live window shows no marker: your provider has no position for the tracker right now, or did not answer. The window tries again by itself every 10 seconds.
  • Payroll or the rest summary shows no GPS locations: see the next section for everything that has to be in place.

GPS data in payroll and the rest summary

Stored tracker positions refine where a driver was, which regions the truck crossed, whether a night was spent away from base and how far the truck drove. The tachograph card always stays the source of truth for working time.

Module: GPS trackingOpen in the app Learn more
How a driver's days are matched to a truck

Tacho Manager reads from the driver card which truck the driver used and when. If that truck has a mapped tracker, the stored positions of the truck for those times are used. If the truck has no tracker, or the tracker sent nothing for that time, the location recorded on the card is used instead.

The truck is recognised by its registration number. The registration under Vehicles must match the one recorded on the driver card. Capital letters and spaces do not matter.

So GPS only has an effect when all of these are true:

  • Enable GPS tracking is on.
  • The truck the driver used is mapped to a tracker.
  • Positions of that truck were stored for the period.
  • For payroll, the payroll module is active and Use GPS tracking data in payroll is on.
Turn GPS use in payroll on or off
  1. Open Settings, then Modules.
  2. Open the Payroll Calculation tab. It needs the payroll module.
  3. Switch Use GPS tracking data in payroll on or off. It is on by default.
  4. Click the info icon next to it to read How GPS data affects payroll.
  5. Click Save.
Tip: When this option is off, payroll goes back to card-only mode. The GPS Tracking module itself, with its live view and stored positions, is not affected.
What GPS changes in payroll
  • Region and route: the exact tracker position decides the region shown for each day and each drive leg. The app uses these regions for the allowance zones.
  • Night-out detection: when the tracker can locate a daily rest, GPS decides whether the truck spent that night away from your origin base. That decides the night allowance. The next topic explains the setup.
  • Distance gap-filling: on days where the card gave no distance, the tracker's daily distance feeds the pay per kilometre.
  • Country and zone: the split between national and international keeps following the countries recorded on the card. GPS never changes the country.
Tip: Card first, always. Worked time and pay come from the card. GPS only refines the location-based decisions.
Night-out check: set your origin

GPS can only decide whether a night was spent outside if your payroll settings contain an origin location and a radius greater than zero. Without them, the card decides every night.

  1. Open Settings, then Modules, then Payroll Calculation.
  2. Fill in Origin radius (km) first, so that the map can draw the circle.
  3. Next to Origin location, click Pick on map.
  4. Click the map or drag the pin to your base. The circle shows the radius.
  5. Click Use this location, then click Save.

The app then looks at each daily rest that lasted at least the Minimum daily rest (h), 9 hours unless you changed it. That field appears in the settings when the payment variant Per night outside origin is ticked. If the truck was inside your origin radius at any time during that rest, the night does not count as outside. If it stayed outside the radius, the night counts.

  • If the truck of that rest has no tracker, or the tracker sent nothing during the rest, the card decides that day.
  • On a day with tracker data but without a daily rest of at least that length, no night allowance is paid.
Read the Location column and the GPS pins

To see a payroll report, open Drivers, click a driver, click a file name and choose Payroll in the File reports window. The Location column shows the regions the truck crossed on each workday, for example Region A → Region B. A workday runs from one daily rest to the next. A day spent entirely resting shows the region where the truck stood.

  • A pin after the first region is the Workday start (departure).
  • A pin before the last region is the Break start (arrival).
  • A single pin on a rest day is the Rest location.

Hover over a pin to see its coordinates. Click it to open a map window that is titled with the pin's name. It shows the position, the date and time of that position and the coordinates.

A long route is shown as the first region, a +N button and the last region. Click +N to show all regions on this route. Click the collapse icon to fold it again.

Tip: Short crossings of a region, for example a motorway that clips a border region for a few minutes, are left out of the route. If there is no GPS data for a day, the column shows the region from the card. For 24 European countries the app names the region, for example a Spanish autonomous community or a German state. For other countries it shows the country name.
Tip: The route and its pins appear only when your payroll settings contain an origin location and radius (see the previous topic) and the truck has stored positions.
Distance gap-filling for pay per kilometre

This applies when your payroll uses the Per kilometer variant. The distance normally comes from the odometer values on the card. If the card gives no distance for a day on which the driver used a mapped truck, the GPS distance of that truck fills the gap.

  • The GPS distance is added up point by point.
  • A single jump of more than 200 km between two neighbouring points is treated as a glitch and ignored.
  • On days where the card has a distance, the card figure is always used.
GPS in the rest planning summary
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu and click a driver.
  2. Under Files, click a file name. The File reports window opens.
  3. Choose Rest planning. The Summary tab is the first tab shown.

Each driving leg shows where it started and where it ended. When a tracker position of the truck exists within about 30 minutes of the start or end, the place is named by region and comes from the tracker. Hover over its pin to read Open GPS location on map. A pin from the card reads Open map. Click a pin to see the position on a map.

A leg that crossed several regions shows them in order. Use +N to show all regions and the collapse icon to fold them. The question mark on a leg opens its details: Start, End, Work day, Driving, Other work and Km driven.

Tip: The GPS positions are applied when you open the report, on top of the saved summary. Only legs driven with a mapped truck are affected. This part needs Enable GPS tracking and a mapped truck, but not the payroll module.

Route history and location maps

Maps built from the positions recorded inside your tachograph files. They need no module and no GPS tracker.

Where these maps get their positions

Tachographs that support satellite navigation record positions and store them in driver-card files and in vehicle-unit files. Tacho Manager can draw these positions on a map. The positions come from the files you uploaded, so a map is only as recent as your last upload. If your tachograph does not record positions, the map stays empty.

Tip: For a truck with a GPS tracker (GPS Tracking module), the map can also show the tracker's positions: choose GPS tracker or Tachograph above the map. Without the module the map uses only the tachograph files, which works for every company account.
Show the route history of a driver card
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu and click a driver.
  2. Under Files, click the name of a file. You can also click Reports, which opens the options of the newest file. The File reports window opens.
  3. Choose Map history at the end of the list.

The Route history map opens. It plots the positions recorded on the driver card. The map reads the three newest files of that card.

Show the route history of a truck
  1. Open Vehicles and click the registration number of a truck.
  2. Select Map history at the top of the truck's page.
  3. You can also click the name of a vehicle-unit file under Files and choose Map history at the end of the File reports list.

The window is titled Route history followed by the registration number. It plots the places and satellite positions recorded by the vehicle unit, read from the three newest files of that truck, or the positions of its GPS tracker.

Tip: Trailers have no tachograph files, so they have no map history.
Choose the period and read the map
  • The window opens on the last 24 hours. Click Today, Last 24h, Last 7 days or Last 30 days, or set From and To (a date and a time each; the end must be after the start). A period longer than 90 days is cut back to the latest 90 days.
  • Above the map you see the distance and, with a GPS tracker, the driving time, the average and maximum speed and the number of stops. With tachograph positions you see the distance from the odometer, the number of days and the number of events.
  • GPS tracker: the line is coloured by speed (legend under the map) and a dashed grey line marks a time without signal. Every stop of 5 minutes or more has a P marker. Tachograph: each day has its own colour; click a day under the map to zoom to it. Green and red symbols mark the start and the end of the work day, a blue globe a border crossing.
  • The player under the map moves a blue arrow along the route. Drag the slider, or press play and choose the speed (from 1 min/s to 1 h/s). The buttons next to play jump to the previous or the next event, and Follow keeps the arrow in the middle of the map.
  • The Timeline lists the stops and events; click one to jump there. The list at the top right of the map switches between Streets, Light, Dark and Satellite.
  • Export GPX downloads the route as a GPX file for other mapping tools. On a computer, the button at the top right shows the map full screen. With the GPS Tracking module and a tracker connected to the truck, Stops report (PDF) lists every stop of 3 minutes or more in the period, with its position, start, end and duration.
Tip: If nothing was recorded in the period you see No GNSS positions in this period. Your newest file may be older than the period. Choose a longer period, set From and To around the dates of the file, or upload a newer file. If the map cannot load, a link to OpenStreetMap appears instead.
Location pins in the daily activity view

In an Activities report, entries that carry a position show a small pin button. Hover over it to read Open location map. Click it to open a map window with the position, its coordinates and a red marker.

The same kind of pin appears in the rest planning Summary tab. If the map cannot be shown, the window offers a link to open the position on OpenStreetMap.

Calendar

A month planner where you reserve drivers and vehicles for a range of days, add notes, and see double bookings before they happen.

What the calendar is for

The Calendar lets you plan who drives what. A reservation covers whole days, from a single day up to a year. It has a title, a colour and a note. It can be linked to a driver, to a vehicle or to both.

  • A holiday: title Holiday, one driver, no vehicle.
  • A workshop visit: title Service, one truck, no driver.
  • A tour: title Tour to Lyon, one driver and one truck, with the delivery details in the note.

The Calendar is a module for company accounts. Driver accounts do not have it and cannot open it. It comes with your plan when the plan includes it, and it can also be granted to you or bought on the Billing page; see the section 'Modules'.

Tip: A reservation is a planning entry for your own team. It does not send a message to the driver and it is not linked to transport orders in Work.
Tip: In the read-only demo you can look at the calendar but not create or change reservations. A frozen account is read-only too.
Open the calendar and switch it on or off

Click Calendar in the left menu. It sits right after Work, or after Info when Work is not shown.

If you do not see it, either your company does not have the module or you switched it off. To check, open Settings, then Modules, then Calendar.

  • If the tab shows a lock and Not active, the module is not included in your plan. Click Go to Billing to activate it.
  • If the module is active, use the switch Enabled for your company to turn it on or off. Click Open module to go to the calendar.
Tip: Turning the switch off hides the calendar. Your reservations are kept and come back when you switch it on again.
Read the month grid

The grid shows one month, six weeks high, with Monday as the first day. Days from the neighbouring months are shown faded. Today has a highlighted frame.

  • Use the arrow buttons to go to the previous or next month. Click Today to come back to the current month.
  • Each reservation is a coloured bar with its title, driver and vehicle. A reservation that runs over several weeks continues on every week row it touches.
  • Reservations that overlap in time are stacked in separate lines, so none is hidden.
  • Hover over a bar to see its title, driver, vehicle and note. Click it to open the reservation.
Create a reservation
  1. Click a day in the grid, or click New reservation at the top. The New reservation window opens. Clicking a day fills in that date. The button fills in today's date.
  2. Type a Title.
  3. Pick a Colour. The default is blue. Use different colours for different kinds of jobs.
  4. Choose a Driver, a Vehicle, or both.
  5. Set the First day and the Last day. For a single day, use the same date twice.
  6. Add a Note if you want, then click Save.
  • The Title is required and can have up to 160 characters. Save stays disabled until a title and a first day are filled in.
  • The Note can have up to 2000 characters.
  • A reservation cannot span more than a year. The Last day cannot be before the First day. If it is, saving fails with a message asking for valid start and end dates.
  • The Vehicle list contains every truck and trailer of your company, shown by registration number. A trailer can be reserved on its own or together with a truck.
Double bookings and Save anyway

When you click Save, the app checks whether the same driver or the same vehicle is already reserved on at least one of the same days. The reservation you are editing is not counted against itself.

If there is an overlap, nothing is saved yet. A warning reads Already reserved in this range: and lists the clashing reservations with their title and dates. The Save button is replaced by Save anyway.

  1. Read the list of clashing reservations.
  2. Either change the dates, the driver or the vehicle. The warning disappears and the next Save checks again.
  3. Or, if the overlap is intended, for example a handover day on which two drivers share one truck, click Save anyway.
Tip: A reservation without driver and vehicle is never checked for overlaps.
Reservations that still need a driver or vehicle

You can save a reservation with no driver and no vehicle. The window then tells you that the reservation is saved as pending assignment. On the grid the bar has a dashed outline and a question mark. In the list it carries the badge To assign.

To fill it in later, open the reservation, choose the driver or the vehicle and save again.

Edit, move or delete a reservation
  1. Click the bar on the grid, or click Open on its row in the list below the grid. The Reservation window opens.
  2. Change any field. To move the reservation, change First day and Last day.
  3. Click Save. Or click Cancel to leave without changes.

To remove a reservation, open it and click Delete. The app asks Delete this reservation? before it deletes. A deleted reservation cannot be brought back.

Tip: If a driver or a vehicle is deleted later, its reservations stay on the calendar and show a question mark instead of the name. You can still edit their dates and notes, or choose another driver or vehicle.
Filter the grid and use the list

Use the drop-down at the top right of the page to show one driver or one vehicle only. It shows Everyone until you change it, and it lists your Drivers and your Vehicles. Choose Everyone to see all reservations again. This is the quickest way to see where a particular truck or person is free.

Below the grid, the card Reservations in view lists every reservation that touches the visible weeks. It appears once there is at least one reservation to show. For each one you see the Dates, Title, Drivers, Vehicles and Note. The list follows the filter and the month you are looking at.

Fuel tickets: upload, read and confirm

Photograph or scan fuel receipts and supplier invoices, let the system read the litres, check the values and confirm them. Confirmed refuels feed the consumption figures of each truck.

Module: Fuel ticketsOpen in the app Learn more
What Fuel tickets does

Fuel tickets is an optional module for company accounts. You upload a photo or a PDF of a fuel receipt, or a supplier invoice that lists several refuels. The system reads the diesel and AdBlue litres, the date and, when it is printed, the odometer in the background. You check the values next to the image and confirm them.

Only confirmed refuels count. Together with the odometer they give every truck a consumption figure in L/100km, a six-month chart and alerts when a refuel looks unusual. Those parts are explained in the next section.

Tip: Fuel tickets comes with your plan when the plan includes it, and it can also be granted to you or bought on the Billing page; see the section 'Modules'.
Tip: In the read-only demo, uploading, editing tickets and saving settings are switched off.
Turn the module on and open it
  1. Open Settings in the left menu, then Modules, and choose the Fuel tickets tab.
  2. If the tab shows a lock and the badge Not active, the module is not in your plan. The pane Module not active explains this; press Go to Billing to activate it.
  3. Otherwise make sure the switch Enabled for your company is on.
  4. Press Open module, or use Fuel tickets in the left menu. The menu entry appears as soon as the module is on.
Tip: If you switch the module off, Fuel tickets disappears from your menu and your drivers can no longer upload tickets until you switch it on again.
Upload a ticket or an invoice
  1. Open Fuel tickets in the left menu.
  2. In the card Upload a ticket, press the field Ticket photo / invoice and choose a photo or a PDF. On a phone this field can open the camera.
  3. Choose the Type: Fuel ticket for a single receipt, or Company invoice for a supplier invoice that lists several refuels.
  4. For a fuel ticket, choose the Truck and, if you know it, type the Odometer (km).
  5. Press Upload. The message 'Uploaded — reading the ticket…' tells you the file is queued.
  • Accepted files: photos in JPEG, PNG, WebP or HEIC format, and PDF documents.
  • Maximum size: 20 MB per file.
  • From a PDF, the first eight pages are read.
  • If the identical file was uploaded before, the page answers 'This image was already uploaded (duplicate).' and the row is saved with the status Duplicate.
Tip: For a Company invoice the fields Truck and Odometer (km) are switched off. Each invoice line is assigned to a truck by the plate printed on it, and you can correct it afterwards in Review.
Tip: A single ticket is not matched to a truck automatically. Choose the Truck when you upload, or set it later in Review. The list contains trucks only, not trailers, and it leaves out trucks marked Sold/Retired. An odometer you type at upload is kept, even if the receipt shows another value.
What happens after the upload

The file is read in the background. The new row first shows the status Reading…. The list refreshes by itself every few seconds, so you can stay on the page until the status changes.

  • Reading…: the file is waiting to be read or is being read.
  • Needs review: the values were read. Check them and press Confirm.
  • Confirmed: you accepted the values. The refuel now counts toward consumption.
  • Duplicate: this ticket matches one you already have. It does not count.
  • Failed: the file could not be read.
Tip: A blurry or incomplete photo does not always end as Failed. It can also come back as Needs review with empty or wrong values. Always compare the values with the image before you press Confirm.

An invoice becomes one row per fuel line, all sharing the same PDF and all starting as Needs review. The reader is told to take only diesel and AdBlue lines and to leave out toll and road charges, fees, discounts, supplements and totals. Check the rows in Review.

Tip: If a ticket stays on Reading… for a long time, the reading service may be temporarily unavailable. The file stays queued and is read as soon as the service is back.
When a ticket shows Failed

A ticket gets Failed when the reading service could not get usable values out of the file after several attempts, for example because the PDF could not be converted. The app's own hint for a failed row is that the photo quality is too low or the data is not visible. In the Status column the row suggests: 'Retake the photo and upload again.' When you open the row with Review, a banner repeats the advice.

  1. Take a new photo in good light, with the ticket flat and all the text readable, and upload it again.
  2. Or press Review on the failed row, type the values from the image yourself and press Confirm.
Tip: You cannot upload the same file again: an identical file is recognised and gets the status Duplicate without being read. Take a new photo instead.
Check and correct a ticket
  1. In the card Tickets, press the chip of a truck, then press Review on a row.
  2. The photo or PDF is shown on the left. On the right you see who uploaded it (Uploaded by:) and the values: Diesel (L), AdBlue (L), Odometer, Truck and Date (date and time).
  3. Compare the values with the image and correct what is wrong. You can also choose a different Truck.
  4. Press Confirm to accept the ticket. Press Save to keep your changes without confirming. Press Delete to remove the ticket; you are asked 'Delete this ticket?'.
Tip: Only Confirm makes a ticket count toward consumption. Save keeps your edits but leaves the status as it is. You can reopen a confirmed ticket later and correct it.
Tip: After each save the system fills in a missing odometer where it can and checks again for duplicates.
Important: Deleting a ticket cannot be undone. It removes only that one row; the other lines of the same invoice stay.
Find and read your tickets

The card Tickets shows one chip per truck, with the number of tickets on it. Tickets without a truck are under No truck assigned. Press a chip to see that truck's tickets; press it again to hide them. Until you press a chip the card says 'Select a truck above to see its tickets.' Before the first upload it says 'No tickets yet.'

The table has the columns Date, Diesel, AdBlue, Odometer, Uploaded by, Status and Actions.

  • A small magic-wand icon next to an odometer means the value was estimated (Odometer estimated).
  • A coloured percentage next to the date means this refuel is part of a stretch flagged in Consumption alerts.
  • Uploaded by shows the driver's name for tickets uploaded by a driver, Company for tickets you uploaded and Company (invoice) for invoice lines.
Tip: If the plate printed on an invoice line matches none of your trucks, the line is listed under that plate but is not linked to a truck, so it does not count. Add the truck under Vehicles if it is missing, then choose it in Review.
Tip: The list shows the 800 most recent tickets.
Missing odometers are estimated

Consumption needs an odometer reading for every refuel, but receipts often do not show one. When a refuel has a date and a truck but no odometer, the system estimates it:

  • First from the odometer readings stored in the driver-card files you uploaded for that truck's plate, around the time of the refuel.
  • If the card files do not cover it, by interpolating between the truck's other refuels that have a real odometer. At least two such refuels are needed.

An estimate is made when a ticket is read or saved. Card files that you upload later do not change an estimate that already exists. To have it recalculated, open the ticket in Review, clear the Odometer field and press Save. The ticket needs a truck and a date for this.

Estimated values carry the magic-wand icon, and alerts that rest on them say 'estimated odometer'. The estimate can only use card files that are uploaded to your account.

Duplicates

A ticket is marked Duplicate in two situations. First, when you upload a file that is identical to one already uploaded. Second, after reading or editing: if two tickets of the same truck are on the same day and have almost the same diesel litres (a difference of up to 0.6 L), the one that was uploaded later is marked Duplicate and the earlier one stays.

This catches a driver's receipt and the supplier invoice that list the same refuel. Two lines of the same invoice are never marked as duplicates of each other. The check runs again each time a ticket is read, saved or confirmed, so a matching ticket that was uploaded later turns into Duplicate again even after you press Confirm.

Tip: A Duplicate does not count toward consumption. If the match is wrong, correct the date, truck or litres in Review and press Confirm: Save alone does not change the status.
Let your drivers upload their own tickets
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu and click the driver.
  2. Press Edit.
  3. Switch on Fuel tickets access. The switch is explained as 'Lets this driver upload and see fuel tickets from their own account.' It appears only when Fuel tickets is active for your company.
  4. Press Save.

The driver needs a driver account linked to your company (see the section 'Linking drivers to your company'). Fuel tickets then appears in the driver's menu.

Tickets uploaded by a driver are stored in your company account, never in the driver's own. They appear in your Tickets card like your own, and you review and confirm them. The driver only sees their own tickets, read-only, and never sees consumption figures.

Fuel consumption, alerts and settings

How the L/100km figures, the six-month chart and the Consumption alerts are built from confirmed tickets, and how to tune the calculation under Modules.

Module: Fuel ticketsOpen in the app Learn more
What a truck needs to get a figure

Consumption is calculated per truck from confirmed tickets only. A ticket is used when it is Confirmed, is linked to a truck, has an odometer and has a diesel quantity above zero.

Two refuels form one stretch: the kilometres between the two odometer readings, and the litres added at the later refuel (the fuel you put in is the fuel you just burned). A truck therefore needs at least two usable refuels before it shows a number.

The kilometres driven after the newest refuel are never counted, because no litres cover them yet. Refuels are put in order of their odometer readings, not of their dates. A stretch is skipped when both refuels show the same odometer reading or when the distance between them is too long to be believable.

Tip: Because of this order, one mistyped odometer can distort the stretches next to it. If a figure looks wrong, check the Odometer of the neighbouring tickets in Review.
Consumption per truck

Below the upload card, every truck with data has a tile. It shows the plate, the figure in L/100km (a dash if there is none) and a line with the number of fills, the total kilometres and the total litres behind the figure.

A coloured badge with a percentage appears when the truck's latest refuel departs from its usual figure by more than your warning level, provided the truck has at least four judged stretches: yellow for a warning, red for severe. The arrow points up when the truck used more than usual and down when it used less. Hover over the badge to see the latest figure against the usual one.

Consumption also shows in Vehicles. While the module is on, the truck list has a Consumption column in place of the country, and a truck's page shows Consumption and AdBlue consumption. The AdBlue figure shows the AdBlue litres confirmed between the truck's first and last diesel refuel, per 100 km driven.

The evolution chart

The chart Consumption evolution (last 6 months) draws one line per truck with its L/100km for each calendar month, the current month included. Every point shows its value; hover over a point to see the plate, the month and the value. With four trucks or fewer the plates are written at the end of the lines. Up to eight trucks are drawn, and a '+' count tells you how many more exist.

A line under the chart tells you which method is in use and which guards apply, for example 'months under 500 km hidden' or '3-month rolling average'. A month with too few kilometres is left empty instead of drawn as a spike.

With the recommended method, a stretch between two refuels is shared between the months it covers, in proportion to time. With the strict method the whole stretch counts in the month of the closing refuel.

Consumption alerts

The card Consumption alerts appears when at least one refuel departs from the truck's own usual figure. The reference is that truck's typical consumption, so a thirsty truck is flagged only when it changes. The badge in the card header shows how many alerts there are and how many of them are severe.

Each row shows the deviation (red when severe, yellow for a warning), the plate, the period from the previous refuel to the closing one, the kind of alert, the figure against the usual one, the kilometres and the litres. Short refuels that were combined to cover enough distance are noted as 'refuels combined'. Press Review to open the closing ticket.

  • Higher than usual: check for fuel theft, a leak, heavy loads, long idling or a mistyped odometer.
  • Lower than usual: a top-up looks exactly like this until the next full tank balances it. If it never does, check the litres and the odometer on this ticket.
  • Possible refuel with no ticket: the truck covered an unusually long distance on these litres, so a refuel in between was probably never uploaded. The gap is left out of the averages.
  • Not in the average: this figure is kept out of the truck's average and chart, because a missing ticket or a loss is not consumption.
  • Provisional: the newest refuel reads lean, most likely a top-up. The next full tank will settle it.

The six newest alerts are shown first; press Show all to see the rest and Show less to fold them again. Alerts cover the last 12 months and the list holds at most 60 entries.

Tip: A truck needs at least four judged stretches before it can be flagged. Alerts never judge a stretch shorter than the setting Ignore refuel gaps shorter than, and never one shorter than 50 km.
Top-ups and full tanks are balanced

Drivers do not always fill the tank to the brim. A top-up looks like a drop in consumption and the full tank that follows looks like a spike, although the truck burned fuel evenly. The system matches a run of small refuels with the full tank that follows and judges the combined figure instead.

The note at the bottom of Consumption alerts tells you how many apparent deviations were explained this way, so nothing is hidden silently.

What no later refuel repays stays visible: it is reported as a drop or, when the distance is unusually long, as a possible refuel with no ticket. Fuel that was bought is always counted; a surplus is reported, never excluded.

Tip: Balancing needs history. With fewer than three stretches there is nothing to balance against.
Calculation settings

Open Settings in the left menu, then Modules, and choose the Fuel tickets tab. While the module is on, the card Consumption calculation sits below the switch. It describes how L/100km is computed for your fleet and when a sudden change is flagged. The settings apply to the whole fleet.

  • Method: Aggregate over the period (recommended) or Strict tank-to-tank. See the next topic.
  • Chart smoothing: None — monthly value, or a 2-, 3- or 6-month rolling average.
  • Ignore refuel gaps shorter than: a distance in km. It applies to the strict method and always to the alerts. Starting value: 150 km. You can enter 0 to 2000.
  • Hide chart months with fewer than: a distance in km. A month with barely any kilometres produces a wild value, so it is left empty. Starting value: 500 km. You can enter up to 20000.
  • Ignore the newest refuel of each truck: a switch, off to begin with. The kilometres after the last refuel are never counted anyway. Switching this on also leaves out the last refuel itself, so the newest figure stops moving while the month is still running.
  • Flag sudden consumption changes: a switch, on to begin with. Turn it off to hide Consumption alerts; the tiles and the chart stay.
  • Flag from a deviation of: a percentage. Starting value: 12 %. You can enter 3 to 200.
  • Severe from: a percentage. Starting value: 25 %. You can enter 5 to 300, and it is never lower than the warning level.
  1. Change the values you want.
  2. Press Save. The message 'Calculation settings saved.' appears.
  3. Check the card: it shows the values that were actually stored. A value outside the allowed range is adjusted.
Tip: Every figure is recalculated after you save. The two percentage fields are greyed out while Flag sudden consumption changes is off.
Aggregate or strict: which method to choose
  • Aggregate over the period (recommended): litres and kilometres are added up over the whole period, and a stretch that crosses a month end is shared between both months. A partial fill is compensated by the next one, so the figure stays steady even when drivers do not always fill the tank.
  • Strict tank-to-tank: every refuel is judged on its own, with the litres added covering the distance since the previous refuel. This is the sharpest per-refuel picture, but partial fills create spikes. Refuels that are closer together than Ignore refuel gaps shorter than are therefore combined until they cover enough distance.

The alerts always judge refuels one by one, whichever method you choose for the headline figure.

Tip: If you are unsure, keep the recommended method.
Tips for reliable figures
  • Upload and confirm every ticket and invoice. A missing ticket shows up as Possible refuel with no ticket.
  • Make sure each ticket is linked to the right truck and has an odometer. Type the real odometer in Review when you know it.
  • Confirm tickets promptly: tickets in Needs review do not count.
  • Upload driver-card files regularly, so missing odometers can be estimated from them.
  • If the newest figure of a truck keeps moving during the month, switch on Ignore the newest refuel of each truck.
  • Check odometers that look out of place: refuels are ordered by odometer, so one wrong value disturbs its neighbours.

Time Registry (registro de jornada)

Builds the monthly working-time registry used in Spain from a driver's tachograph card, with a PDF ready to sign. For each driver and month it lists every shift with start, end, driving, other work, breaks and effective total.

Module: Time registryOpen in the app Learn more
What Time Registry is

Time Registry (Fichaje) is an optional module. It builds the monthly working-time registry that Spanish rules require (in Spanish: registro de jornada) from the activities recorded on a driver card. Nobody types hours; the times come from the card.

For a driver and a month you get an on-screen table and a PDF. The PDF carries the company and worker details, one line per day, the month totals and signature lines for the company and the worker.

Tip: The registry contains only what the tachograph card recorded. Work done away from the vehicle, such as loading, waiting or paperwork, may need a complementary record. The page and the PDF both say so.
Turn the module on and open it
  1. Open Settings in the left menu, then Modules, and choose the tab Time Registry (Fichaje).
  2. If the tab shows a lock and the badge Not active, press Go to Billing to activate the module.
  3. Otherwise make sure the switch Enabled for your company is on.
  4. Press Open module, or use Time Registry in the left menu.
Tip: Time Registry comes with your plan when the plan includes it, and it can also be granted to you or bought on the Billing page. If you switch the module off, Time Registry disappears from your menu and from your drivers' menus.
Before you create the first registry

A complete registry needs three things: an employer company assigned to the driver, the driver's legal identity, and card data for the month.

  1. Add the employer company. Open Profile in the left menu and use the card Company data on the Profile tab (see the section 'Company data and employer profiles').
  2. Open Drivers in the left menu, click the driver and press Edit.
  3. Choose the employer under Company (Time Registry).
  4. Fill in DNI / NIF and Social Security number. They are printed on the PDF. The PDF you create uses the details saved in this driver record, so enter them here.
  5. If the driver joined your company later, set Working with company since. The registry ignores all card data before this date, and so does Payroll. Leave it empty for no limit.
  6. Press Save.
Tip: These fields appear in the driver's edit window when Time Registry is active for your company. Working with company since also appears when Payroll is.
Create a registry and download the PDF
  1. Open Time Registry in the left menu.
  2. Choose the Driver (the first entry reads Choose a driver…). The list appears when you have more than one driver; with a single driver it is selected for you.
  3. Choose the Month and the Year. The year list covers the current year and the five years before it.
  4. Wait for 'Calculating the registry…'. The table appears.
  5. Check the company and worker block and the table.
  6. Press Download PDF.

Until you choose a driver the page says 'Select a driver and a month to view the registry.'

Tip: Download PDF is greyed out until a driver is chosen, the month has card activity and an employer company is assigned to the driver.
Tip: In the public demo the page opens on December 2025, the month that has data.
Read the on-screen table

At the top, the left block shows the Company with its CIF / NIF and Workplace. The right block shows the Worker with the DNI / NIF and the Social Security no. A missing value shows as a dash.

  • Date: day and month, with the weekday.
  • Start and End: the real first and last time of the shift. A small +1 after the end means the shift finished the next day.
  • Driving, Other work and Breaks: hours and minutes.
  • Effective total: driving plus other work.

Only days with a shift are listed. The last row, MONTH TOTAL with the number of days worked in brackets, gives the totals. Under the table a legal note repeats the rules and reminds you to keep the registry for 4 years (Art. 34.9 of the Workers' Statute).

Other messages can appear. No company assigned to this driver shows when the driver has no employer company. Some legal data is missing shows, once a company is assigned, when the driver's DNI / NIF or Social Security number is empty. 'No card activity for this month.' shows instead of the table when the month has no shifts.

How the hours are calculated
  • One row is one shift, not one calendar day. Activities belong to the same shift until the driver has a rest of nine hours or more.
  • A shift appears on the day it starts. A night shift that ends the next day is a single row with its real end time and a +1. The next calendar day counts as rest unless another shift starts on it.
  • If two shifts start on the same day, you get two rows, and the day counts once in the days worked.
  • Effective total = driving + other work.
  • Availability can stretch the start and end of a shift, but it is not added to the effective total and it is not shown as a column.
  • Breaks are the gaps inside a shift that are shorter than nine hours.
  • Overlapping recordings are merged, so a period is never counted twice.
  • Times and the month limits follow the Report timezone set in your Profile.
Which card file is used

Each registry is built from one card file. For a month that is already over, it uses the first file dated after the month ended, because that file holds the complete month. If no file is dated after the month ended, which is always the case for the current month, it uses the most recent file. In the current month, days that have not happened yet stay blank in the PDF.

Tip: To get a complete closed month, upload a card download made after the month ended. A driver card keeps only a limited history, so download and upload card files regularly.
Tip: If the page says 'No card activity for this month.', check that card files covering that month are uploaded for this driver.
The PDF: contents, language and file name
  • A single A4 landscape document for one driver and one month.
  • It is always in Spanish, with the title 'Registro de jornada laboral', whatever your app language. The page on screen follows your app language.
  • At the top: the period, a box 'Empresa' (name, CIF / NIF, centro de trabajo) and a box 'Trabajador' (name, DNI / NIF, Social Security affiliation number and driver card number).
  • A table with one line per calendar day (a day with two shifts gets two lines): date, weekday, start, end, driving, other work, breaks and effective total. Weekends are shaded, rest days read 'Descanso / sin actividad', days still to come are blank, and the last line gives 'TOTAL MES' with the days worked.
  • A legal note citing Art. 34.9 of the Workers' Statute and Art. 8 of RD 1561/1995, and signature lines 'Firma de la empresa' and 'Firma del trabajador'.
  • The file is named fichaje_, then the driver's card number, then _YYYY-MM.pdf. For December 2025 the name ends in _2025-12.pdf.
Tip: Missing details print as a dash on the PDF; the download is not blocked. Complete the company and the driver details first, then print the PDF and have the company and the worker sign it.
Let drivers see their own registry
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu, click the driver and press Edit.
  2. Switch on Time registry access. It is explained as 'Let this driver view and download their own time registry (Fichaje Horario) from their account.'
  3. Press Save.

The driver needs a driver account linked to your company (see the section 'Linking drivers to your company'). Time Registry then appears in the driver's menu, and the driver sees a table built from the card files in the driver's own account.

Tip: On the driver's own page, Download PDF needs an employer company recorded in the driver's own account, and a driver account has no setting for it. If you need the signed registry for a linked driver, create it on your own Time Registry page, using the DNI / NIF and Social Security number saved in your driver record.
If something is missing or greyed out
  • Download PDF is grey: no driver is chosen, the month shows 'No card activity for this month.', or the page shows No company assigned to this driver.
  • No company assigned to this driver: add a company under Profile (card Company data), then assign it in the driver's edit window under Company (Time Registry). For company accounts the message links to Drivers and to the Account page.
  • Some legal data is missing: edit the driver and fill in DNI / NIF and Social Security number. The message only appears once a company is assigned.
  • Fewer days than expected: check Working with company since in the driver's edit window, and check which card files are uploaded. For a closed month the file downloaded after the month ended is used.
  • An error that starts with 'Could not load the registry.': choose the driver and month again; if it persists, check the card file.

Modules

Modules are optional add-ons to your account. The Modules page shows which ones your company has, lets you switch them on or off and opens their settings.

Which modules exist and how you get access

Tacho Manager has six add-on modules: Payroll Calculation, Time Registry (Fichaje), GPS Tracking, Fuel tickets, Work and Calendar. A seventh module, DeCA, is free for every company and has its own section in this guide.

Your company has a module in one of these ways:

  • Older accounts that are still in their free trial have every module until the trial ends.
  • Your subscription plan includes the module.
  • The platform administrator granted the module to your account. A grant can have an end date.
  • You bought the module for a period on the Billing page.
Tip: The public demo account shows every module, but it is read-only. You cannot change anything in it.
Open the Modules page
  1. Open Settings in the left menu. The group expands.
  2. Select Modules.
  3. Select the tab of the module you want. There is one tab per module.

A module your company does not have shows a lock icon and the badge Not active on its tab. The tab itself says Module not active and explains that the module is not included in your current plan. Select Go to Billing to get it.

Tip: The Modules page is only for company accounts. Driver accounts do not have it.
Switch a module on or off for your company

For Time Registry (Fichaje), Fuel tickets, Work and Calendar you can switch the module off for your own company even though you have access to it.

  1. Open Modules and select the tab of the module.
  2. Turn the switch Enabled for your company on or off.
  3. While the module is on, select Open module to go straight to its page.
  • Switched off: the module disappears from your left menu. The tab then tells you that you turned the module off.
  • Linked drivers lose their own menu entry for that module while it is off, where the module has one for drivers.
  • Nothing you entered is deleted. Turn the switch back on and the module works again.
Tip: The switch is locked in the read-only demo. It also cannot be changed while your account is frozen, see the billing section.
Settings you find on the Modules page

Some modules keep their own settings on their tab:

  • Payroll Calculation: the payroll settings, including the switch Enable payroll calculation module. The Payroll section of this guide explains them.
  • GPS Tracking: the box GPS providers with the switch Enable GPS tracking, and the list Devices where each device is matched to a truck in the column Mapped truck.
  • Fuel tickets: the on and off switch and, while the module is on, the fuel consumption settings.
  • Time Registry (Fichaje), Work and Calendar: only the on and off switch and the Open module button.
Get a module your company does not have
  1. Open Settings, then Billing, and select the tab Modules.
  2. Each module has its own card with a short description and a status badge: Active, Request pending or Inactive. An active module also says why, for example Included in your plan, Paid until a date, Activated for you by TachoManager or Included during your trial.
  3. If the card shows a price, a Billing period list and the button Buy, pick a period and select Buy. You pay on the secure payment page of Stripe and return to the Billing page.
  4. If the button Request access is shown instead, select it. The platform administrator reviews your request and the status changes to Request pending.
Tip: When you come back from Stripe, the Billing page confirms the payment with Stripe and the module becomes Active straight away, with the message Module activated. Thank you! If your payment method needs more time, for example a bank payment, the page says that the payment is still being processed. The module then activates by itself as soon as the payment is confirmed, so do not pay again.
Tip: Modules that your plan includes show Included in your plan and are not sold separately. A module that needs a plan first shows its price and the button See plans, which opens the plans tab.
Buy or request: which button you see
  • Buy with a period list: online payments work, the module has a price and your account has an active plan. A free plan counts as a plan.
  • The text You need an active subscription plan to buy modules, with the button See plans: the module has a price but your account has no active plan yet. Activate a plan first.
  • Request access: you cannot buy the module online, for example because it has no price set or online payments are not available.
  • No button: the module is already Active, or your request is Request pending. Sending a second request for the same module is refused.

The periods you can pick are 1, 3, 6 and 12 months. The card shows the starting price per month, and the list shows the total price of each period and, when a discount is set for it, the percentage you save.

Important: A module you bought stops at the end of the period you paid for, and the app does not renew it by itself. Its card shows Paid until with the end date and no Buy button while it is Active, so buy it again after it has ended.
Warning before a module ends

In the last 7 days before a module ends, a yellow notice appears at the top of every page: Access to the module ends in a number of days, on a date. This notice covers modules the platform administrator gave you with an end date.

Tip: The trial notice of older accounts and the frozen-account notice are explained in the billing section.

Subscription, trial and billing

Your plan sets how many drivers and vehicles you can have and which modules come with it. New company accounts start on the free plan. You choose and pay for a larger plan on the Billing page.

Where to find your subscription
  1. Open Settings in the left menu.
  2. Select Billing.
  3. Use the tabs: Subscriptions shows your current plan and the plans you can choose, Modules lets you buy or request add-on modules.
Tip: Billing is not shown in the read-only demo. You also cannot pay or open the payment portal while a platform administrator is acting as your account.
The free plan for new accounts

Every new company account starts on the free plan. It covers up to 2 drivers and 1 vehicle, includes the modules listed on its card and DeCA, and has no end date.

  • You do not need to do anything. The free plan is active as soon as the account is activated, after you confirm your email.
  • Driver accounts are always free.
  • When you choose a paid plan, it replaces the free plan and raises your driver and vehicle limits.
  • Accounts registered earlier with a 30-day trial keep it until its end date.

For those older trial accounts, in the last 7 days a blue notice appears at the top of every page: Your free trial ends in a number of days, on a date. After that only the modules included in your plan stay available. It has a Go to Billing button.

Important: Plans, prices and limits can change, but any change is announced on the Billing page at least 30 days before it takes effect.
Read the Current plan card
  • Plan: the name of your plan and its status.
  • Price: Free, or the price together with the period it covers.
  • Included drivers and Included vehicles: how many your plan allows. Vehicles are shown only when the plan includes some.
  • Renews / expires: the date your plan ends, or No end date.

If you have no plan, the card tells you that you have no active subscription and asks you to choose one below.

Tip: Payments are one-off. The date under Renews / expires is the end of the period you paid for.
Choose and pay for a plan

Under Available plans you see the plans for company accounts. Each card shows the number of drivers and vehicles the plan allows and, under Includes, the modules that come with it.

  1. Open Settings, then Billing, and stay on the tab Subscriptions.
  2. Find the plan you want. For a paid plan pick a period in Billing period. The list offers 1, 3, 6 and 12 months with the total price, and the percentage you save where the plan has a discount. Below the list you see the price for that period and, for longer periods, what it comes to per month.
  3. Select Subscribe. You are taken to the secure payment page of Stripe.
  4. Pay. You return to the Billing page, which confirms the payment with Stripe and shows Subscription updated. Thank you! If you leave the payment page without paying, it shows Checkout cancelled. No changes were made.

A free plan has an Activate button instead. It starts at once and needs no payment.

Tip: Each payment buys one period only. The app does not charge you again by itself. The topic 'Renew or change your plan' explains how to continue when the period ends.
When a plan button is disabled
  • The card warns that your account currently exceeds the limits of that plan: you have more drivers or vehicles than the plan allows. Remove some or choose a larger plan.
  • The button reads Current plan: this is the free plan you already have. A paid plan you already have shows Renew instead.
  • A yellow notice says that online payments are not available. Paid plans cannot be bought then, so contact support to change your plan. Free plans can still be activated.

The limits also apply while you work. If you add more drivers than your plan allows, the app refuses with the message 'Driver limit reached for this account', followed by the allowed number. For vehicles the message is 'Vehicle limit reached.'

Renew or change your plan
  • While a paid plan is running, its own card shows the button Renew. Renewing early adds the new period after your current end date, so you do not lose any paid days. A free plan shows Current plan instead, which cannot be selected.
  • A card that shows Switching now restarts your billing period. starts the new plan as soon as the payment is confirmed. The new period is counted from today, so the time left on your current plan is not added.
  • A card without that warning keeps your remaining time. The new plan replaces the old one as soon as the payment is confirmed, and its period is counted from the end date of your current plan.
  • Plans that are a step down from your current plan are hidden. They appear again in the last 14 days of your current period.
Tip: Check the end date under Renews / expires and set the reminder Subscription expiry, so that the end of a paid plan does not catch you by surprise.
Manage your payment details

After your first payment, a button Manage billing appears on the Current plan card, next to the text Invoices, payment methods and billing details (Stripe). It opens the secure customer page of Stripe, where you see your invoices and manage your payment methods and billing details, and it brings you back to the Billing page when you are done.

Tip: The button is missing when online payments are not available or when your account has never paid.
What happens when a plan ends

When the end date passes, the plan stops. If it was a paid plan and nothing replaces it, your account is frozen. Nothing in this process deletes your account or your files.

  • A yellow notice at the top says your account is frozen and the app is read-only until you renew.
  • You can still sign in and open your drivers, vehicles and reports. You can still download single files.
  • You cannot change data. Uploads, adding, editing or deleting drivers and vehicles, saving reminders, renewing the invitation code, removing a driver link, changing module switches, and changes to orders, DeCA and eCMR documents, fuel tickets and calendar entries stop with the message 'Your account is frozen. Renew your subscription to make changes.'
  • The Global ZIP download on the Tools page is switched off while the account is frozen.
  • Billing, module requests and account deletion stay available, so you can still renew.
  • Modules that came with the plan close. Modules you bought for a period, or that were granted to you with a later end date, keep working until their own end date.
  1. Open Settings and select Billing.
  2. Choose a plan and pay, or activate a free plan.
  3. When the payment is confirmed, the account is no longer frozen.
Tip: A platform administrator can also freeze an account by hand. Paying does not lift that kind of freeze, so contact support.
Notices and reminders about your plan

The app warns you in several places: a blue notice in the last 7 days of a free trial (older accounts), a yellow notice before a granted module ends, and a yellow notice when the account is frozen.

The reminder Subscription expiry warns you in the bell before your plan ends and, after the end date, asks you to renew. Switch it on and set Days before under Settings, then Reminders; see the section 'Reminders'.

Trip notes of linked drivers

Drivers write trip notes in their own driver account. When a driver shares them with your company, you can read them on the driver's page.

What trip notes are and who sees them

Trip notes are short text notes that a driver writes in a driver account, optionally with the place where the note was written. Company accounts do not write trip notes and have no Trip Notes menu entry.

A driver's notes are private. You see them only for drivers who are linked to you through a driver account, and only when the driver has switched on Share trip notes for your company.

Tip: Notes are read-only for you. You cannot add, change or delete a driver's notes.
Read a driver's trip notes
  1. Open Drivers in the left menu.
  2. Open the linked driver. Linked drivers carry the badges Shared and Linked next to their name.
  3. Scroll to the bottom of the page. The card Trip notes shows the five newest notes with date and time.
  4. Select View all to see every note, 30 per page. Select Show less to fold the list again.
  5. Select a note to read it in full. If the driver attached a location, you see its coordinates, the link Open in map and the button Show map.

Dates and times are shown in your report timezone. You can change it on the Profile page in the field Report timezone.

If you do not see the Trip notes card
  • The driver is not linked through a driver account. A driver you added yourself has no trip notes.
  • The driver has not switched on Share trip notes for your company.
  • The driver has not written any note yet. The card stays hidden until there is at least one.
  • The link was removed and the badge reads Unlinked. The notes are no longer shown.

Sharing is checked every time you open the card. When a driver switches sharing off, the notes disappear from your view at once.

Linked drivers and who sees what

Your data stays in your company account. Data moves between a driver account and your company only when the driver links to you with your invitation code.

How data is kept apart

Every company account is a separate space. Your drivers, vehicles, files and settings belong to your account only. Another company cannot open them and you cannot open theirs.

A driver can have a driver account of their own. Data moves between that account and your company only when the driver links to your company with your invitation code. Until then you see nothing of that driver. The invitation code, the access switches per driver and the end of a link are described in the sections 'Linking drivers to your company' and 'Drivers'.

What a linked driver shares with you
  • The driver's details held in the driver account: name, card number, birth date, driving licence number, card expiry date, card generation and the date of the last download. They are refreshed whenever the driver uploads a file.
  • All card files already in the driver account are copied to your account when the link is made. Every file the driver uploads afterwards is copied to you too.
  • The driver's documents from the driver's Documents page: name, expiry date, extra information and the front and back photos.
  • Reports: you build them from the copied files, like for any other driver. You can view reports, download files and upload new files for the driver while the link is active.

Your copy of the driver belongs to the driver account. You control your own options for the driver, such as the upload reminder and the access switches, and you can delete your copy.

The file format of the copies is yours to choose under Settings, then Other Settings, in the card Linked driver file format (see the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)').

Tip: The driver's trip notes are not part of this. You see them only when the driver switches on Share trip notes.
Support access by the platform administrator

To help with a problem, a platform administrator can open a support session in your account. The administrator then works with the same screens and data as the main user of the account.

  • A support session ends by itself after one hour.
  • Each support session is recorded.
  • During a support session, deleting the account, paying for plans or modules and opening the payment portal are blocked.

Pages (legal and information)

The group Pages at the bottom of the left menu lists the information pages published for your account type, for example a privacy policy or a cookie policy.

What the Pages group is

The platform administrator can publish pages with legal or company information, for example a privacy policy, a cookie policy or a legal notice. Every published page you may open is listed under Pages in the left menu, with its title as the menu entry. The same pages are also linked in a row at the bottom of the page.

Right under the pages the left menu always has the entry Help. It opens the Help centre inside the app, even when no page is published.

Tip: Which pages exist depends on what the administrator published. If no page is published for your account type, the heading Pages does not appear.
Open a page
  1. Scroll down the left menu to the group Pages.
  2. Select the title of the page.
  3. Read the page. It opens inside the app, so you stay signed in and keep the left menu.
Who can open which page

The administrator decides for each page whether it is visible to everybody, to company accounts, to driver accounts, or to a mix of them.

  • When you are signed in, you see the pages that are public or meant for your account type.
  • A page marked public can be read without signing in.
  • A page you may not open, or that is not published, shows the message Page not found.

Account data and deletion

How to take a copy of your files, delete single items, switch the account type, and delete the whole company account including all its data.

Download your files before you delete anything

Before you delete anything, take a copy of your files with Global ZIP download on Tools. It is described in the section 'Tools: ZIP download, converter, bulk upload, trip calculator'.

Tip: The ZIP holds the drivers and vehicles of your own account. Drivers that are linked to a driver account are not included: download their files with Download all on the driver's page. The download is not available in the read-only demo or while your account is frozen.
Delete a driver, a vehicle or a single file
  • A driver: select Delete on the driver's page. The app asks: Delete this driver and all of its files? This cannot be undone.
  • A vehicle: select Delete on the vehicle's page. The app asks you to confirm that this removes the vehicle and its uploaded files and cannot be undone.
  • A single file: select the bin button in the file list and confirm. This cannot be undone.
Tip: You can delete one driver and one vehicle per day. The app tells you with 'Only one driver can be deleted per day' or 'Daily vehicle delete limit reached'. A frozen account cannot delete anything.
Delete the whole company account
  1. Open Profile at the bottom of the left menu. On the tab Profile, check that the field Recovery email is filled in, and select Save if you changed it.
  2. Open the tab Security.
  3. In the card Delete account, select Request account deletion and confirm the question.
  4. Open your mailbox. The recovery address receives an email with a confirmation link. The link works for 60 minutes.
  5. Open the link. The deletion starts as soon as the page opens, and the page then confirms that the account was deleted.
  • Only the primary account administrator can request the deletion. Other users of the account see that only the primary administrator can do it.
  • Without a recovery email the card tells you to add one first, because the link is sent there.
  • The deletion is not possible in the read-only demo, and not during a support session of a platform administrator.
Important: Opening the link from the email carries out the deletion at once, without a further question. Do not open or forward the link unless you are sure. If you did not ask for it, ignore the email: nothing is deleted until the link is opened.
What the deletion removes

The deletion is permanent and cannot be undone. It removes:

  • All drivers and vehicles of the account together with all uploaded files.
  • All settings and all user logins of the account.
  • Work orders, eCMR and DeCA documents, fuel tickets, payroll data, GPS data and calendar entries.
  • Subscription records, module requests and module grants.
  • The links to your drivers. The driver accounts stay and keep their own data.
Important: Download everything you must keep before you start, for example with Global ZIP download.
Switch the account to a driver account

A company account can be switched into a driver account with the card Switch account type on Profile. The steps, the conditions and what the switch removes are described in the section 'Password and account type'.

If you cannot sign in any more

The public website has a page Account deletion request. It helps you prepare a written request for the deletion of your account and the related data. Fill in the form, then select Open email request or Copy request text and send the request to your privacy or support contact. Use it only when you cannot use the verified deletion described above.

Frequently asked questions

Account & getting started

Is there a free trial, and what does the free plan include?

There is no trial: a new company account starts on the free plan, which covers 2 drivers and 1 vehicle and has no end date. The modules it includes are listed on its card on the Billing page; the others can be bought there, and DeCA is free for every company. Driver accounts are always free. For more drivers or vehicles you choose a paid plan under Settings, then Billing. A paid plan that ends and is not replaced makes the account read-only until you renew.

The verification email did not arrive, or I confirmed it and the app still shows Demo mode. What now?

Check the spam folder and make sure the recovery email was typed correctly. The link is valid for 24 hours and your username and email stay reserved until then, so if you mistyped the email, register again with the correct email and another username. Clicking the link activates the account but does not sign you in: press Login and sign in with your username and password.

I cannot sign in. Can I use my email address, and what if I forgot my password?

Sign in with your username and password, not with your email address. If you forgot the password, press Forgot password? on the sign-in page, type your recovery email and press Send reset link. The link in the email works once and for 60 minutes.

How do I replay the quick tutorial or find help inside the app?

Press Help in the left menu, right under the Pages group. The Help centre opens inside the app, with a search box, the Company account and Driver account guides and these questions. Press Start the quick tutorial at the top or bottom of the page to replay the six-step tour that opens by itself on a newly registered account.

How do I add a driver who has no driver account?

Open Drivers, press Add driver, enter the Driver name and Card number and press Save. You can also pick a card file under Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill to read the name and card number from it. Then open the driver and upload the driver's card files.

Files & uploads

Which tachograph files can I upload?

Files with the extension .ddd or .tgd, up to 50 MB each: driver-card files go on a driver's page and vehicle-unit files on the truck's page. ZIP and other archives are refused. To load many files at once use Bulk upload on Tools, which matches each file to your drivers and trucks by itself.

Why was my file refused, for example with 'Upload discarded'?

A file must belong to the page you upload on, so open the right driver or truck and upload it there. 'Upload discarded' means the card number in the file, the card number in the file name or the driving licence number does not match that driver, or for a truck the registration does not match. A file is also refused when it is an archive, empty or larger than 50 MB, or when your account is frozen. For a renewed card of the same person the licence number must match the one stored for the driver.

I uploaded several files for a driver but only one remains for that week. Why?

By default the app keeps one driver-card file for each calendar week, the one with the newest download date, and deletes the others automatically. Truck files are not replaced this way. If you want a copy of an older file, download it before you upload a newer one from the same week.

How often should I upload files?

The app reminds you when a driver's newest file is older than 28 days or a truck's newest file is older than 90 days. You choose how early each reminder starts on the Reminders page, in the cards Driver upload and Vehicle upload. To stop reminders for a driver who left, edit the driver and switch on Disable upload reminder; for a truck tick Disable upload reminders for this vehicle.

How do I download a copy of all my files?

Open Tools, find Global ZIP download, check the From and To dates and press Download ZIP; you can also tick Include DeCA documents and Include eCMR documents. For one driver or one truck use Download all on its page; drivers that are linked to a driver account are not part of the Global ZIP, so download their files that way. The ZIP is not available in the read-only demo or while the account is frozen, so download before a plan ends.

Reports & rest rules

Why is the Reports button greyed out, or why does a report look empty?

A driver needs at least one uploaded file before Reports is available, and every report only knows the file you opened. Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today, so findings in an older file stay hidden until you choose a longer period such as All, and Activities opens on the last 14 days. The Speed report reads vehicle-unit files, because a driver card does not store detailed speed, so it stays empty until the files of the trucks used are uploaded.

Why does a driver row on Info say 'New upload — will be computed automatically' or 'Not computed yet — press Compute'?

The tables on Info show saved results, and a driver is recalculated only after a new upload, a changed setting or when the 56-day window moves on to a new day. While Info stays open and visible, the app checks every minute and prepares the waiting drivers one at a time by itself. To speed it up press Compute on the row or Compute all.

What do Minor, Serious, Very serious and Most serious mean, and what is 'Possible fine'?

They are four levels the app assigns by rule, aligned with the categories of Directive 2006/22/EC Annex III: for example a missing manual entry is Minor, no break after 4 h 30 of driving is Serious, more than 10 hours of driving in a driving period is Very serious and a weekly rest below 24 hours is Most serious. 'Possible fine' appears only on some findings and is an indicative amount based on Spanish fine bands. It is a guide, not a legal assessment, and an inspector may judge differently.

What is the difference between a reduced and a regular rest?

A regular daily rest is 11 hours (or 3 plus 9 hours split); a reduced daily rest is 9 hours up to 11 hours and is allowed at most three times between two weekly rests. A regular weekly rest is 45 hours or more; a reduced one is 24 hours up to 45 hours. The missing hours of a reduced weekly rest must be taken back, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction. The rest planner counts the reduced rests used and lists what is still to be made up.

Documents & exports

Can I save or print a report as a PDF?

No. Reports, the rest planner, payroll, GPS and fuel figures are views on the screen without a PDF, print or spreadsheet button. To keep a copy, download the original tachograph file from the files list, or use Download all to get a ZIP. The app creates PDFs only for DeCA and eCMR documents, for the CMR and load order of a transport order, and for the monthly record of Time Registry with Download PDF.

Can I change or delete a DeCA or an eCMR after I issued it?

You can change it: open it with the pencil icon, enter a Reason for the change and save. It gets a new version (v2, v3 and so on) with the same reference, public address and QR code, while the earlier values and the reason stay in its history. You cannot delete an issued document. Press Cancel instead: it stays in the list marked Cancelled and can no longer be edited or issued again. Drafts can be deleted with Delete inside their form.

How does an inspector see my DeCA or eCMR?

Every issued DeCA and eCMR PDF carries a QR code. Scanning it opens the document in the inspector's browser with no login, and the address does not change when you edit the document. For a DeCA you can also show the code on screen with View QR in the DeCA list. Anyone who has the address can open the document, so share it only with people who need it.

Modules & plans

Why can I not see Work, Calendar, Time Registry or Fuel tickets in my menu?

Each one is an optional module. It must be part of your plan, a grant or something you bought, and the switch Enabled for your company must be on under Modules. A tab with the badge Not active means the module is not available to you yet: press Go to Billing to activate it.

How do I get a module I do not have?

Open Settings, then Billing, and select the tab Modules. Pick a period and press Buy to pay on the secure Stripe page when the card offers it, or press Request access and wait for the platform administrator. Buying needs an active plan, and a free plan counts. A module you buy lasts for the period you paid for and is not renewed by itself.

Is DeCA free, and where do I find it?

Yes. DeCA is free for every company account, with no plan or purchase needed. It has no menu entry of its own: open Work in the left menu, then DeCA list, or press Create document and choose New DeCA. The Work entry shows while the Work module is available to your company and switched on.

Privacy & data

Who can see my company's data?

Only the users of your account: another company cannot open your drivers, vehicles or files. A driver who links to you shares their details, card files and documents with you, and their trip notes only if the driver switches on Share trip notes. To help with a problem, a platform administrator can open a recorded support session that ends after one hour and cannot delete the account or pay for plans.

How do I delete my company account, and what happens to my data?

The primary account administrator opens Profile, then the Security tab, and presses Request account deletion. A link arrives at the recovery email and works for 60 minutes; the deletion runs as soon as the link is opened and cannot be undone. All drivers, vehicles, files, settings, orders, documents and other data of the account are removed, while the driver accounts linked to you stay and keep their own data. Download what you need first with Global ZIP download on Tools; the files of linked drivers come from Download all on each driver's page.

Create a driver account

Register a free driver account for yourself. It holds your own driver card data and can link to one or more companies.

Driver or company account?

When you register you pick a Registration type: Driver or Company. Choose Driver if you are a professional driver and want to keep your own tachograph files and reports. Choose Company only if you manage drivers and vehicles for a business.

Tip: The registration page shows a hint under the choice. For Driver it says: 'Driver accounts are free and limited to one driver card without vehicle access.' The Driver option is already selected when the page opens.
Register step by step
  1. Open the registration page. From the sign-in page press Create one. In the demo, press Register in the yellow banner.
  2. Type a Username. Use 3 to 32 characters: letters, numbers, dots, underscores or dashes.
  3. Type your Recovery email. The verification link and any later reset or confirmation emails go to this address. One email address can belong to one account only.
  4. Under Registration type keep Driver selected.
  5. Type a Password of at least 6 characters that includes at least one special character, meaning a character that is not a letter or a number. Type it again in Confirm Password.
  6. Tick the box 'By registering, I accept the' Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy.
  7. Press Register.

When the form is accepted, a green message appears with the link Back to sign in. The next topic explains what the message means.

Tip: If the username or email is taken you see 'This username is already in use.' or 'This recovery email is already in use.' Pick another one.
Tip: You cannot change the username later. It is shown read-only on the Profile page.
Confirm your email address

After you press Register the page answers 'Registration received. Check your email and open the verification link to activate your admin account.' Your own account is the 'admin account' meant here. The message goes to your recovery email and the link in it works for 24 hours.

  1. Open the email and click the verification link.
  2. Your account is activated at once and the app opens. You are not signed in yet, so the app can show the read-only demo first.
  3. Press Login at the bottom of the left menu, or open the sign-in page, and sign in with your username and password.
Important: Your account does not exist until you click the link, so you cannot sign in before that. Check the spam folder if the email does not arrive.

If the website has email verification switched off, the account is created at once and you see 'Registration completed successfully. You can now log in.' You can sign in straight away.

Tip: If the link is invalid or expired you see 'The verification link is invalid or expired.' and a Back to login button. After 24 hours the unconfirmed registration is deleted and you can register again with the same details. Until then it still reserves your username and email address, so the form answers 'This username is already in use.' or 'This recovery email is already in use.' If you mistyped the email, register again with the correct email and another username.
Sign up with Google

Instead of filling in the form you can press Sign in with Google on the registration or sign-in page. This works only when Google sign-in is set up for the website. Otherwise you see 'Google login is not configured.'

  1. Press Sign in with Google and choose your Google account.
  2. If no account matches yet, the page Complete your account opens. It shows the email address that will be used. Choose Driver or Company and tick the box to accept the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy Policy.
  3. Press Create account and continue. You are signed in at once and no verification email is needed. Press Cancel if you change your mind.

Your username is made from the first part of your Google email address, in lowercase. If that name is already taken, an underscore and a number are added, for example john_1. Your Google address becomes your recovery email. You can see both on Profile.

Tip: If your Google address already matches the recovery email of an existing account, you are signed in to that account instead of a new one being created.
Tip: A Google account gets a random password that nobody knows. To sign in with username and password as well, use Forgot password? with your Google address.
Tip: In the Android app, Google sign-in opens your phone browser and then brings you back to the app.
What a driver account gets
  • It is free. A driver account holds a single driver, which is you, and no vehicles.
  • You upload your own driver-card files and see your own reports on Info and under Files.
  • You can link the account to one or more companies with their invitation codes, so that your files reach them.
  • Payroll, Time Registry, Fuel tickets and Work appear in your menu only when a company gives you access to them.
  • There is no plan to choose for driver accounts, because nothing has to be paid.
If registration does not work
  • 'Registration is not available for the moment.' or 'Driver registration is currently disabled.' The site administrator has switched registration off, completely or for that account type. Try again later.
  • 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about N minute(s).' Several attempts came from the same device or email address in a short time (5 attempts in 30 minutes are allowed). Wait for the time shown, up to about 30 minutes.
  • 'Username must be 3-32 characters and use only letters, numbers, dots, underscores, or dashes.' Change the username.
  • 'Password must have at least 6 characters.' or 'Password must include at least one special character.' Choose a stronger password.
  • 'Password confirmation does not match.' Type the same password in both fields.
  • You must tick the box for the terms and privacy policy, otherwise no account is created.

Sign in, sign out and reset your password

How to enter and leave your account and what to do when you forget your password.

Sign in
  1. Open the sign-in page. On the website use its sign-in link. After Logout the app brings you here. In the demo, Login at the bottom of the left menu does the same.
  2. Type your Username. The app asks for your username, not your email address.
  3. Type your Password and press Login.
  4. You arrive on the Info page, your home page.
Tip: If you are already signed in and open the sign-in page, the app takes you straight to Info. If you are only looking at the demo, the form still appears so that you can sign in.
Sign in with Google

Press Sign in with Google under the form. You are signed in when your Google account is already linked to your account, or when your Google address is the recovery email of your account. If nothing matches, the page Complete your account opens so that you can create a new account.

Tip: The button works only when Google sign-in is set up for the website. In the Android app it opens your phone browser and then returns you to the app.
Reset a forgotten password
  1. On the sign-in page press Forgot password?
  2. Type the Recovery email of your account and press Send reset link.
  3. For an address that is not registered the page gives the same answer: 'If the recovery email exists, a reset link has been sent.' It does not tell you whether an address is registered.
  4. Open the email and click the link. The link works once and stays valid for 60 minutes.
  5. The page Reset password opens. Type a New password and Confirm new password. Use at least 6 characters with at least one special character.
  6. Press Reset password. You see 'Your password has been reset. Redirecting to sign in…' and then the sign-in page opens.
Important: The email goes to the recovery email saved on the account. If the account has no recovery email, no email can be sent. A frozen account cannot reset its password: you see 'This admin is frozen and cannot request or apply password resets.' Add your recovery email on Profile while you can still sign in.
Tip: You can ask for a reset link up to 5 times in 15 minutes. After that you see 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about 15 minute(s).' If the link was already used or is too old, the page says 'Password reset token is invalid or expired.' and you ask for a new one. The button Back to login returns you to the sign-in page.
If you cannot sign in
  • 'Invalid username or password.' This message appears for a wrong password, an unknown username and also for a locked account. Check the Username (not your email) and the capital letters.
  • After 10 sign-in attempts within 5 minutes you must wait. The message reads 'Too many registration attempts. Try again in about 5 minute(s).' The wording mentions registration, but it is the same waiting time for sign-in.
  • A new account cannot sign in until you have clicked the verification link in the email.
  • If you signed up with Google you do not know the password. Use Sign in with Google, or Forgot password? to set one.
Sign out
  1. On a small screen press the Menu button first to open the sidebar.
  2. At the bottom of the sidebar press Logout.
  3. The sign-in page opens.
Tip: Always log out on a shared phone or computer.

Try the public demo

A read-only example with sample data shows you what a driver account looks like before you register.

What the demo is

The demo is a ready-made example account with sample data. You do not need to register. There is a driver demo, which shows the view of a single driver, and a company demo, which shows the view of a company that manages many drivers.

A yellow banner at the top says: 'Demo mode: this account is only for demonstrating the application and its data can change at any time.' The expiry dates in the sample data are moved forward once a day, so the examples always look current.

Open and switch the demo
  1. On the sign-in page find Or try the demo.
  2. Press Switch to driver demo, or Switch to company demo.
  3. The app reloads inside the demo. To change demo later, press the same kind of button in the yellow banner.
Tip: If you open the app without being signed in, you are put into the driver demo automatically.
What works and what does not

You can browse the pages, open the files and reports of the sample driver, look at the Notifications panel, and view the pages under Settings. On the settings pages you can look at the options, but nothing can be saved.

You cannot upload files, add, edit or delete anything, save settings, download files, change a password, change the account type or delete an account. You cannot mark notifications as read either.

  • In Tools the Global ZIP download is not offered.
  • At the bottom of the sidebar the demo shows Login instead of Profile and Logout.
  • If an action is blocked, the app says 'This is a read-only demo. Create your own account to make changes.'
From the demo to your own account
  1. Press Register in the yellow banner, or Login at the bottom of the sidebar if you already have an account.
  2. Register as Driver, confirm your email and sign in.
Tip: Nothing from the demo is copied to your account. Your own account starts empty.

Find your way around the app

The header, your menu, the notification bell, language and day/night switch, and how the app looks on a phone.

The parts of the screen
  • The header at the top shows the brand name or logo (press it to go to Info) and, on the right, the buttons Language, Theme and Notifications. On a narrow screen the Menu button (three lines) appears at its left.
  • The sidebar on the left holds the groups Menu, Settings and Pages, and the Help entry right under them. At its bottom you find Profile and Logout.
  • The content area on the right shows the page you opened. Notices such as the demo banner appear at its top.
Tip: The swap button for the company and driver views belongs to company accounts. A driver account does not have it.
The Menu group
  • Info: your home page. It shows your latest trip notes and your rest planner, built from your newest uploaded file.
  • Work: transport orders. It appears once a company has assigned you an order.
  • Files: your driver record and the tachograph files you upload. In a driver account this is the page that a company calls Drivers. Once your driver record exists, the page opens your own files straight away.
  • Documents: your driver documents, with expiry reminders and front and back photos.
  • Trip Notes: your trip notes.
  • Payroll: appears when a linked company that has the payroll module has given you payroll access.
  • Time Registry: appears when a company that has the module has given you access.
  • Fuel tickets: appears when a company that has the module has given you access.
  • Tools: the Trip calculator, the Filename converter and the Global ZIP download.
Tip: There are no Vehicles, Calendar or Modules entries in a driver account. If Payroll, Time Registry, Fuel tickets or Work is missing, ask the company that you are linked to.
The Settings group

Press Settings in the sidebar to open or close the group. It holds:

  • Reminders: choose which expiry and upload reminders are active, how many days ahead they appear and whether they also send a push notification. You can also write your own messages there (Custom announcements).
  • Link: link your account to companies with their invitation code.
  • Billing: shown only when paid plans exist for driver accounts.
  • Other Settings: the legal and report options and the file format for phone app uploads.
The Pages group

The Pages group lists the information pages published by the website operator, for example Card Readers, Terms, Privacy Policy and Cookie Policy. Press one to read it inside the app. Right under the group you always find Help, the Help centre, even when there are no pages. The section 'Pages (legal and information)' explains who can open which page.

The notification bell

The bell in the header opens the Notifications panel on the right. The number on the bell counts the messages you have not read yet, and it shows 99+ above 99. The messages cover your card and document expiry, an upload that is due, your subscription and your own announcements.

Tip: How to read and dismiss them, and which ones appear, is described in the sections 'Notification bell and banners' and 'Reminders'.
Language and day/night theme
  1. Press the language button in the header (the translate icon, named Language).
  2. Choose a language from the list: DE, EN, ES, FR, IT, PL or RO, meaning German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish and Romanian. The page reloads in that language.
  3. Press the Theme button, shown as a sun or a moon, to switch between the day look and the night look.

Both choices are remembered on this device. The language is stored for one year. Before you choose, the app uses your device language if it is one of the seven, otherwise English. The theme follows the site default or your device setting until you choose.

Tip: The site administrator can switch some languages off, so the list on your screen can be shorter. When the header is too narrow, Language and Theme move to the bottom of the sidebar, just above Profile.
Using the app on a phone

On a large screen the sidebar is always visible. On a phone or a narrow window it is hidden to save space.

  1. Press the Menu button, three lines at the top left, to slide the sidebar open.
  2. Press a page to open it. The sidebar closes by itself. You can also press the dark area outside it.
Tip: The same app also runs inside the Tacho Manager Android app, which can read your driver card with a smart-card reader.
Tip: When the operator requires a newer version of the Android app and yours is older, the app shows 'Update required' with the button Update now, which opens the Play Store.
Tip: Wide tables turn into cards on a phone: each row becomes a card with the column names next to the values, so nothing is cut off.
Notices at the top of the page

Coloured bars above the page content show the demo notice and a frozen account. A highlighted greeting bar can also appear around public holidays. Each bar is explained in the section 'Notification bell and banners'.

Cookie banner, footer links and operator notices
  • A cookie banner titled 'We use cookies' can appear at the bottom of the page: 'We use cookies to keep you signed in and to improve this site. You can accept or decline non-essential cookies.' Press Accept or Decline. The banner is shown only when the website requires a consent, and it does not come back once you have decided on this device.
  • A bar at the top of the page can carry a message from the operator, for example a warning or a maintenance notice. A maintenance notice is red, a warning is yellow.
  • At the very bottom of the page a row of links opens the legal pages of the website, for example the privacy policy.

First steps checklist

A short path from a new driver account to your first files and your company link.

Checklist for a new driver account
  1. Register, confirm your email and sign in.
  2. Follow the Quick tutorial that opens by itself on your first visit. You can skip it and replay it later from Help.
  3. Open Files. A new account shows 'Set up your driver record'.
  4. Create the record by reading your driver card once in the Android app: connect a smart-card reader, insert your card and press Download card in the reader panel on Info. The first card you read creates your record from the card.
  5. On your Files page press Upload to add more tachograph files. Files are .ddd or .tgd, up to 50 MB each, and you can pick several at once.
  6. Open Profile and check your Recovery email. Without it you cannot reset a forgotten password.
  7. Open Settings, then Link, enter the invitation code from your company and press Add company.
  8. Open Settings, then Reminders, and choose which reminders you want in the bell.
  9. Open Documents to keep your driver documents. The page holds expiry reminders and front and back photos.
Tip: In a browser, Upload driver card file can read your name and card number from a card file, but saving is refused for a driver account. The grey button Read card (Android app) only reminds you that the card reader is part of the Android app. The section 'Files and your driver record' explains the record in detail.
Tip: Your account holds one driver. A second driver record cannot be added.
Why some menu entries are missing

Payroll, Time Registry, Fuel tickets and Work are controlled by your company, not by you. An entry shows up in your menu only when a linked company has the module and allows it for you. The section 'Modules in your menu' lists the conditions.

Tip: Billing under Settings shows only when paid plans exist for driver accounts. A driver account itself is free.

Quick tutorial for new accounts

A short guided tour of the main screens that opens by itself on a newly registered account. You can skip it and replay it whenever you want.

What the quick tutorial is

The Quick tutorial is a window with six short steps for a driver account. Each step explains one part of the app in two or three lines.

It opens by itself the first time you use a newly registered account, meaning an account created in the last 30 days. It does not open by itself in the demo or while a company is in the driver view.

Tip: The app remembers on your account, not only on this device, that you finished or skipped the tutorial. It does not open by itself again.
The six steps

The title bar shows 'Quick tutorial' and the step number, for example 'Step 2 of 6'. The steps are:

  • Welcome to Tacho Manager: a short overview of your left menu.
  • Add your tachograph data: read your card once with a smart-card reader in the Android app to create your driver record, then upload more files in Files.
  • Check your reports and rest planner: open your driver page after an upload to see your activities, infringements and rest planner.
  • Link to your company: open Settings, then Link, and enter the invitation code of your company. You need your driver record first.
  • Keep your records: use Trip Notes and Documents, with expiry reminders under Settings, then Reminders.
  • Help is one click away: the Help centre explains every feature step by step.
Move through the tutorial
  1. Press Next to go to the following step and Back to return to the previous one.
  2. Press Show me to open the page that the step is about. The tutorial shrinks into a button at the bottom right of the screen, 'Continue tutorial (2/6)'. Press it to carry on.
  3. On the last step press Finish.
  • Skip tutorial, or the close cross at the top right, ends the tutorial for good.
  • The Esc key, or a click on the dark area behind the window, only shrinks it into the button. You can come back to it.
Play the tutorial again
  1. Press Help in the left menu.
  2. Press Start the quick tutorial at the top of the page. The same button is at the bottom of the page.
Tip: The replay works for every account, including the demo. The demo does not store that you finished it.

Use the Help centre

The Help centre holds step-by-step guides for company and driver accounts, a search box and a list of frequently asked questions. It opens inside the app.

Open the Help centre

Press Help in the left menu. It sits right under the Pages group and is always listed. The page, titled Help centre, opens inside the app, so you stay where you are.

Tip: The Tacho Manager website also has a public Help page with the guides, so you can read them before you register.
Choose a guide

There are two guides: Company account and Driver account. Press the one you want at the top of the page.

When you are signed in, the guide for your own account opens first and carries the badge Your account. Reading the other guide shows what a driver or a company sees.

Frequently asked questions

At the end of the guide the section Frequently asked questions gathers short answers. They are grouped as Account & getting started, Files & uploads, Reports & rest rules, Documents & exports, Modules & plans and Privacy & data. Press a question to read the answer.

Your profile and driver record

The Profile page shows your username and recovery email, lets you set the report timezone and edit your own driver details.

Open your profile

Press Profile at the bottom of the sidebar. The page is titled Account and has three tabs: Profile, Driver and Security.

  • The card Profile shows your Username and Email (both read-only), your Recovery email and the Report timezone.
  • The card Account type shows your Current account type: Driver. It adds: 'A driver account holds a single driver and can link to companies.'
  • The card Switch account type is described in the section 'Password and account type'.
Tip: The username can not be changed. The Email field shows the same address as the recovery email. The language is not set here: use the language button in the header.
Recovery email

The recovery email is used to recover access if you forget your password. It is also where the app sends the registration link, the code for changing the account type and the link for deleting the account.

  1. Open Profile.
  2. Type the new address in Recovery email.
  3. Press Save. You see 'Profile saved.'
Important: The address must be valid and not used by another account, otherwise you see 'That recovery email is already in use.' If you empty the field and save, the address is removed. Without a recovery email you cannot reset your password, switch the account type or delete the account.
Tip: In the demo the Save button is not shown.
Report timezone

The Report timezone is the timezone used when your activity and infringement reports are drawn. You can choose Automatic (from IP location, default), UTC, Europe/Madrid (DST auto), Europe/Berlin (DST auto) or Europe/Bucharest (DST auto), then press Save. With the automatic option the timezone follows the location of your connection. When the connection does not report a timezone, Spain gives Europe/Madrid, Romania gives Europe/Bucharest and any other country Europe/Berlin.

Tip: When you change it, open reports are refreshed so they show the new times.
Your driver details

The tab Driver shows the card My driver with your Driver name and Card number. A new account has no driver record yet. You create it by reading your card in the Android app, as described in the section 'Files and your driver record'.

  1. Open Profile and choose the Driver tab.
  2. Press Edit my details. The window Edit driver opens.
  3. Change your Driver name, your DNI / NIF or your Social Security number.
  4. Press Save.
Tip: You cannot change the Card number here. Payroll and time-registry settings are managed by your company, not by you. If no driver record exists yet the tab says 'No driver record is linked to your account yet.'
Delete your driver record

At the bottom of the Driver tab a red Danger zone lets you delete your driver record.

  1. Type your card number in the box 'Type your card number (NUMBER) to confirm'.
  2. Press Delete driver and all files.
Important: Deleting your driver record permanently removes it and all of its uploaded files. This cannot be undone. Copies that linked companies already hold are not deleted by this: only deleting the whole account removes the copies of the companies you are still linked to.
Tip: You keep your login. 'Only one driver can be deleted per day', and the delete button is blocked while the account is frozen. Afterwards the Files page offers to set up a new driver record.

Password and account type

Change your password or switch a driver account into a company account. Closing the account is described in a separate section.

Change your password
  1. Open Profile and choose the Security tab.
  2. In the card Change password type your Current password.
  3. Type the New password and Confirm new password. Use at least 6 characters with at least one special character.
  4. Press Change password. You see 'Password changed.'
Tip: If the current password is wrong, nothing changes and you see 'Current password is incorrect.' In the demo the button is not shown.
Tip: If you signed up with Google you do not know the current password. Use Forgot password? on the sign-in page to set one.
Switch to a company account

The card Switch account type on the Profile tab changes a driver account into a company account. It says: 'Switching to a company account keeps only this driver's data; company features become available.' The switch needs a code that is emailed to you.

  1. Remove every linked company first. Open Settings, then Link, and delete each company from the list.
  2. Open Profile and find the card Switch account type.
  3. Press Email me a code.
  4. Open the email sent to your recovery email. It holds a code of 4 letters that is valid for 30 minutes.
  5. Type the code in Confirmation code and press Confirm switch.
  6. Confirm the question 'Switch this account to company? This cannot be easily undone.' The app reloads as a company account.
  • As long as companies are linked you see: 'Remove all linked companies before switching to a company account.'
  • The card says 'Switching account type is currently disabled.' when the site administrator has not allowed switching.
  • If registration for company accounts is switched off, the card says 'Registration for company accounts is currently disabled, so this switch is not available.'
  • You need a recovery email on the account first.
  • The button is not available in the demo.
What happens after the switch

After the switch the app shows one of two messages. 'Account changed to company. Choose a paid company plan to continue.' or, if you had uploaded files, 'Account changed to company and kept all uploaded data. The account is now frozen until a company plan is activated, or you switch back to driver mode.'

Tip: A frozen account is read-only until a company plan is activated. Open Settings, then Billing, to see the plans.
Delete your account

To close the account for good, open Profile, choose the Security tab and press Request account deletion. An emailed link confirms it. The steps, the conditions and what is removed are described in the section 'Your data and deleting your account'.

Important: Deletion cannot be undone. Download your files first, for example with Global ZIP download on Tools.

Info page (your rest planner)

Your Info page shows your latest trip notes and your rest planner, built from the newest file you uploaded.

What the Info page shows

Open Info at the top of the left menu. You see two things:

  • Trip Notes: your newest notes.
  • Your rest planner - what you can still drive and work, and when your next rests are due, calculated from your newest uploaded file.
Tip: In the Android app a card titled Bluetooth / Smart Card Reader (Smart Card Reader in older app versions) also appears at the top, where you can read your driver card. It is not shown in a normal web browser or in the demo.
If you have not uploaded a file yet

Until you have a file, the planner area says 'No file uploaded yet. Upload your card to see your rest planner here.'

  1. Open Files in the left menu.
  2. Upload your driver-card file.
  3. Return to Info. While the page loads it says 'Loading your latest file…' and 'Building your rest planner…'.
Recent trip notes

The Trip Notes card lists your five newest notes, each with its date and a one-line preview. Click a note to read it in full.

  • Add note: opens a form where you write a note and can attach your current location.
  • View all notes: opens the full Trip Notes page.

With no notes yet the card says 'No trip notes added yet.' The section 'Trip Notes' explains notes in detail.

The rest planner tabs

The planner on Info has four tabs: Summary, Working, Rest and Infringements. Summary is a timeline of what you did since your last 45-hour weekly rest. Working shows your driving and working-time counters with the deadlines for your next rests. Rest shows the rest you are taking now and its earliest end times. Infringements lists the findings of the last 56 days.

Tip: Each tab is explained in the section 'Rest planner'. If the tabs look empty or outdated, upload a newer file.
Keeping the planner current

The planner is built from your newest uploaded file, so it only knows what that file contains. After every new download, upload the file again to refresh the planner.

Reminders

Reminders warn you before your driver card or documents expire, when your card file is overdue for upload and when your subscription ends. You can switch each one on or off and send it to your phone.

Where reminders appear

Reminders appear in the notification bell in the page header. If you use the Android app they can also arrive as push notifications on your phone. The Reminders page has no email option.

Your reminder types

A driver account has four reminders. Each starts switched on, with push on:

  • Driver card expiry: warns when your tachograph card is about to expire or has expired. Starts 30 days before by default.
  • Driver document expiry: warns before your registered documents (licence, CAP, medical certificate...) expire. Starts 30 days before by default.
  • Driver upload: warns when your card file is overdue. You can set up to 28 days; the default is 7.
  • Subscription expiry: warns before a subscription on your account ends. Starts 14 days before by default.
Tip: Vehicle and infringement reminders exist only for company accounts, so they are not on your page.
Switch reminders on or off and set the lead time
  1. Click Settings in the left menu to open the group, then click Reminders.
  2. On a reminder's card, tick or untick Enabled. A reminder that is off disappears from the bell and from push.
  3. Set Days before: how many days ahead the reminder starts to appear. You can enter whole numbers from 0 to 3650; Driver upload accepts up to 28.
  4. Tick Push notification if the reminder should also reach your phone. This box and Days before are greyed out while Enabled is off.
  5. Press Save reminders. The message 'Reminders saved.' confirms it.
Tip: In the Android app, saving with any push option on asks you to allow notifications if you have not done so yet. The demo has no Save reminders button.
Card and document expiry

A reminder appears once an expiry date is inside the Days before window and stays until you renew. Once an entry is expired it says, for example, 'expired 3 day(s) ago', and the whole group turns red in the bell. A normal line reads 'Ion Popescu: driver card expires in 12 day(s) on 14/10/2026.'

Your card expiry date is read from the card file you upload. For other documents, open Documents in the left menu and register each one with its expiry date. Every document with an expiry date feeds the reminder system. A document without an expiry date never triggers a reminder.

Upload reminder

Driver cards should be uploaded at least every 28 days. Days before is how long before that limit the reminder starts. The age of your newest file is counted from its download date, which is read from the file name; if that is missing, the date of your last upload is used. With the default 7 days, the reminder starts when the newest file is 21 days old.

On the day the 28-day limit is reached, and after it, the reminder turns red, for example 'The 28-day limit passed 3 day(s) ago.' If no card file was ever uploaded, the reminder asks you to upload the first one as soon as possible.

Subscription reminder

Subscription expiry only appears when your account has a subscription with an end date. It warns before the end date (14 days by default) and turns red after it, asking you to renew.

Custom announcements

Below the reminder cards, Custom announcements lets you add your own messages to the bell, for example a note to yourself. An announcement is visible while it is enabled and, if you set dates, between its start and end. It appears under the title Custom reminder.

  1. Press Add announcement.
  2. Type the text in Message.
  3. Optionally set Starts at (leave empty to start immediately) and Ends at (leave empty to never expire).
  4. Switch on Push notification at the top if announcements should also go to your phone.
  5. Press Save announcements. Delete removes an announcement.
Push notifications on your phone

Push notifications are delivered by the Android app. Sign in to the app and allow notifications when it asks. The app then registers your phone automatically. If you refuse the permission, no push arrives.

Push is checked once a day. For each reminder that is enabled, has Push notification ticked and currently has something to report, your phone receives one notification with the reminder's title and its first two lines. The same notification is not repeated on the same day.

Notification bell and banners

The bell in the page header lists everything that currently needs your attention, built from your reminder settings. You can mark items as read.

Open the bell and read the list
  1. Click or tap the bell icon in the header (Notifications). A badge on the bell shows the number of unread items, or 99+ when there are more than 99.
  2. Read the list in the Notifications panel. Items are grouped under a title such as 'Driver card expiry reminders'. All entries of a group are shown in red when the group holds something urgent: an expired document, an overdue upload or a missing first upload. Other groups are ordinary warnings.
  3. Close the panel with the X, with the Esc key or by tapping outside it.

When nothing is waiting the panel says 'No notifications right now.' The list refreshes by itself about every two minutes while the page is open, and straight away after you mark items as read. A change you make on the Reminders page shows up at the next refresh.

What can appear in the bell

Each group follows one card on the Reminders page. A reminder that is switched off, or that has nothing to report, is not shown. For a driver account the groups are:

  • Driver card expiry reminders: your card expires soon or has expired.
  • Driver upload reminders: your card file is due or overdue.
  • Driver document expiry: one of your registered documents expires soon or has expired.
  • Subscription reminders: your plan is about to end (warning) or has ended (red).
  • Custom reminder: your own announcements.
Mark notifications as read
  1. Click the tick icon (Mark as read) next to an item to clear it.
  2. Or click Mark all as read at the top of the panel.

Read items disappear and the badge counts only unread items. The changing day counters do not bring an item back, but a change of wording, such as 'expires in' becoming 'expired', does. A read mark is forgotten after 180 days, so a problem that is still open appears again.

Important: Marking as read only hides the item. It does not solve the cause and it does not stop push notifications. To stop push for a reminder, untick Push notification on the Reminders page.
Tip: The demo can look at the bell but cannot mark items as read.
Banners at the top of the page

Some messages appear as bars above the page content instead of in the bell:

  • A yellow bar for a frozen account: 'Your account is frozen — the app is read-only. Renew your subscription to make changes.'
  • In the public demo a yellow notice says that it is a demo account only for demonstrating the application and that its data can change at any time. It has a button, Switch to driver demo or Switch to company demo depending on the demo you are in, and the button Register.
  • A highlighted greeting bar can appear around public holidays.

Other Settings (legal and report options)

The Other Settings page holds the legal and report options and the file format for phone app uploads, and shows the report timezone in use. This section is the page reference; the legal rules are explained in the section 'Legal and report settings'.

Where to find it and how to save
  1. Open Settings in the left menu, then Other Settings.
  2. Work in the card Legal & report settings. It has the groups Legal rule options and Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle).
  3. Press Save. The message 'Legal & report settings saved.' confirms it.

As the page itself says, these options change EU 561/2006 and Working Time Directive (2002/15/EC) analysis results. All switches are off by default. The demo shows the page without a Save button.

Tip: The group Linked driver file format is only for company accounts, so you will not see it.
File format for phone app uploads

Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle) decides how tachograph downloads are saved when the phone app uploads them. In Preferred uploaded file format choose Auto, TGD or DDD. Auto saves cards issued in Spain as TGD and all other cards as DDD; TGD or DDD forces that extension.

Tip: Files you upload yourself in the browser keep the name they already have.
Report timezone

At the bottom of the form the line Resolved timezone: shows the timezone used for dates and times in your reports, followed by '(auto-resolved)' or '(manual setting)'. You cannot change it on this page. Choose it in Report timezone on Profile, as described in the section 'Your profile and driver record'.

Files and your driver record

A driver account holds one driver: you. Files is your home for your driver record, your tachograph files and the reports made from them.

Your Files page

Open Files in the left menu. When your driver record exists, the app opens it at once (Opening your files…). There is no list of drivers, because a driver account has only you.

When no record exists yet, you see Set up your driver record with two buttons: Upload driver card file and Read card (Android app).

Set up your driver record

Your record comes from your own driver card, so your name, card number, licence number and card expiry are read from the card itself. A driver account manages only its own driver record.

  • Read card (Android app): the button on this page is greyed out (Available in the Tacho Manager Android app). In the Android app, put your card in the card reader and select Download card on the Info page. The first card you read creates your record.
  • Upload driver card file: opens the Add driver window. Under Upload a tachograph file to auto-fill you choose a card file (.ddd or .tgd) and the app reads your name and card number from it.
Important: In a browser, Save in the Add driver window can be refused for a driver account with A driver account manages only its own driver record, which is created from the uploaded driver card. If you see this message, create your record by reading your card in the Android app.
Tip: A driver account can hold only one driver. The button Upload driver card file is not shown in the read-only demo.
Your driver page
  • The heading shows your name and card number.
  • The information card shows Licence, Birth date, Card expiry, Card gen. (card generation) and Last download. The last download time is shown in your Report timezone.
  • Reports opens the report choices for your newest file. It is disabled while you have no files.
  • Files lists every stored file with its Name, Date and Size, plus the Download all and Upload buttons (see the section 'Your files and uploads').
Tip: There is no Edit or Delete button on this page. You edit your details under Profile (see the topic 'Edit your details'). Your documents are on their own page, Documents.
Edit your details

Edit your name, DNI / NIF and Social Security number under Profile, on the Driver tab, with Edit my details. The steps are described in the section 'Your profile and driver record'.

Tip: Your Card number is shown but greyed out. It changes only when you upload the file of a renewed card, as described in the section 'Your files and uploads'. Linked companies receive your updated name with your next uploaded file.
Card expiry and upload reminders

The bell warns you before your driver card expires (Driver card expiry reminders) and when your newest card file is getting old (Driver upload reminders). A card file should be uploaded at least every 28 days, counted from the download date of your newest file, not from the day you uploaded it.

Tip: Lead times and push settings are described in the section 'Reminders'. The card expiry date only updates when you upload a card file made after your card was renewed.
Delete your driver record

To delete your driver record and all its files, open Profile, choose the Driver tab and use Delete driver and all files in the Danger zone. The steps and the consequences are described in the section 'Your profile and driver record'.

Tip: This does not delete your login. To close the whole account, use the Security tab as described in the section 'Your data and deleting your account'.

Documents

Register your driving documents with their expiry dates and photos. The app reminds you before they expire, and when you are linked your company can plan renewals.

Why add your documents

Keep your driving licence, CAP, tachograph card, medical certificate, ADR and similar documents with their expiry dates. Every document with an expiry date feeds the reminder system, so you are warned before it expires.

If you are linked to a company, your documents are copied to it automatically, so the company can plan renewals in time. You can attach up to 2 photos per document, front and back.

Tip: On the Documents page the card Why add your documents here? is folded. Select it to read the explanation.
Add a document
  1. Open Documents in the left menu.
  2. Select Add document.
  3. Type the Document name. It is required.
  4. Optional: choose a date in Expires on and write details in Document info.
  5. Select Save.
Tip: You need a driver record first (see the section 'Files and your driver record'). Until then the page only shows No documents. A document without an expiry date shows the grey badge No expiry set and never triggers a reminder.
Attach photos
  1. Find the Front and Back slots under the document.
  2. Select Add photo and choose a picture. Use JPG, PNG or WebP, up to 10 MB. On a phone you can take the picture with the camera.
  3. To change a picture select the Replace photo icon beside it. To remove it select the Remove photo icon and confirm.
  4. Select a thumbnail to open the picture full size in a new tab.
Tip: A document holds at most two photos. They stay on the document when you edit its text.
Edit or delete a document
  1. Select the pencil icon next to the document, change the fields in Edit document and select Save.
  2. Or select the trash icon and confirm the question that starts with Delete document. This cannot be undone.
Expiry colours and reminders
  • Green, Valid until followed by the date: more than 30 days left.
  • Yellow, Expires in followed by the number of days: 30 days or fewer left.
  • Red, Expired followed by the number of days ago: the date has passed.
  • Grey, No expiry set: no date entered.

The bell (Notifications) shows a Driver document expiry group, starting a number of days before the date, and it keeps listing the document after the date has passed. Change the number of days or switch it off under Settings, then Reminders.

How your company gets your documents

Each time you add, change or delete a document or a photo, the same list is sent to every linked company. Your driver account is the source of truth, so the company's copy is replaced by yours. When you link a new company, your current documents are copied to it right away.

Tip: After you remove a company, it receives no more updates. The copy it already has stays.

Linking to your company

Link your driver account to your transport company with its invitation code. Your tachograph files then reach the company automatically, and you decide what else you share.

What linking does

Linking connects your driver account to your transport company, so the tachograph files you upload reach them automatically.

  • When you link, the company receives your driver record (name, card number, licence number, birth date, card expiry and card generation) and a copy of your stored files.
  • Every file you upload later is copied to the company too. Your documents are copied and kept in sync.
  • Your trip notes stay private unless you switch sharing on for that company.
  • A company can switch on access to modules such as Payroll, Time Registry or Fuel tickets for you.
  • You can link to more than one company and you can remove a company at any time.
Your linked companies

The Linked companies table shows each company with its name, the email address of its main contact and the date you linked (Linked at), plus the controls in Actions. When none is linked you see No companies are linked to this driver account yet.

Share your trip notes

Sharing your trip notes is off when you first link. Each company has its own switch.

  1. On the Link page find the company row.
  2. Switch Share trip notes on or off. The change is saved at once.
Tip: When the switch is on, that company can read your trip notes. Your files are always shared with a linked company: there is no switch for them. File sharing stays on while the company is linked.
Remove a company
  1. On the Link page find the company.
  2. Select Delete.
  3. Confirm Remove this company link? It will lose access to this driver's files.
  • The company stops receiving your new files, documents and updates.
  • Files already copied to the company stay there.
  • The company still sees you in its list, marked Unlinked, and can no longer upload files for you.
  • You can link again later with the company's current code.
Tip: Removing a link does not delete what the company already has. If you want your data removed from the company, ask the company to delete your driver in its list.
Menu entries your company controls

Some entries appear in your left menu only after a company allows them for your card: Payroll, Time Registry, Fuel tickets and Work. The conditions for each entry are described in the section 'Modules in your menu'.

Tip: If an entry is missing, ask your company to switch the matching access on for you.
Good to know
  • If the account type switch is available to you, you must first remove every linked company before changing a driver account into a company account (Remove all linked companies before switching to a company account.).
  • Deleting your whole account on the Security tab also removes your driver record and the copies of your files held by the companies you are still linked to at that moment. A company you removed earlier keeps its copies.
  • Deleting only your driver record (Danger zone on the Driver tab) is a separate action.

Your files and uploads

Your reports, rest planner and reminders are calculated from the files you download from your driver card. Files in the left menu shows your stored files and lets you add new ones.

Which files you can upload

You can upload the file you downloaded from your driver card. It has the extension .ddd or .tgd, in capital or small letters, and it can be up to 50 MB.

The app looks inside the file, so a file with an unusual name still works when its content is valid. Official card names start with C_. A .TGD name continues with the card number, the country, the date and the time. A .DDD name written by this app continues with the date, the time, the country and the card number.

Tip: A driver account has no trucks, so files from a vehicle unit are not accepted. They are answered with 'Only driver card files (C_...) are accepted here.' The same message appears when the file is not a readable tachograph download.
Important: Archives are refused. A ZIP, RAR, 7z or gzip file renamed to .ddd or .tgd is rejected with the message 'This looks like a ZIP/archive file. Extract it and upload the .DDD/.TGD tachograph file inside.'
Open your files

Open Files in the left menu. Your account holds one driver, which is you, so the app takes you straight to your page. It shows your name and card number, details taken from your card (Licence, Birth date, Card expiry, Card gen. and Last download), a Reports button and the list of stored files, headed Files with their number.

The list shows the newest file first, with the columns Name, Date, Size and Actions. The Date is normally the download date and time of the file.

First time: create your driver record

A new driver account starts empty and Files shows 'Set up your driver record'. Your record, with your name and card number, is created from your driver card by reading it once in the Android app: tap Download card on the Info page. The first card you read creates the record.

Tip: The browser cannot create the record. Upload driver card file only reads your name and card number from a card file, and saving is refused for a driver account. The section 'Files and your driver record' explains the page and its buttons, and the section 'Android app and card reader' explains the card reading.
Upload a file
  1. Open Files in the left menu.
  2. Above the list of files (headed Files with their number, for example Files (3)), click Upload.
  3. Click the file field and select one or several .ddd or .tgd files.
  4. Click the upload button. When you picked several files it shows their number, for example Upload 3 files.
  5. Watch the status next to each file: Waiting…, Uploading…, then Uploaded. A red label shows the reason when a file fails.

Files are sent one after another. When you upload a single file and it works, the window closes by itself. With several files, or when something failed, the list stays on screen. Click Done when you have read it.

Tip: Only files of your own card are accepted. If you renewed your card, upload a file from the new card: the app compares the driving licence number with the one stored from your earlier uploads, accepts the file and updates your card number. The Upload button is not shown in the read-only demo.
Same-week files and replaced files

Uploading a file with the same name again replaces the stored copy.

Important: By default the app keeps only one driver-card file for each calendar week (Monday to Sunday). When you upload a file whose download date falls in a week that already has a file, only the file with the newest download date stays and the others are deleted automatically, also from the copies held by your linked companies. Uploading an older file for a week that already has a newer one can leave the older file out of the list, although the upload looks successful.
Tip: The length of this period is a platform setting that you cannot change yourself.
Messages you may see when a file is refused
  • 'Upload discarded: card number in file content does not match selected driver.' The file comes from a card that is not yours.
  • 'Upload discarded: card number in filename does not match selected driver.' The card number written in the file name is not yours.
  • 'Upload discarded: driving licence number in file does not match selected driver.' The licence on the card is not the one stored for you.
  • 'This card belongs to a different driver. A driver account can only hold its own driver card.' You read a card of another person in the Android app.
  • 'File is too large. Maximum allowed size is 50 MB.' and 'Uploaded file is empty.'
  • 'Your account is frozen. Renew your subscription to make changes.' Uploads, deletions and conversions are blocked until the subscription is renewed.
  • 'This is a read-only demo. Create your own account to make changes.' The demo account cannot store files.
Your files reach your companies

If your account is linked to one or more companies, each new card file you upload is copied to every company whose link with you is active. The company sees it on your driver page in its own account. You do not have to upload twice.

A company can prefer one file format. When it does, the name of its copy is converted to that format. The content is not changed.

Tip: Links are managed under Link in the Settings group of the left menu.
What happens after an upload
  • The file appears in your list and your details are refreshed from the file you uploaded: licence number, birth date, card expiry, card generation and Last download.
  • Your reports and the rest planner on the Info page are calculated from your newest file. While your record has no file yet, the page says 'No file uploaded yet. Upload your card to see your rest planner here.'
Upload deadline

A card file should be uploaded at least every 28 days, counted from the download date of your newest file. The bell warns you before the limit and asks for the first upload if you have none. See the section 'Reminders'.

Open, download, convert and delete your files

From your list of files you open reports, download the original file, change its name between .DDD and .TGD, or delete it.

Open a report from a file
  1. Open Files and click a file name. The window File reports opens.
  2. Pick a report. It replaces the file list on the same page.
  3. Click Back to files to return to the list.
  • Infringements, Activities, Rest planning, Work summary and Speed report.
  • Payroll, only when payroll is available for your account.
  • Map history: a route map of the positions stored in your newest files (see the section 'Map history and location maps').

The Reports button above the list opens the same menu for your newest file. The reports are described in the section 'Your reports'.

Download a stored file
  1. Open Files.
  2. In the list, click the download icon in the Actions column.

You get the original .ddd or .tgd file under its stored name.

Tip: The read-only demo hides the download icon and refuses downloads.
Convert a file between .DDD and .TGD

A stored file can change its name from .DDD to .TGD or the other way round. Only the name changes. The content stays exactly the same.

  1. Open Files.
  2. In the list, click the arrows icon (its tooltip is Convert) in the Actions column.
  3. The list refreshes and shows the new name.

The new name follows the official layout: C_CARDNUMBER_COUNTRY_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.TGD for .TGD and C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_COUNTRY_CARDNUMBER.DDD for .DDD. Spain appears as the country code E.

Tip: The current name must follow an official pattern, or the alternative card name C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD, using only letters, digits, dots, hyphens and underscores. Otherwise the app answers that the file name could not be converted. If another stored file already has the new name, the conversion is refused with 'A file with the converted name already exists.'
Delete a stored file
  1. Open Files.
  2. In the list, click the trash icon in the Actions column.
  3. Confirm the question 'Delete file ... ? This cannot be undone.'
Important: A deleted file cannot be restored. Upload it again if you still have it.
Tip: Deleting a file in your account does not remove the copy that was already sent to a linked company.
File format for card reads

The file format for cards read with the Android app is set under Settings, then Other Settings, in the group Phone app uploads (smart-card & vehicle). See the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)'.

Tip: Files you upload from a browser keep the name they already have.

ZIP downloads and the filename converter

Download all your stored files as a ZIP, or rename a file on your own computer between .DDD and .TGD.

Download all your files
  1. Open Files and click Download all above the list.
  2. In the window Download files (date range), set From and To. They start with the dates of your stored files. The quick buttons Last 6 months, Last 12 months and This year fill them in for you.
  3. Click Download all. The browser saves a ZIP named driver_ followed by your card number and _files.zip.

Both dates are needed, and From must not be after To. The range applies to the date saved with each file, which is normally its download date. When no file falls in the range, the app answers 'No files to download for that range.'

Tip: The button only appears when you have files. It is hidden in the demo.
Download everything from the Tools page

The Global ZIP download card on Tools packs all your stored files into one archive. It is described in the section 'Tools: ZIP download, converter, trip calculator'.

Rename a file on your computer
  1. Open Tools and find the card Filename converter.
  2. Choose the File on your computer (.ddd or .tgd).
  3. Choose the Target: TGD or DDD.
  4. Click Convert. The browser saves the same file under its new name and the card says 'Converted to ...'.

Nothing is stored in your account. Only the name is rewritten to the official format, the content is not touched. Alternate card names such as C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD are converted to the official C_CARDNUMBER_COUNTRY_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.TGD format.

Tip: The file can be up to 50 MB and its name must follow an official C_ pattern, or the alternate card name C_YYYYMMDD_HHMM_name.DDD. Otherwise the converter explains that the file name is not valid.

Android app and card reader

The Android app runs the same screens as the website and lets you read your driver card with a USB reader or over Bluetooth, then uploads it for you.

What the Android app adds
  • Reading your driver card with a USB smart-card reader and uploading the file straight away.
  • Downloading the card that is inserted in a tachograph over Bluetooth (app version 3.1.0 or newer).
  • Writing the current date to your driver card with Mark card as downloaded.
  • Phone notifications for your reminders.
  • A notice when a newer version of the app is required.
Tip: You do not need the app to upload files. Uploading from a browser also works on a phone. The app is needed for the card reader, Bluetooth and phone notifications.
Find the reader panel

The panel is at the top of the Info page. It is called Smart Card Reader, or Bluetooth / Smart Card Reader in app versions that support Bluetooth. It only appears inside the Android app and only when you are signed in with a real account. The read-only demo never shows it.

The panel checks for a reader regularly and opens by itself when a reader is plugged in. Tap its title to open or close it by hand. The status line shows 'Checking smart-card reader...', then a message such as 'Reader connected' with the reader's name, or 'No compatible smart-card reader detected.'

Read your card with a USB reader
  1. Plug the USB smart-card reader into the phone and allow the USB permission when the phone asks.
  2. Insert your driver card in the reader. The status line shows the reader's name.
  3. Open Info and check that the reader panel is open.
  4. Tap Download card.
  5. Wait until the message 'Smart-card file uploaded.' appears. Do not remove the card before that.

During the read the panel shows two bars: Overall progress and Current block. The block is named after the part of the card being read, such as Driver activity, Events, Faults, Vehicles used, Places or Border crossings. The status line moves through 'Reading smart card...', 'Saving a local copy...' and 'Uploading smart-card file...'.

The app saves a copy of the file on the phone before it uploads. On Android 10 and newer the copy goes to a folder called TachoManager inside the phone's Downloads folder. If the upload fails, the copy stays on the phone, so you can upload it later from the website.

When something fails, the line starts with 'Smart-card error:' followed by the reason.

Tip: The file always goes to your own driver record. If you have none yet, your first card read creates it from the card, and any companies you are linked to receive the file as well.
Mark your card as downloaded

The button Mark card as downloaded writes the current date and time into the last-download record of your card. The same date is stored in your account as your Last download.

The button is shown whenever a USB reader is connected and works once your card is inserted. The status line says 'Updating LastCardDownload...' and then 'LastCardDownload written successfully.'

Important: This writes to the driver card itself. Use it only when the data of the card has really been downloaded.
Download your card over Bluetooth

Bluetooth needs app version 3.1.0 or newer. Older versions show no Bluetooth buttons. The Bluetooth buttons also stay hidden while a USB reader is plugged in.

  1. Insert your driver card in the tachograph (driver 1 slot).
  2. Make the tachograph discoverable. On a VDO, open the driver 1 entry in the menu and select Bluetooth. On a Stoneridge, press the menu button, go to Settings, then Bluetooth, and enable Bluetooth pairing.
  3. In the reader panel tap Connect via Bluetooth.
  4. Pick your tachograph from the list, strongest signal first, and confirm the code shown on the tachograph display.
  5. When the panel says Connected with the device name, tap Download card.

The link Do you want help connecting to your tachograph? shows the same steps for VDO and Stoneridge. If nothing is found you see 'No tachograph found. Make sure you're in range, then try again.' Tap Disconnect to end the connection. Searching for a tachograph also asks for permission to show notifications.

Tip: The button Download tachograph, which downloads the vehicle-unit file of a truck, exists only on company accounts.
Other things the app does
  • Phone notifications: after you sign in, the app asks for permission to show notifications and registers your phone. Each reminder on the Reminders page has its own Push notification switch.
  • Updates: when the platform requires a newer version, a full-screen Update required message with the button Update now appears, or a button New version available — update now shows above the reader panel. Both open the Play Store.
  • PDF documents of the Work module, such as an eCMR, open in a viewer inside the app. Download saves the PDF through the phone's download manager and Share hands the document's link to the phone's share menu.
  • Signing in with Google opens your phone's browser for the Google step and brings you back into the app.
  • On phones the app asks the phone to keep the screen on while the app is open. This is done on a best-effort basis.

Your reports

Turn each file you upload into reports: infringements, activities, rest planning, work summary and more.

Open a report for your file

Every report is built from one file. You open it from your own page.

  1. Open Files in the left menu. It takes you to your own page.
  2. Click the name of the file you want to analyse. To use your newest file, click Reports in your details card instead.
  3. In the File reports window, choose Infringements, Activities, Rest planning, Work summary or Speed report. Payroll is listed too when a company gives you payroll access.
  4. Click Back to files to return to your list.
Tip: The Reports button is disabled until you have uploaded at least one file. Use Upload first.
Tip: A report only knows what is inside the file you opened. Open your newest file for the current situation, or an older file to look back.
Choose the period

Infringements, Activities and Work summary show a date filter above the report.

  • From and To let you pick two dates.
  • 7d, 30d, 60d and 90d set the period to the last 7, 30, 60 or 90 days, ending today.
  • All removes the limits.

Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today. Activities opens on the last 14 days. Work summary opens with no limits. Rest planning and Speed report have no date filter.

Tip: The filter only decides which days and findings you see. The check itself always runs on the whole file.
Tip: On Work summary the filter does not change the figures. The totals always cover the whole file.
Tip: In Infringements and Activities, the start date also sets where the day strip begins: an earlier From date or a longer quick button adds days to the strip, a later one removes them. All removes the limits for the findings table but does not change the strip. Click Load 14 more days to go further back. If every day in the file is older than the chosen period, the strip shows the 14 newest days of the file instead.
Work summary

Work summary adds up everything recorded in the file.

  • Driving, Other work, Availability and Break / rest give the time spent in each activity.
  • Total work is driving, other work and availability together.
  • Total tracked is all four together, rest included.
  • Distance is the number of kilometres driven. The Vehicle and Kilometers table splits it by registration plate.
  • Window shows the first and last moment covered by the file.

A doughnut chart shows how the tracked time splits between the four activities.

Tip: Kilometres come from the odometer readings when the card was put into a vehicle and taken out again. A session without both readings, or one where the registration changes, is not counted.
Activities: day strip and timeline

Activities shows the file one day at a time.

  • The day strip has a button for each day with the date (day/month), the driving time and, when there is any, the other work time. Days with an infringement carry a red warning mark.
  • Click a day to open Activity detail for it. The newest day opens first. Click Load 14 more days to go further back.
  • The heading Activity detail shows the date. For a day on which a working day starts, it also shows the start and end of that working day with the total driving and other work time.
  • The timeline spans 24 hours. Each activity is a coloured bar with its own symbol. Hover over a bar to see its type, start, end and duration. A long rest bar also carries a small label with the length of the rest.
  • A workday bar shows the span and total length of each working day. Team driving is marked on it when the data shows two drivers.
  • A red band on the timeline marks the time of an infringement that lasts a day or less. Longer ones, such as a weekly rest or a weekly driving limit, are marked only on the day strip, on their first and last day.
  • Card insertions and withdrawals appear as small round markers with a down or up arrow.
  • The table under the timeline lists each activity with Type, Start - End and Duration. Rows that fall inside an infringement are highlighted.

Below the day detail, Activities also shows the findings table Infringements (N) for the chosen period. It is the same table as in the Infringements report.

Tip: The activity types are Driving, Other Work, Availability and Break/Rest.
Zoom the timeline

You can zoom the 24-hour timeline in on any day.

  • Scroll the mouse wheel over the timeline, or pinch with two fingers on a touch screen.
  • Press the minus and plus buttons under the timeline, or drag the slider between them. A read-out next to them shows the zoom, for example 2.0x.
  • Zoom goes from 1x to 8x. When zoomed in, drag the timeline sideways to move along the day.
Places, border crossings and card events

Under the timeline, collapsible sections list what the card recorded that day. A section appears only when that day has such records. Each title has a count badge. Click a title to open it.

  • Place entries: the country and region entered when work began (Begin country) and ended (End country), and manual entries (Manual entry).
  • Card events: each Card insertion and Card ejection, with the vehicle registration, the odometer (Odo) and the place (Loc) when they are known.

The activity table also lists place entries, Border crossing rows and card events in time order. Entries that carry coordinates show a pin. Click the pin to open Location map.

Tip: Pins appear only where the file holds coordinates. Not every card or place entry has them.
Speed report

A driver card does not store detailed speed. The Speed report looks for vehicle-unit files in your account for the vehicles you drove, and reads the speed records for the periods you had your card in them.

  • It looks at up to four vehicles, the most recently used ones, and reads the two newest vehicle files of each.
  • The line Speed from vehicle files names each source, with the registration and the number of minute records.

When it finds some, you see Days with data, Peak max and Avg of daily avg, a row of day buttons, a line chart of Max km/h and Avg km/h for each minute, and a table with one row per day (Minute blocks, Max km/h and Avg km/h).

Tip: Driver accounts usually hold no vehicle files, so you may see 'No detailed speed found in the vehicle files for the periods this driver used them.'
Map history

Map history shows on a map the GPS positions stored on your card. Choose it in the File reports window after you click a file name. The window opens on the last 24 hours and reads your three newest files.

Tip: The periods, the map symbols and the limits are described in the section 'Map history and location maps'.
Download or keep a copy

Reports are views on the screen. The app has no separate print or PDF button for them.

  • Click the download icon in the files list to save the original tachograph file.
  • Click Download all next to Upload to get a ZIP of the files uploaded in a date range. See the section 'ZIP downloads and the filename converter'.
Tip: Downloads are hidden in the read-only demo because the files hold real personal data.

Infringements and EU rules

How the app checks your driving time, breaks and rests against EU Regulation 561/2006 and what it shows when it finds a problem.

Read the Infringements report

Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today. It shows the day strip and timeline from Activities, with the findings table underneath.

The heading Infringements (N) counts the rows. A red badge shows the number of Violations. A green Clean badge and the line 'No infringements detected.' mean the period is clear.

  • Severity: the level of the finding, in a coloured badge.
  • Rule: what went wrong, in plain words with the legal basis.
  • Period: when the finding started and ended. Click the start date to jump to that day.
  • Measured / Limit: what the file shows, above the legal limit.

Click any row to open that day in the timeline. The row of the day you are viewing is highlighted. The newest finding is listed first.

Tip: In this report the table follows the day strip. Click Load 14 more days and older findings appear in the table too.
Tip: A report reads one file. If you have several files, open the newest one for the current picture.
Severity levels

Every finding has one of four levels. The app sets the level from the kind of rule that was broken. The levels are aligned with the categories of Directive 2006/22/EC Annex III.

  • Minor (light blue): a missing manual entry.
  • Serious (yellow): no break after 4 h 30 of driving, more than two extended driving periods in a week, more than three reduced daily rests, missing compensation for a reduced weekly rest, a missing country entry, and the optional working-time checks.
  • Very serious (red): more than 10 hours of driving in a driving period, more than 56 hours in a week, no daily rest of at least 9 hours, a daily rest that started too late, or an incomplete split rest.
  • Most serious (red, bold): more than 90 hours in two weeks, a weekly rest below 24 hours, two reduced weekly rests in a row, or a weekly rest that started too late.

Some rows end with 'Possible fine:' and an amount. It is an indicative range based on Spanish fine bands: EUR 301-400 up to 20 percent beyond the limit, EUR 1,501-2,000 more than 20 percent beyond it, and EUR 3,301-4,600 more than 50 percent beyond it.

It appears only on findings for the 4 h 30 break, driving over 10 hours in a period, driving over 56 hours in a week, driving over 90 hours in two weeks, a daily rest that is too short or too late, and a weekly rest below 24 hours. In Spanish and Romanian the sentence is translated. In the other languages it stays in English.

Important: The analysis uses recorded data only. Some situations, such as where a weekly rest was spent, cannot be confirmed from the tachograph alone, so an inspector may judge differently.
Driving time and breaks

These checks follow Regulation (EC) No 561/2006.

  • Break: after 4 h 30 of driving a break is needed: 45 minutes, or two parts, first 15 minutes and then 30 minutes. A break shorter than 15 minutes does not count. In this check, break/rest and availability both count as break time.
  • Daily driving: up to 9 hours between two daily rests. Twice a week it may be extended to 10 hours. Driving is counted between daily rests, not by calendar day.
  • Extended days: a third extended driving period in the same week is flagged. A period over 10 hours is flagged on its own and still uses up one of the two extensions.
  • Weekly driving: up to 56 hours in a calendar week, Monday to Sunday.
  • Two weeks: up to 90 hours in two weeks in a row.
Daily and weekly rest
  • Daily rest: within 24 hours after the end of the last daily or weekly rest, a new daily rest is needed. It is regular at 11 hours or more, reduced at 9 hours up to 11 hours (three times at most between two weekly rests), or split into 3 hours plus 9 hours.
  • When the card data shows that two drivers were on board, the window is 30 hours instead of 24. If the card carries no crew information, the app may assume two drivers from the pattern of availability time and says so in a review warning.
  • Weekly rest: every calendar week with driving needs one. Regular is at least 45 hours. Reduced is 24 hours up to 45 hours. One rest is chosen for each week, the most favourable one.
  • Two reduced in a row: after a reduced weekly rest the next one must be regular. The international goods option in the legal settings allows two in a row.
  • Six days: a weekly rest must start no later than six 24-hour periods after the end of the previous one.
  • Compensation: the shortfall of a reduced weekly rest must be taken back in one block, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction. The finding appears only once the file reaches that deadline.
Tip: Weeks that the file covers only in part, at its start or end, are not judged for weekly rest.
Recording rules

Two findings are about what was entered on the tachograph, not about hours.

  • Missing manual data entry (Minor): the card was out for at least 24 hours and a country was recorded when it was taken out, but nothing was recorded when it was put back: no manual entry and no country. Legal basis: Article 34(3)(b) of Regulation (EU) No 165/2014.
  • Symbol of country not entered in recording equipment (Serious): the card was out for at least 24 hours and a country was recorded when it was taken out, but no country was recorded when it was put back. Legal basis: Article 34(6)(f) and Article 34(7).
Tip: When a missing manual entry is confirmed, other findings that overlap the same period are left out of the list.
How the data is read
  • Time with no recording of nine hours or more is counted as rest.
  • For the break check, break/rest and availability segments that touch each other count as one break.
  • Calendar weeks run from Monday 00:00 to Sunday in the report timezone.
  • A single recorded minute of activity inside a long rest, such as a card insertion, does not end the rest when the rest carries on for at least 30 minutes afterwards. An inspector may count it as an interruption.
  • Each report analyses one file. Open the newest file for the current situation.
Tip: Review warnings, such as reduced daily rests used or country entries that cannot be confirmed, are shown in the free file inspector, not in the findings table.

Rest planner

Shows how much driving and working time you have used, when your next rest must start, and the earliest end of the rest you are taking now.

Where to find your rest planner
  • On Info, your planner is shown straight under your trip notes. It uses your newest file and has four tabs: Summary, Working, Rest and Infringements.
  • On your page under Files, click a file name and then Rest planning. This view has the first three tabs. For findings, use the Infringements report.

The planner works from the file and from the current time, so it tells you the situation now, not on the day you downloaded the file. On Info it uses your newest file. If the file ends more than a week before today, the planner works as of your last recorded activity.

Tip: Without a file, Info says 'No file uploaded yet. Upload your card to see your rest planner here.'
Summary tab

Summary is the tab that opens first. It lists what you did since the last weekly rest of at least 45 hours.

  • A coloured pill is a rest of 7 hours or more, with its length inside (for example 9h30). Green is a weekly rest of 45 hours or more, yellow is a reduced weekly rest, grey is a daily rest. The start of the rest is on the left and the end on the right. Shorter breaks stay inside the working period.
  • A line with a truck icon is a working period, from where it started to where it ended, shown as short place codes.
  • A route through three or more regions shows +N between start and end. Click +N to see every region, and click the small collapse button to fold it again.
  • Click the pin next to a place to open it on a map.
  • Click the question-mark icon for the figures of that working period: Start, End, Work day, Driving, Other work and Km driven, with the average speed.
  • A red warning triangle, or a red pill, marks a rest or working period that overlaps an infringement. Hover over it to see the rule.

If your data holds no 45-hour break, the tab says 'No 45h break in the available data — showing everything recorded.' If nothing was recorded since your last weekly rest it says 'No activity since the last weekly rest.'

Tip: Places come from the place records on your card. When a company you are linked to uses the GPS Tracking module and has a tracker on your truck, the GPS position is used instead, and its pin is blue.
Working tab

Working answers two questions: how much have you used, and when must your next rest start? Times are shown as hours and minutes.

  • Driving Time: Daily (max 10 hours) is your driving since your last rest of at least 9 hours, next to the limit that applies now: 10:00, or 09:00 once both extensions are used. Extended Day (max 2) shows stars for the extended driving periods used this week. Weekly (max 56 hours) and Fortnightly (max 90 hours) show your driving of this week, and of last week plus this week.
  • Next Daily Rest: No later than is the latest start of your next daily rest. Duration (possible reduced) is 09:00, or 11:00 once three reduced rests are used. Reduced (max 3) counts the reduced rests used since your last weekly rest.
  • Next Weekly Rest: the latest start and the possible duration: 24:00, or 45:00 when your last weekly rest was reduced.
  • Next Regular Weekly Rest: the latest start of a 45-hour rest.
  • Working Time: Weekly (max 60:00), 4 months average (max 48 hours) and Daily (today's working time). Driving, other work and breaks shorter than 15 minutes count, availability does not. The 4-month average uses the weeks that are in the file.
Tip: When your previous weekly rest was reduced, Next Weekly Rest shows a warning that the next one must be a regular rest of 45 hours.
Rest tab

Rest works while you are resting. When the planner cannot treat you as resting, the tab says 'Last activity is not rest. Rest projections are shown when current state is rest.' This mostly happens when your file ends more than a week before today and its last activity is not a rest.

  • Current Rest Period: Began shows when your rest started. A green line, You can still work until, shows the time by which your next daily rest has to start, while that time is still ahead.
  • Possible End Times: the earliest end of your rest if it were Reduced Daily (9 hours), Regular Daily (11 hours), Reduced Weekly (24 hours) or Regular Weekly (45 hours). A bar under each line shows how much of that rest has passed. An option that is no longer possible is struck through in red.
  • Compensation: the reduced weekly rests that you still have to pay back. See the compensation topic.

The Reduced Weekly (24 hours) line turns yellow when your last weekly rest was reduced. A 24-hour rest is then possible only if a 45-hour rest can still follow in time, and a note gives the deadline. The line turns red and struck through when your next weekly rest has to be a regular 45 hours.

Reduced and regular rest
  • Daily rest: regular is 11 hours, or 3 plus 9 hours split. Reduced is 9 hours up to 11 hours. Up to three reduced daily rests are allowed between two weekly rests, and the planner counts them in Reduced (max 3).
  • Weekly rest: regular is 45 hours or more. Reduced is 24 hours up to 45 hours. After a reduced one the next must be regular, unless the international goods option is on.
  • Deadline: a weekly rest has to start within six 24-hour periods after the end of the previous one. Next Weekly Rest shows that moment under No later than.
Tip: A split daily rest of 3 plus 9 hours counts as regular. The planner does not count it as reduced.
Weekly rest compensation

When a weekly rest was shorter than 45 hours, the missing hours must be taken back in one block, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction.

  1. Open the Rest tab. The Compensation card lists every outstanding reduction with the length of the missing rest, the time left before the deadline (or how long it is overdue) and its Deadline.
  2. An overdue item is shown in red.
  3. Tick an item to see its effect. The Possible End Times move by the ticked hours and Selected compensation shows the total.
Tip: If nothing is outstanding the card says 'No reduced weekly rest compensation is currently outstanding.' The card is shown while you are resting.
Tip: A reduction whose deadline passed more than a week ago is no longer listed here. It appears as an infringement in the Infringements report instead.
When you are resting now
  • If the newest activity in your file is a rest, the planner treats it as your current rest and counts from its start.
  • If your data ends before now, up to one week, the planner assumes you have rested since your last recorded activity. A card taken out after the last activity points the same way.
  • A rest in progress does not count as a finished daily or weekly rest. The Next Weekly Rest deadline therefore does not move forward while you rest.
  • In Summary, the rest in progress shows its start and a question-mark badge, because its final length is not known yet.
  • A rest in progress is not used to pay off a compensation either. It is settled by your next upload.
Infringements tab: the last 56 days

On Info the planner has a fourth tab, Infringements. It lists every infringement of your newest file that falls in the last 56 days ending today, with the note 'Showing last 56 days.'

The table has the same columns as the Infringements report: Severity, Rule, Period and Measured / Limit. The heading reads Infringements (N). When there is nothing to show it says 'No infringements detected.' The rows are not clickable here.

Tip: The tab is shown only on Info. When you open Rest planning from a file, use the Infringements report instead.

Legal and report settings

Switches that change how your infringements are analysed and which extra checks are included in your reports.

Open the legal settings
  1. Open the Settings group in the left menu and click Other Settings.
  2. Find the card Legal & report settings. It says 'These options change EU 561/2006 and Working Time Directive (2002/15/EC) analysis results.'
  3. Switch the options you need, then click Save.

These settings belong to your account. They change every report and the planner.

Tip: After you save you see 'Legal & report settings saved.' Reports and the figures on Info are then recalculated with the new settings.
Tip: The same card also holds the file-format options for phone-app uploads, described in the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)'. Save stores everything on the card in one go.
Tip: In the read-only demo the Save button is hidden.
Working-time checks

Four extra checks from the Working Time Directive 2002/15/EC are under Legal rule options. All four are off by default. Working time counts driving and other work only. Breaks and availability do not count.

  • Working time exceeded 6h without the required 30-minute break total. Legal basis: Article 5 of Directive 2002/15/EC. Over 6 hours of work needs breaks of 30 minutes in total, over 9 hours needs 45 minutes. Breaks count in parts of at least 15 minutes.
  • Weekly working time exceeded 60h. Legal basis: Article 4(a) of Directive 2002/15/EC.
  • Average weekly working time over 4 months exceeded 48h. Legal basis: Article 4(b) of Directive 2002/15/EC.
  • Working time exceeded 10h on a day with night work. Legal basis: Article 7 of Directive 2002/15/EC.

Under Night time window (Directive 2002/15/EC, Art. 3(h)), choose when night starts (00:00 to 03:00) and ends (04:00 to 07:00). Use the period your national law defines, at least four hours between 00:00 and 07:00. For example Spain 00:00 to 07:00, Germany and the UK 00:00 to 04:00.

Tip: All the findings from these checks are Serious.
Passenger transport options

Three switches describe passenger transport: Passenger transport by bus, Single occasional passenger service and Journey form available on board.

Only when all three are on, and only for activity on or after 22 May 2024, the analysis applies the passenger-service derogations of Regulation (EU) 2024/1258:

  • The second part of a split break may be 15 minutes instead of 30.
  • A daily rest may start up to one hour later, once if the analysed period lasts 6 days or more and twice if it lasts 8 days or more, when the driving before it did not exceed 7 hours.
  • A weekly rest may start up to 12 days after a regular weekly rest.
Important: Switch these on only for an occasional passenger service under Regulation (EC) No 1073/2009. They loosen the checks for every report in the account.
International goods transport

The option International goods transport: allow two consecutive reduced weekly rests (Reg. 2020/1054, Art. 8(6)). is for drivers in international carriage of goods who take their rests outside the country of establishment.

When it is on, two reduced weekly rests in a row are accepted if there are at least four weekly rests in any four consecutive weeks, two of them regular. Both reductions must be compensated in one block before the next weekly rest.

Tip: When this option is on and the last weekly rest was reduced, the Reduced Weekly (24 hours) line in the rest planner shows a yellow note that the option is allowed under the derogation and that compensation will be owed.
Report timezone

Times in reports, the start of each day and the start of each week (Monday 00:00) use the report timezone. You choose it in Report timezone on Profile, as described in the section 'Your profile and driver record'. The line Resolved timezone: at the bottom of the Legal & report settings card shows which zone is in use.

Free file inspector

A public page that reads one tachograph file without signing in. Use it for a quick look at your card file, for example on your phone.

Inspect a file

The Free file inspector lets you read a driver-card file on the spot. You do not need to sign in.

  1. Open the page at tachomanager.com/app2/inspect. It is a public page without the left menu.
  2. Choose Driver card or Vehicle unit.
  3. Pick a .ddd or .tgd file of up to 50 MB.
  4. For a driver card, choose the Report type: Activities, Infringements, Work summary or Rest planning.
  5. Click Inspect file.

In Vehicle unit mode one upload gives you the tabs Overview, Speed, Over-speeding, Faults & events and Activities.

What the inspector shows
  • Activities: a plain table with Type, Start, End and Duration. Only the first 1000 rows are listed.
  • Infringements: the figures Violations, Activities and Total driving, a chart Weekly driving vs best rest (hours), one card for each finding, a Warnings box and the Legal basis line.
  • Work summary: the same figures as in your account.
  • Rest planning: at present this option shows 'No rest planner data available.' The live planner is available in an account.
  • Overview (vehicle unit): the unit's own data as cards. Speed is a plain list of Time, Max km/h and Avg km/h. Over-speeding, Faults & events and Activities look like the vehicle reports without the day strip.
Tip: A Parser notes box above the report lists anything the file reader had to warn about. The inspector has no day strip or timeline. Create a free account to get them.
Limits and privacy
  • Nothing is saved. The file is read once and discarded, and the page says 'Nothing is saved.'
  • A file can be up to 50 MB. Driver card mode accepts only driver-card files and Vehicle unit mode only vehicle files.
  • The site administrator can switch the inspector off.
Important: You can inspect up to 10 files in 5 minutes in each mode. After that you see 'Too many file inspections were requested. Please wait a few minutes and try again.'
Tip: To keep your files, see the full day timeline and get reminders, create a free account.

Tools: ZIP download, converter, trip calculator

The Tools page offers a trip calculator, a tachograph filename converter and a download that packs all your uploaded files into one ZIP archive.

What is on the Tools page

Open Tools in the left menu. A driver account sees three cards: Trip calculator, Filename converter and Global ZIP download.

  • Global ZIP download is hidden in the read-only demo, because it hands out real files.
  • Bulk upload exists on this page for company accounts only. You upload your own files from the Files page instead: press Upload there.
Download all your files as one ZIP

The Global ZIP download card packs the tachograph files you have uploaded to your account into a single archive. Use it when you want a copy of everything outside the app.

  1. Open Tools and find Global ZIP download. The card tells you how many files are available.
  2. Check the From and To dates. They start at the dates of your first and your latest upload.
  3. Optional: press Last 6 months, Last 12 months, Last year or This year to fill both dates with one click.
  4. Press Download ZIP. Your browser saves the archive.

The dates select files by the day they were uploaded to Tacho Manager, not by the date written inside the file. Your files are in a folder named drivers, followed by your card number.

Tip: Fill in both dates or neither. If only one is filled, the app shows 'Both the from and to dates are required.' If From is later than To, it shows 'The from date must not be after the to date.'
Tip: You can start at most 5 ZIP downloads in 10 minutes. Over that limit the download fails until the time is up, and your browser reports it as a failed download. No email code is needed. If your account is frozen (the app is read-only), the button is disabled and the reason is shown under it.
Convert a tachograph file name (.DDD and .TGD)

The Filename converter card changes only the name of a .ddd or .tgd file from your computer or phone to the other naming convention. The contents stay exactly the same and nothing is stored in your account.

Tip: The steps, the official name layouts and the conditions for the file name are described in the section 'ZIP downloads and the filename converter'. A file that is already stored is renamed with its Convert icon, see the section 'Open, download, convert and delete your files'.
Trip calculator

The Trip calculator estimates the diesel needed for one trip and what is left of the trip price. It runs in your browser. Nothing is saved or sent.

  1. Enter Empty kilometres and Loaded kilometres.
  2. Enter the Trip price and the Diesel price per litre.
  3. Enter Consumption (empty) and Consumption (loaded) in litres per 100 km.
  4. Read Litres (empty), Litres (loaded), Total litres and Profit under the fields.
Tip: The fields start with sample values, so replace them. Profit is the trip price minus the diesel cost only, with no currency symbol. Tolls and other costs are not included.

My eCMR and My DeCA (documents your company assigns to you)

When a company issues an eCMR or a DeCA for you, you can open it on your phone, show its QR code at a check and, for an eCMR, sign it with your finger.

What these documents are
  • An eCMR is the electronic CMR consignment note for a load. It has boxes for the sender, the consignee, the goods and the carrier, and spaces for three signatures.
  • A DeCA is the electronic control document for national road transport in Spain (Orden FOM/2861/2012). Its PDF carries a QR code for roadside inspection.

Your company creates and issues both. You cannot create, change, cancel or delete them. You can open them and, for an eCMR, sign.

Where to find them
  1. Open Work in the left menu.
  2. At the top of the page press My eCMR or My DeCA.
  3. A window opens with one card for each document.
  • Each card shows the reference, the date it was last updated and, for a DeCA, your company's external reference.
  • Only issued documents are listed. Drafts and cancelled documents are never shown to you.
  • Only documents issued or changed in the last 14 days are listed. Older ones disappear from the list.
  • If nothing is assigned, the window says 'You have no eCMR assigned.' or 'You have no DeCA assigned.'
Tip: The company can assign documents to you only when your driver account is linked to it (see Settings, then Link). The Work entry appears in the left menu when a company with the Work module has assigned you a transport order. A document assigned on its own does not add the entry.
Tip: You may receive a notification: 'New eCMR to sign', 'New eCMR assigned' or 'New DeCA assigned', followed by the company name and the document reference.
View, download and share a document
  1. On a document's card, press View PDF. The PDF opens inside the app.
  2. Use the page arrows, the zoom buttons or two fingers to enlarge it. The Fit width button brings it back to the screen width.
  3. Press Download at the top to save the PDF on your phone.
  4. Press Share to send the link of the document through your phone's share menu. The app shares the link, not the file.
Tip: On a narrow screen the Download and Share buttons show only an icon. Both PDFs have fixed wording. A DeCA is in Spanish. An eCMR has French, English and German box labels. They do not change with the app language.
Sign an eCMR

An issued eCMR has three signature buttons on its card: Sign sender, Sign driver and Sign consignee. You collect all three on your phone. For the sender and the consignee you type their name and ID number and have them sign in the box. You sign as the driver yourself.

  1. On the eCMR card, press the button for the signature you need.
  2. Check or type the Signer name. For Sign driver it is filled in from your driver card, and your driving licence number is shown. For the sender and the consignee, type their name and their ID number.
  3. Sign inside the box with your finger ('Sign in the box with your finger').
  4. Press Save signature. There is no eraser: to start over, press Cancel and press the signature button again.

Once a signature is saved, its button is replaced by a green Signed badge. The signature appears as an image in boxes 22 (sender), 23 (driver) or 24 (consignee) of the eCMR PDF, with the signer's name, ID and time.

Tip: If you press Save signature with an empty box, the app says 'Sign in the box first'. If the name or ID is missing, or the save fails, it says 'Could not save signature'. A DeCA has no signature.
Important: You can sign only an eCMR that is issued and assigned to your own driver card.
Show a document at a roadside check
  1. Open Work, then My DeCA or My eCMR.
  2. On the document's card, press View QR.
  3. Let the inspector scan the large QR code. It opens the PDF of the document in their browser, with no login needed.

The address of the PDF is printed under the QR code. You can also open the document with View PDF and show it on your screen.

The CMR of a transport order

A CMR that belongs to a transport order is not in My eCMR. Open Work, click the order, and use CMR PDF to read it or Sign CMR to sign it. The steps are described in the section 'Sign the CMR on your phone'.

Everything you can create or download

The files and documents a driver account can produce, where to find each one and in which language it comes out.

PDF documents
  • eCMR and DeCA PDFs assigned to you. Work → My eCMR or My DeCA → View PDF → Download. The DeCA is in Spanish. The eCMR has French, English and German labels.
  • CMR PDF of an order. Work → click the order → CMR PDF, once your company has created the CMR.
  • Time Registry PDF. If a company has given you access to the Time Registry and has the module: Time Registry → choose the month and the year → Download PDF. It is a Spanish A4 landscape page. The button stays disabled when there is no data for the month or no employer company is assigned to you. See the section 'Time Registry'.
Tip: You cannot create a DeCA, an eCMR or a load order yourself. Your company issues them (see the section 'My eCMR and My DeCA (documents your company assigns to you)'). The file you save with Download in the viewer is named after the title at the top of the viewer.
ZIP archives, original files and file names
  • ZIP of all your files. Tools → Global ZIP download → Download ZIP.
  • ZIP by dates. Files → your card page opens → Download all (next to the Files heading) → choose both dates → Download all. File name driver_[card number]_files.zip. The button appears when you have files.
  • One original file. On the Files page, press the download icon in the file's row.
  • Renamed file. Tools → Filename converter makes a renamed copy of a file from your phone or computer. The arrows icon in a stored file's row renames the stored file between .DDD and .TGD.
  • Files from the phone app's card reader. In the Android app, the smart-card reader saves your driver-card download as a .DDD or .TGD file and uploads it. The format is set under Settings → Other Settings (see the section 'Other Settings (legal and report options)').
Tip: The ZIP buttons and the file downloads are not available in the read-only demo.
What is not created as a file

Your reports, payroll and rest planning are shown on screen. The web app has no PDF, CSV or Excel export for them.

The Documents page in the left menu keeps photos of your own documents, up to two per document (front and back). Documents with an expiry date feed your reminders, and if you are linked to a company the documents are shared with it so it can plan renewals. The page stores your photos and does not create new documents.

Work: your transport orders

Work shows the transport orders your companies have assigned to you, so you can accept them, check in at the stops, add photos and sign the CMR.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app Learn more
What Work is for you

When a transport company gives you an order, it appears under Work. You work it from your phone: confirm that you have received it, navigate to each stop, check in as Loaded or Unloaded, take photos, and collect the signatures on the CMR.

  • Accept order: tells the company you received the order.
  • Loaded and Unloaded: check-ins that record the time and your position.
  • Photo: pictures of a stop.
  • Sign CMR and CMR PDF: the consignment note, signed on your screen.
  • My eCMR and My DeCA: documents your company issued for you outside a transport order. They are described in the section 'My eCMR and My DeCA (documents your company assigns to you)'.
When does Work appear in the menu?
  • You use a driver account with your driver card saved on it.
  • Your account is linked to the company. Ask the company for its invitation code and enter it in Settings, then Link (field Invitation code, button Add company).
  • The company has the Work module active and switched on.
  • The company has assigned at least one order to your driver card.

Once all of this is true, Work appears in the menu under Info. Orders are matched to you by the card number of your driver account. If you work for several companies, the orders of all companies that use Work appear in one list, and each card shows the company name.

Tip: You do not buy or switch on anything yourself. Work for drivers follows what the company has: if the company turns the module off or loses it, its orders leave your list.
Your order list

Each order is a card with its reference, a status badge, the title, the company name, and either Next stop with the place or 'All stops completed'. A green bar shows how many stops are done. Tap a card to open the order.

The list refreshes by itself every minute, so a new order appears without reopening the app. If you have none yet, you read 'No orders assigned to you yet.'

Order statuses
  • Assigned: the order is yours and nothing is checked in yet.
  • In progress: you have checked in at the first stop.
  • Completed: every stop is checked in.
  • Cancelled: the company cancelled it. It stays in your list for the record.
Notifications

When a company assigns you an order, the Tacho Manager Android app on your phone shows a notification titled New transport order. It names the company and the order reference and tells you to open Work. When a company cancels an order, you receive Order cancelled. Both come in your own language.

Tip: Notifications reach the Android app, after you allow notifications for it. They do not reach a web browser. Your order list refreshes by itself every minute, so a new order shows up anyway. You are not notified when the company edits an order, for example when it changes a stop. Open the order page to see the current stops.
The order page

The page shows the title and status, the reference, the company, the truck and trailer, and the company's notes. Below are the stops with their place, address, time window and instructions, then the document buttons, and at the bottom your Activity log.

Done stops show a green badge with the check-in date and time. Photos you took appear under their stop. The page shows the state at the moment you open it and does not update while it stays open, so reopen the order to see changes made by the company.

Accept an order and check in at stops

Accept the order, navigate to each stop, check in as Loaded or Unloaded with your position, and add photos.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app
Accept an order

A new order shows a blue banner: 'Confirm that you have received and accepted this transport order.' Press Accept order. The company then sees Accepted by driver in its log, with the time and your position if available.

Tip: The banner shows only until your first check-in. You can check in without accepting, but accepting lets the company know you have the order.
Navigate to a stop

Each open stop that has a map pin or an address has a button with a turn-sign icon, tooltip Navigate to this stop. It opens Google Maps directions to the pin, or to the place name and address when there is no pin. In a browser the link opens in a new tab. In the Android app it opens outside the app, in your phone's maps or browser.

Check in Loaded or Unloaded
  1. Arrive at the stop.
  2. Press the big button on that stop: Loaded at a loading stop, Unloaded at an unloading stop.
  3. In the window that opens, write Remarks / reservations (optional) if needed, for example damaged goods or a shortage.
  4. Press Confirm check-in. The big button on the stop shows Getting location… while the phone finds your position.

A green badge with the date and time then replaces the button on the stop. After your first check-in the order is In progress, and after the last one it is Completed. You can check in the stops in any order. Cancel in the window closes it without checking in.

Important: A check-in cannot be undone and each stop can be checked in only once. Check in when you are really at the stop.
GPS, and what if it is missing

Check-ins, photos, acceptance and signatures all carry your phone's position when it is available. The app asks the phone for an accurate position and waits up to 15 seconds.

If it cannot get one, for example because location access is blocked or there is no signal, the app asks 'Could not get the device location. Check in without GPS?'. If you continue, the check-in is saved without a position. If you decline, nothing is saved, so you can turn on location and try again. Photos, acceptance and signatures are saved without a position and without asking.

Tip: To get the position stamp, allow location access for the app (or your browser) in the phone settings and switch location on before you arrive. Without a position, the CMR PDF says 'GPS: n/a' on the page of that check-in or signature.
The distance check

If the company pinned the stop on a map and your check-in has a position, the app records how far you were from the pin. If you were more than 2 km away, the company sees a warning flag next to the check-in. The check-in is never blocked. Check in at the stop to avoid questions.

Add photos to a stop
  1. On the stop, press Photo.
  2. Take a picture with the camera. Depending on your phone, you may also be able to pick a picture you already have.
  3. Wait until the thumbnail appears under the stop.

Photos can be JPEG, PNG or WebP, up to 10 MB each. Tap a thumbnail to open it full size. The company can see your photos, and they are kept with your position when available. The Photo button disappears when the order is completed or cancelled.

Tip: You cannot delete a photo from the app, so check the picture before you send it. If you send many photos in a short time, the app asks you to slow down; wait a little and try again.
Your activity log

The Activity log at the bottom of the order lists everything recorded: Assigned, Accepted by driver, Loaded, Unloaded, Photo added, CMR signed, Order modified and Cancelled. Tap the pin icon on a line to see the recorded position on a map.

Completed and cancelled orders

You can open a completed order any time to read it and to download the CMR PDF. A cancelled order shows 'This order was cancelled. It stays in the history for the record; check-ins, photos and CMR are closed.'

Sign the CMR on your phone

The company fills in the CMR for your order. You collect the sender, driver and consignee signatures on your screen, then download the PDF.

Module: Work orders & e-CMROpen in the app
When you can sign

The company creates the CMR for the order. Until it does, the order page has no CMR buttons. Once the CMR exists, you see CMR PDF and Sign CMR. You cannot change the boxes yourself; the company fills them in.

Who signs what

The CMR has three signature roles: Sender, Driver (carrier) and Consignee. On your phone you can collect all three: the sender signs at loading, you sign as the carrier, and the consignee signs at delivery. Each role can sign only once.

Sign the CMR
  1. Open the order and press Sign CMR.
  2. Next to the role, press Sign.
  3. Type the Signer name (required). For the sender and the consignee you can also type a DNI/ID (optional).
  4. Write Remarks / reservations (optional) if there is something to record, for example damage seen at delivery.
  5. Let the person sign inside the box with a finger or stylus. Clear starts again.
  6. Press Accept signature. It stays disabled until there is a drawing and a name.

The role row then shows the time, the name and the remarks. The phone's position is attached to the signature when available; the app does not ask if it is missing.

Important: After the first signature the company can no longer change the content of the CMR, and a role that has signed cannot sign again. Make sure the boxes are right before the first signature.
Download or show the CMR PDF

Press CMR PDF to open the document in the viewer. Use Download to save it and Share to send its public link. The PDF shows the three signatures in boxes 22, 23 and 24 with names and times, your name and driving licence number (or card number when no licence number is saved) in box 23, and one amendment page for each signature and check-in with the position.

Tip: The CMR boxes are printed in French, English and German, whatever language your app uses. The load order PDF is a company document and has no button in your view.
The QR code on the PDF

The CMR PDF carries a QR code. Scanning it opens the same PDF without a login, so you can show the code on your phone screen. The link works until 30 days after the order is completed. If the order is cancelled, the link says that the document was cancelled.

Payroll

The Payroll page shows a pay forecast for you, worked out from your most recent file with the rules of each company that gave you payroll access.

What the Payroll page shows

The Payroll page shows what you are expected to earn in the current pay period and in recent earlier periods, day by day. It is calculated from your most recent file with the payroll settings of the company that gave you access.

Tip: It is a forecast on screen. The app does not create a payslip, a PDF or a spreadsheet from it.
How to get the Payroll page

The entry Payroll only appears in your left menu when a company has given you payroll access. For that to happen:

  • Your account must be linked to the company (see the section 'Linking to your company').
  • The company must have the Payroll module active and switched on.
  • The company must tick Payroll access on your driver record, and the record must carry your own card number.
Tip: Without access the page says No payroll access yet. Forecasts appear here once a company grants you payroll access.
Open your forecast
  1. Click Payroll in the left menu.
  2. Read the forecast. The subtitle, Forecast from your most recent file, names the file it was built from.

You can also open Files, click a file name and choose Payroll in the File reports window. The figures are still built from your most recent file.

Tip: If a company tab says No forecast available., no forecast could be built yet. Upload a file under Files with Upload. If it says Could not compute this company's forecast: followed by a reason, tell your company.
Several companies

You get one tab for each company that gave you payroll access. With only one company there are no tabs, just the company's name.

Above the forecast you see the company's details, if it has filled them in: VAT / Tax ID, Company email, Address and Phone. Each company calculates your pay with its own settings.

What you can and cannot do
  • You can read your forecast and open the ? explanations.
  • You cannot recalculate a period, cancel a night or add an extra amount. Only the company can.

Reading your forecast

What each part of the Payroll page means: the summary, the periods, the daily table, locations, nights and extra amounts.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
The summary at the top
  • Total amount: your total for the current period.
  • Base: a fixed amount per pay period. Extras: everything on top of it, which is the sum of all your daily amounts.
  • On the right: Pay period (monthly, biweekly or weekly), Variant (what you are paid for), Period (from and to) and Origin (your company's home base).
  • A text at the bottom of the card is a notice from your company, when there is one.
  • A yellow box lists warnings, for example when a file has no activities.
  • The green ? button opens How is this calculated?, a list written from your company's settings.
Periods
  • The first line has a Current badge. Press a line to open it and see the days.
  • You see the current period and any earlier period that ended since the first day of last month. Older periods are not shown to drivers.
  • The current period is an estimate. It changes when you upload a newer file.
  • A finished period is calculated once from the first file downloaded after it ended, then saved. Its note reads Saved snapshot from the first download after the month ended, followed by the file name.
  • If your company recalculates a saved period, the new figure replaces the old one.
The daily table
  • Date.
  • Location: country and region of the day. Where a day started in one country and ended in another, you see both with an arrow.
  • Work day: Yes with your hours worked, or No.
  • Night outside: Yes when the night of that day counts as outside your company's home base, otherwise No. Your company pays an allowance for it if it pays for nights.
  • Amount: the money for that day, in EUR.

The small ? next to a location (tooltip Break details) opens a box with the Zone (national or international) and the Break start, Break end and Duration of the long rest covering that day. Times use your company's report timezone.

Tip: Amounts are written like 1.234,56 EUR, with a comma for decimals. Days before your company's Working with company since date earn nothing.
Regions and map pins

If your company uses GPS tracking in payroll and you drove a tracked truck, the Location column can show the regions the truck passed through. Press the red pin to see the position on a map: Workday start (departure), Break start (arrival) or Rest location.

When more than two regions are listed, press the + number to show the whole route and the collapse icon to hide it.

Night outside: what you may see
  • Yes: the night counts as outside your company's home base.
  • No: no night outside for that day.
  • A struck-through Yes with a red Nullified badge: the company cancelled the allowance. The reason it gave is written below.
  • Yes with a blue Added by company badge: the company added an allowance the automatic detection missed. The reason is written below.
  • A yellow GPS: at origin badge: a warning that GPS places the truck inside the origin zone that night. Hold the mouse over it for the distance.
Extra amounts and notes

Under a day's amount you may see an italic note followed by a figure, for example Truck wash · +20,00 EUR. This is an extra amount your company added to that day. A figure with a minus sign is a deduction. It is already included in the day's amount.

How your pay is calculated

Which hours, kilometres, nights and weekly rests count, what a daily cap does, and what to check when a figure looks wrong.

Module: PayrollOpen in the app
What can add to your pay

Your company chooses which of these apply. They are added up for each day.

  • A Base amount for each pay period.
  • Per kilometer: kilometres driven that day times a rate.
  • Per work hour: hours that count as work times a rate.
  • Per night outside origin: a fixed amount for each night away from home base, with one rate for national nights and one for international nights.
  • A weekly rest of 24 to 45 hours, or of 45 hours and more, taken away from home base: a fixed amount once per week.
Tip: The ? button lists the variants your company uses, with their rates.
Hours and kilometres
  • Hours: your company decides which activities count: driving, other work and breaks shorter than 15 minutes. Availability and longer breaks never count. The company can also set a maximum number of paid hours per day.
  • Days are cut at midnight UTC. Work that crosses midnight UTC is split between two days.
  • Kilometres come from the odometer values stored on your driver card with its place records. Strange readings, for example a jump of more than 3,000 km or a lower value after a truck change, are skipped.
  • On days where the card has no distance, the distance from truck GPS tracking can be used if your company uses it.
Nights outside origin

Your company sets a home base. A day counts as a night away when the card shows a place outside that base during the day. Those places are the locations you enter at the start and end of work periods and, on newer tachographs, the recorded satellite position.

  • If every place that day is at home base, the night does not count.
  • If the card has no place for the day, your last known place is used when it was recorded no more than 36 hours before the end of that day and the card shows some activity that day.
  • A night in a different country from the home country is paid at the international rate. Any other night is paid at the national rate.
  • If your company uses GPS, the position of the parked truck during your daily rest can decide instead.
Tip: Always enter the correct place when you start and end work, because nights are decided from it.
Weekly rests away from home

If your company pays for weekly rests, a rest of at least 24 hours taken away from home base can earn one allowance per week. It is cancelled if you also took a rest of the same kind (24 to 45 hours, or 45 hours and more) at home base that week. A rest whose location is unknown neither pays nor cancels.

Daily cap and start date
  • If your company set a Daily pay cap, kilometres, hours and nights together cannot pay more than that for one day. Weekly-rest allowances and extra amounts are added after the cap.
  • If your company set a Working with company since date, nothing before it counts. The base of the first period is reduced in proportion to the days from your start date to the end of that period.
If a figure looks wrong
  1. Check that your most recent file is the one you expect. The forecast always uses your newest file.
  2. Open the ? button and read which variants and rates apply.
  3. Open the break details and the Location column for the day in question.
  4. Tell your company which day looks wrong. Only the company can cancel a night, add a night, add an extra amount or recalculate a period.
Tip: Missing places or odometer readings on the card lead to missing nights or kilometres. They are not an error in the app.

GPS locations in your payroll and rest summary

GPS Tracking is a company module. As a driver you do not set it up. When a company you are linked to tracks its trucks, tracker positions can refine the locations you see in your rest summary and in your payroll.

Module: GPS tracking
What GPS means for a driver account

A company can connect the GPS trackers of its trucks to Tacho Manager and map each tracker to one truck. When you drove such a truck, the stored positions of the truck can be matched to the times on your driver card.

  • You do not enter any GPS settings. There is no GPS Tracking page in your menu.
  • You cannot open a live map of a truck. That view is only for company accounts.
  • The tachograph stays the source of truth for your driving and rest times.
Tip: The tracker belongs to the truck. The GPS Tracking module does not read your phone.
GPS pins in your rest planning summary
  1. Open Files in the left menu.
  2. Click the name of a file. The File reports window opens.
  3. Choose Rest planning. The Summary tab is the first tab shown.

Each driving leg shows where it started and ended. When a company you are linked to has GPS Tracking on, and a tracker position of the truck you drove exists within about 30 minutes of the start or end, the place is named by region and comes from the tracker. Hover over the pin to read Open GPS location on map.

A leg through several regions shows them in order. Click +N to show all regions and the collapse icon to fold them.

Tip: Without a tracker position, the summary shows the location recorded on your card, with a pin that reads Open map.
GPS pins in your payroll

Payroll appears in your left menu only when a linked company has given you payroll access and has the payroll module active. The company's own payroll settings decide how GPS is used in your figures.

  • Region and route: the Location column can list the regions the truck crossed on each workday, for example Region A → Region B.
  • Night allowance: if the company set an origin base, GPS can confirm whether the truck spent the night away from it.
  • Distance: on days where the card gave no distance and the company pays per kilometre, the tracker's distance can fill the gap.

Pins in the Location column show the Workday start (departure), the Break start (arrival) and the Rest location. Click a pin to open a map window that is titled with the pin's name. It shows the position, the date and time of the position and the coordinates. Click +N on a long route to see all regions.

Tip: The split between national and international keeps following the countries recorded on your card. GPS never changes the country. Where the card has a distance for a day, the card figure is used.
Why you may not see GPS pins

GPS is added only when everything below is true. If one point is missing, you see the locations from your card instead. This is normal.

  • You are linked to a company, and that link is active.
  • That company has the GPS Tracking module switched on.
  • The truck you drove has a tracker mapped to it.
  • The company's tracker sent positions for the time you drove.
  • For payroll, the company also uses the option to use GPS data in payroll.
  • For the route and pins in payroll, the company has set an origin location and radius in its payroll settings.

Map history and location maps

Maps built from the positions recorded inside your own tachograph files. They need no module.

Show the route history of your card

Tachographs that support satellite navigation record positions and store them on the driver card. Tacho Manager can draw these positions on a map. They come from the files you uploaded, so the map is only as recent as your last upload.

  1. Open Files in the left menu.
  2. Click the name of a file. You can also click Reports, which opens the options of your newest file. The File reports window opens.
  3. Choose Map history at the end of the list.

The Route history map opens. It reads your three newest files.

Choose the period and read the map
  • The window opens on the last 24 hours. Click Today, Last 24h, Last 7 days or Last 30 days, or set From and To (a date and a time each; the end must be after the start). A period longer than 90 days is cut back to the latest 90 days.
  • Above the map you see the distance from the odometer, the number of days and the number of events.
  • Each day has its own colour; click a day under the map to zoom to it. Green and red symbols mark the start and the end of the work day, a blue globe a border crossing.
  • The player under the map moves a blue arrow along the route. Drag the slider, or press play and choose the speed. The buttons next to play jump to the previous or the next event, and Follow keeps the arrow in the middle of the map.
  • The Timeline lists the events; click one to jump there. Switch the map between Streets, Light, Dark and Satellite, and use Export GPX to download the route as a GPX file.
Tip: If nothing was recorded in the period you see No GNSS positions in this period. Your newest file may be older than the period. Choose a longer period, set From and To around the dates of the file, or upload a newer file.
Location pins in your daily activity

In an Activities report, entries that carry a position show a small pin button. Hover over it to read Open location map. Click it to open a map window with the position, its coordinates and a red marker.

If the map cannot be shown, the window offers a link to open the position on OpenStreetMap.

Fuel tickets

Upload photos of your fuel receipts for your company's trucks and follow their status. Your company checks and confirms the tickets; you only see your own.

Module: Fuel ticketsOpen in the app Learn more
When Fuel tickets is available to you

Fuel tickets is an optional module of your company. Fuel tickets appears in your menu only when all of this is true: your account is linked to a company, that company has the module active and switched on, and the company has switched on Fuel tickets access for you.

Tip: If the entry is missing, ask your company to switch on Fuel tickets access in your driver record. If you are not linked yet, see the section 'Linking to your company'.

The tickets you upload are stored in your company's account, not in your own. Your company reads them, checks the values and confirms them.

Upload a fuel ticket
  1. Open Fuel tickets in the left menu.
  2. In the card Upload a ticket, press the field Ticket photo / invoice and take or choose a photo of the receipt. A PDF also works. On a phone this field can open the camera.
  3. Choose the Truck you fuelled. The page remembers the truck you picked last on that device and selects it for you next time.
  4. Type the Odometer (km) if you know it. This is optional.
  5. Press Upload. The message 'Uploaded — reading the ticket…' tells you the photo is queued.
  • Accepted files: photos in JPEG, PNG, WebP or HEIC format, and PDF documents.
  • Maximum size: 20 MB per file.
Tip: Drivers upload single fuel tickets only. The choice Type (Fuel ticket or Company invoice) is for company accounts.
Tip: If you are linked to more than one company that gave you fuel access, choose the right Truck: it decides which company receives the ticket. Without a matching truck the upload can be refused with a request to choose the company.
Take a photo that can be read
  • Lay the receipt flat.
  • Use good light.
  • Make sure all the text is readable, especially the litres and the date.
Tip: If the photo cannot be read, the ticket shows Failed. Take a new photo and upload it again; the same file cannot be uploaded twice.
Follow your tickets

Your tickets are listed in the card Tickets. There is one chip per truck, with the number of tickets on it. Press a chip to see the tickets for that truck and press it again to hide them. The table shows Date, Diesel, AdBlue, Odometer, Uploaded by, Status and Actions.

  • Reading…: your photo is being read automatically. The page refreshes by itself.
  • Needs review: the values were read and wait for your company to check them.
  • Confirmed: your company accepted the values.
  • Duplicate: the same file, or the same refuel, is already recorded.
  • Failed: the photo could not be read. The row says 'Retake the photo and upload again.'
Tip: A small magic-wand icon next to an odometer means the value was estimated (Odometer estimated).
Open a ticket (read-only)
  1. Press the chip of a truck.
  2. Press Review on a row.
  3. You see the photo and the values that were read: Diesel (L), AdBlue (L), Odometer, Truck and Date.
  4. Press Close when you are done.

You cannot edit, confirm or delete tickets. Only your company can. If a value is wrong, tell your company so they can correct it.

What you see and what you do not
  • You see only the tickets you uploaded yourself.
  • You do not see consumption figures, the evolution chart or the consumption alerts. Those are views for the company.
  • You cannot change the calculation settings. Your company manages them.

Time Registry

See your own monthly working-time registry, built from your tachograph card, and download it as a PDF when an employer company is assigned to your record.

Module: Time registryOpen in the app Learn more
When Time Registry is available to you

Time Registry is an optional module of your company. It appears in your menu only when a company that holds your driver card has the module active and switched on, and has switched on Time registry access for you.

Tip: If the entry is missing, ask your company to switch on Time registry access in your driver record. If you are not linked yet, see the section 'Linking to your company'.
Check your legal details

The registry shows your DNI / NIF and your Social Security number in the Worker block; an empty value shows as a dash. You can fill them in yourself.

  1. Open Profile in the left menu.
  2. Choose the Driver tab. The card My driver shows your name and card number.
  3. Press Edit my details.
  4. Fill in DNI / NIF and Social Security number.
  5. Press Save.
Tip: Settings controlled by your company, such as the employer company and the date you started with the company, cannot be edited from a driver account.
Open your registry
  1. Open Time Registry in the left menu.
  2. Choose the Month and the Year. You do not need to choose a driver: your own card is selected for you. The year list covers the current year and the five years before it.
  3. Wait for 'Calculating the registry…'. The table appears.

The registry is built from the card files uploaded to your account. If a month has no activity, the page says 'No card activity for this month.'

Read the table

At the top you see the Company with its CIF / NIF and Workplace, and the Worker block with your DNI / NIF and Social Security no. A missing value shows as a dash.

  • Date: day and month, with the weekday.
  • Start and End: the real first and last time of the shift. A small +1 after the end means the shift finished the next day.
  • Driving, Other work and Breaks: hours and minutes.
  • Effective total: driving plus other work.
  • MONTH TOTAL: the totals and the number of days worked.

Only days with a shift are listed.

How your hours are calculated
  • One row is one shift, not one calendar day. Your activities belong to the same shift until you have a rest of nine hours or more.
  • A shift appears on the day it starts. A night shift that ends the next day is a single row with its real end time and a +1.
  • Effective total = driving + other work.
  • Availability can stretch the start and end of a shift, but it is not added to the effective total.
  • Breaks are the gaps inside a shift that are shorter than nine hours.
  • Times and the month limits follow the Report timezone set in your Profile.
Tip: Only what the tachograph card recorded is counted. Work away from the vehicle, such as loading, waiting or paperwork, may need a complementary record.
Which card file is used

Each month is built from one card file. For a month that is already over, it uses the first file dated after the month ended. If no file is dated after the month ended, which is always the case for the current month, it uses your most recent file.

Tip: To get a complete closed month, upload a card download made after the month ended. A driver card keeps only a limited history, so download and upload your card regularly.
Download the PDF
  1. Choose the month and the year.
  2. Check that the table shows hours.
  3. Press Download PDF.

The button is enabled only when the month has card activity and an employer company is recorded for your driver record. A driver account has no setting for choosing the employer company. If the page shows No company assigned to this driver, the button stays grey, but the table still shows your hours. In that case ask your company to create the registry PDF from its own Time Registry page.

  • The PDF is an A4 landscape document for one month.
  • It is always in Spanish, whatever your app language, with the title 'Registro de jornada laboral'.
  • It shows the employer ('Empresa') and you as the worker ('Trabajador'), one line per calendar day, the month total and signature lines 'Firma de la empresa' and 'Firma del trabajador'.
  • The file is named fichaje_, then your card number, then _YYYY-MM.pdf. For December 2025 the name ends in _2025-12.pdf.
Tip: Missing details print as a dash on the PDF. Check your legal details first, then print the PDF and have the company and yourself sign it.
If the page is empty or the PDF is greyed out
  • 'No card activity for this month.': no card file with activity for that month is uploaded. Upload your card file.
  • No company assigned to this driver: no employer company is recorded for your driver record, so the PDF stays off. Ask your company to create the PDF from its own Time Registry page.
  • Some legal data is missing: fill in your DNI / NIF and Social Security number under Profile, on the Driver tab.
  • Fewer days than you expect: check which card files are uploaded to your account.

Trip Notes

Write short notes about your trips, with the place where you were if you wish. Your notes are private unless you share them with a company.

What trip notes are

Trip notes are short text notes that you write in your driver account, for example a parking place, a delay at a loading dock or a damage you noticed. Each note is saved with its date and time and, if you wish, the place where you were.

Open Trip Notes in the left menu to see all your notes, newest first. The Info page also has a Trip Notes card with your five newest notes, a button Add note and a button View all notes.

Tip: Trip notes exist in driver accounts only. A company account that opens the page sees a message saying so.
Add a note
  1. Open Trip Notes and select Add note. You can also select Add note on the Info page.
  2. Type your text in Note. A note can hold up to 4000 characters.
  3. If you want, select Attach current location. The next topic explains it.
  4. Select Save note.

The note appears at the top of the list with the date and time it was saved. Save note stays disabled until you have typed something.

Attach your location to a note
  1. In the window Add trip note select Attach current location.
  2. If your phone or browser asks for permission to use your location, allow it.
  3. Wait while the button shows Locating…. The app waits up to 15 seconds.
  4. When the line next to the buttons reads Location attached, select Save note. To drop the location, select Clear.
  • Location access was denied. You refused the permission. Allow location for the app or the browser in your device settings and try again.
  • Location is not available in this browser. The browser you use cannot give a location.
  • Could not get location. The device did not give a position, sometimes followed by a reason. Try again.

The location is read once, at the moment you select the button, and saved with that note only. The app does not follow you. In your list a pin icon marks the notes that have a location (tooltip Has location).

Open and read a note

Select a note in the list to open it. The window Trip note shows the date and time, the full text and, if there is one, the location as latitude, longitude and the accuracy in metres.

  • Open in map opens the place on OpenStreetMap in a new tab.
  • Show map shows a small map with a red pin inside the window. Hide map folds it again.
  • If the small map cannot load, the window offers a link to open the place on OpenStreetMap instead.

Notes are listed 30 per page. Use the page numbers at the bottom to move between pages. The top of the page shows how many notes you have in total.

Delete a note
  1. Find the note in Trip Notes.
  2. Select the red bin button at the right end of its row.
  3. Confirm in the window that opens, or select Cancel.
Important: A deleted note cannot be recovered. A company that you shared your notes with loses the deleted note as well. Notes can be deleted on the Trip Notes page only, not on the card of Info.
Tip: The question in the confirmation window is currently written in Spanish, whatever language the app uses. The buttons read Cancel and Delete.
Share your notes with a company

Your notes are private. Nobody sees them unless you share them with a company you are linked to. Sharing is off by default for every company you link.

  1. Open Settings and select Link.
  2. In the list Linked companies, find the company.
  3. Turn on Share trip notes in that row. The switch saves at once.
  • The company can only read your notes. It cannot add, change or delete them.
  • It sees all your notes, old and new, with dates and locations.
  • Each company has its own switch.
  • Turn the switch off at any time. The company stops seeing the notes at once.
Tip: Sharing cannot be changed in the read-only demo.
What trip notes cannot do
  • You cannot edit a note after saving it. Delete it and write a new one.
  • You cannot attach photos or files. A note is text plus an optional location.
  • The date and time are set by the app when you save. You cannot change them.
  • In the read-only demo you can read notes but not add or delete them.
  • If your account is frozen, adding and deleting notes is blocked with the message 'Your account is frozen. Renew your subscription to make changes.'

Linked companies and who sees what

Your driver account is private. A company receives your files only after you link your account to it, and you stay in control of what else is shared.

Who sees your data

Your driver account is private. Nothing reaches a company until you link your account to it with the company's invitation code. After linking, the company receives your driver details, your card files and your documents, and your trip notes only if you switch on Share trip notes for that company. The company decides which module entries you see in your menu.

Tip: You can remove a company at any time, but the copies it already holds stay with it. The steps, the messages and the details are described in the section 'Linking to your company'.
Support access by the platform administrator

To help with a problem, a platform administrator can open a support session in your account. The administrator then works with the same screens and data as you.

  • A support session ends by itself after one hour.
  • Each support session is recorded.
  • During a support session, deleting the account, paying for plans and opening the payment portal are blocked.

Modules in your menu

Add-on modules belong to the companies you are linked to. A module appears in your menu only when a company has it and allows you to use it.

Which module entries can appear
  • Payroll: a linked company allowed payroll access for you, has the Payroll module and has it switched on.
  • Time Registry: a linked company allowed time registry access for you, has the module and has it switched on.
  • Fuel tickets: a linked company allowed fuel tickets access for you, has the module and has it switched on.
  • Work: a linked company that has the Work module assigned at least one order to you. The assignment is the permission.
No Modules page for driver accounts

The Modules entry under Settings is only for company accounts, and the tab Modules on the Billing page is not shown to drivers. The app does not offer modules for sale to driver accounts. The company has the modules in its plan, switches them on, and you use them through your own menu.

Why a module is missing from your menu

Check these points, and ask your company if you are unsure:

  • You are not linked to a company yet. Link on the Link page.
  • The company has not allowed that module for you. The company does this in your driver record.
  • The company does not have the module, or its plan has ended.
  • The company switched the module off for itself on its Modules page.
  • For Work: no company has assigned an order to you yet.

Subscription for your driver account

If plans exist for driver accounts, the Billing page shows your plan and lets you choose and pay for one. Without such plans the entry is hidden.

When you see Billing

The entry Billing under Settings is shown only when at least one paid plan exists for driver accounts. If there is only a free plan, the entry is hidden. It is never shown in the read-only demo.

The page is titled Billing. As a driver you only get the tab Subscriptions. There is no tab Modules for driver accounts.

Read the Current plan card
  • Plan: the name of your plan and its status.
  • Price: Free, or the price together with the period it covers.
  • Renews / expires: the date your plan ends, or No end date.

If you have no plan, the card tells you that you have no active subscription and asks you to choose one below. The number of drivers is not shown for driver accounts.

Choose and pay for a plan
  1. Open Settings, then Billing.
  2. Under Available plans, find the plan. For a paid plan pick a period in Billing period. The list offers 1, 3, 6 and 12 months with the total price and a discount where the plan has one.
  3. Select Subscribe. You are taken to the secure payment page of Stripe.
  4. Pay. You return to the Billing page, which shows Subscription updated. Thank you! If you leave without paying, it shows Checkout cancelled. No changes were made.

A free plan has an Activate button instead. It starts at once and needs no payment. After your first payment the button Manage billing appears on the Current plan card and opens the secure customer page of Stripe for your payment details.

Tip: Each payment buys one period only. The app does not charge you again by itself. The topic 'Renew or change your plan' explains how to continue when the period ends.
Renew or change your plan
  • While a paid plan is running, its own card shows the button Renew. Renewing early adds the new period after your current end date, so you do not lose any paid days. A free plan shows Current plan instead, which cannot be selected.
  • A card that shows Switching now restarts your billing period. starts the new plan as soon as the payment is confirmed. The new period is counted from today, so the time left on your current plan is not added.
  • A card without that warning keeps your remaining time: the new period is counted from the end date of your current plan.
Tip: Check the end date under Renews / expires. The item Subscription expiry on the Reminders page can warn you in the Notifications panel before the plan ends.
What happens when your plan ends

When the end date passes, the plan stops. If it was a paid plan and nothing replaces it, your account is frozen. Nothing in this process deletes your account or your files.

  • A yellow notice at the top says your account is frozen and the app is read-only until you renew.
  • You can still sign in, open your files and reports and download single files.
  • You cannot change data: uploading files, adding or deleting trip notes and changing your driver details stop with the message 'Your account is frozen. Renew your subscription to make changes.' The Global ZIP download on the Tools page is switched off as well.
  • Billing and account deletion stay available, so you can still renew.
  1. Open Settings and select Billing.
  2. Choose a plan and pay, or activate a free plan.
  3. When the payment is confirmed, the account is no longer frozen.
Tip: A platform administrator can also freeze an account by hand. Paying does not lift that kind of freeze, so contact support.

Pages (legal and information)

The group Pages in the left menu lists the information pages published for driver accounts, for example a privacy policy or a cookie policy.

What the Pages group is

The platform administrator can publish pages with legal or company information, for example a privacy policy, a cookie policy or a legal notice. Every published page you may open is listed under Pages in the left menu, with its title as the menu entry. The same pages are also linked in a row at the bottom of the page.

Right under the pages the left menu always has the entry Help. It opens the Help centre inside the app, even when no page is published.

Tip: Which pages exist depends on what the administrator published. If no page is published for driver accounts, the heading Pages does not appear.
Open a page
  1. Scroll down the left menu to the group Pages.
  2. Select the title of the page.
  3. Read the page. It opens inside the app, so you stay signed in and keep the left menu.
Who can open which page

The administrator decides for each page whether it is visible to everybody, to company accounts, to driver accounts, or to a mix of them.

  • When you are signed in, you see the pages that are public or meant for driver accounts.
  • A page marked public can be read without signing in.
  • A page you may not open, or that is not published, shows the message Page not found.

Your data and deleting your account

What your driver account holds, who can see it, how to edit your details, how to take a copy of your files, and how to delete your files or the whole account.

What your account holds and who sees it
  • Your card files and your driver profile.
  • Your documents on the Documents page.
  • Your trip notes.
  • Your recovery email and your report timezone.

You see all of it. A company you are linked to receives your files, profile details and documents as described in the section 'Linking to your company', and your trip notes only if you switch on Share trip notes for that company. A platform administrator can open a recorded support session of one hour that cannot delete your account or change billing.

Edit your details

Set your Recovery email and Report timezone under Profile, and your name, DNI / NIF and Social Security number on the Driver tab with Edit my details. See the section 'Your profile and driver record'.

Tip: Payroll and time registry settings are managed by your company. The card number can only be changed by uploading the file of a renewed card.
Download your files

Take a copy of your files with Global ZIP download on Tools. It is described in the section 'Tools: ZIP download, converter, trip calculator'.

Tip: The download is not available in the read-only demo or while your account is frozen.
Delete your driver record and all files

To delete only your driver record and its files, use Delete driver and all files in the red Danger zone on the Driver tab of Profile. The steps are described in the section 'Your profile and driver record'. Copies that linked companies already hold are not removed by this: only deleting the whole account removes the copies of the companies you are still linked to.

Tip: You keep your login. A frozen account cannot use this button.
Delete the whole account
  1. Open Profile at the bottom of the left menu. On the tab Profile, check that Recovery email is filled in.
  2. Open the tab Security.
  3. In the card Delete account, select Request account deletion and confirm the question.
  4. Open your mailbox. The recovery address receives an email with a confirmation link. The link works for 60 minutes.
  5. Open the link. The deletion starts as soon as the page opens, and the page then confirms that the account was deleted.
  • Only the primary account administrator can request the deletion.
  • Without a recovery email the card tells you to add one first, because the link is sent there.
  • The deletion is not possible in the read-only demo, and not during a support session of a platform administrator.
Important: Opening the link from the email carries out the deletion at once, without a further question. Do not open or forward the link unless you are sure. If you did not ask for it, ignore the email: nothing is deleted until the link is opened.
What the deletion removes

The deletion is permanent and cannot be undone. It removes:

  • All files and records of your driver account, including your trip notes and your settings.
  • Your login.
  • Your driver record and the files copied for you by the companies you are still linked to at that moment. Those companies lose the copies.
  • All links to companies.
Important: Download your files first, for example with Global ZIP download. A company whose link you removed earlier keeps the copies it already holds.
Switch the account to a company account

To switch to a company account, remove every linked company first and then use the card Switch account type on Profile. The steps and conditions are described in the section 'Password and account type'.

Frequently asked questions

Account & getting started

Is a driver account free?

Yes. Driver accounts are free and are limited to one driver card, without vehicle access. They have no paid plan and no Modules page: add-on modules such as Payroll appear in your menu only when a linked company has the module and gives you access.

The verification email did not arrive, or I confirmed it and the app still shows Demo mode. What now?

Check the spam folder and make sure the recovery email was typed correctly. The link is valid for 24 hours and your username and email stay reserved until then, so if you mistyped the email, register again with the correct email and another username. Clicking the link activates the account but does not sign you in: press Login and sign in with your username and password.

I cannot sign in. Can I use my email address, and what if I forgot my password?

Sign in with your username and password, not with your email address. If you forgot the password, press Forgot password? on the sign-in page, type your recovery email and press Send reset link. The link in the email works once and for 60 minutes.

How do I replay the quick tutorial or find help inside the app?

Press Help in the left menu, right under the Pages group. The Help centre opens inside the app, with a search box, the Driver account and Company account guides and these questions. Press Start the quick tutorial at the top or bottom of the page to replay the six-step tour that opens by itself on a newly registered account.

My account is new and Files says 'Set up your driver record'. What do I do?

Your driver record is created from your own driver card. In the Android app connect a smart-card reader, insert your card and press Download card in the Smart Card Reader card on Info; the first card you read creates the record. The buttons on the Files page cannot create it: Read card (Android app) is only a hint and stays greyed out, and saving from Upload driver card file is refused for a driver account.

Files & uploads

Which tachograph files can I upload?

The driver-card file you downloaded from your card, with the extension .ddd or .tgd and up to 50 MB. Vehicle-unit files (named like V_...) are refused with 'Only driver card files (C_...) are accepted here', and so are ZIP and other archives. Open Files, press Upload and select the file; in the Android app you can also read the card directly.

Why does my upload say 'Upload discarded'?

The file does not belong to your driver record: the card number in the file, the card number in the file name or the driving licence number differs from yours. Upload only files from your own card. If you got a new card, upload a file from it: when the driving licence number matches the one stored, the file is accepted and your card number is updated.

I uploaded two files this week but only one remains. Why?

By default the app keeps one driver-card file for each calendar week, Monday to Sunday: the one with the newest download date. The others are deleted automatically, also from the copies held by your linked companies. Uploading an older file for a week that already has a newer one can leave the older file out of the list although the upload looks successful.

How often should I upload my card?

The app reminds you when your newest file is older than 28 days; this limit is fixed. You choose how early the reminder starts in the card Driver upload on the Reminders page, and in the Android app you can tick Push notification to get it on your phone.

Reports & rest rules

Why does my report look empty?

Reports are built from the file you open, so first upload your card file under Files; until then Info says no file has been uploaded. Infringements opens on the last 56 days ending today, so findings in an older file stay hidden until you choose a longer period such as All. The Speed report reads vehicle-unit files, which a driver account usually does not have, so it is often empty.

How do I see when I must take my next rest?

Open Info: your rest planner is there, calculated from your newest file and the current time. Working shows Next Daily Rest and Next Weekly Rest with the latest start under No later than, and Rest shows the earliest end of the rest you are taking now.

Why does the Rest tab say 'Last activity is not rest'?

The planner treats you as resting when your newest activity is a rest, when the card was taken out after your last activity, or when your data ends no more than a week before now. Otherwise, for example when the file ends with driving or other work and is older than a week, the Rest tab shows this message. Upload a newer file; the Working tab still shows your counters and deadlines.

What is the difference between a reduced and a regular rest?

A regular daily rest is 11 hours (or 3 plus 9 hours split); a reduced daily rest is 9 hours up to 11 hours and is allowed at most three times between two weekly rests. A regular weekly rest is 45 hours or more; a reduced one is 24 hours up to 45 hours. The missing hours of a reduced weekly rest must be taken back, attached to another rest of at least 9 hours, before the end of the third week after the week of the reduction. The Working tab counts the reduced daily rests you used and the Rest tab lists what is still to be made up.

Documents & exports

Can I save or print a report as a PDF?

No. Reports have no PDF or print button. To keep a copy, download your original file from the list under Files, or press Download all to get a ZIP of a date range. The app creates PDFs only for documents your company issues to you, such as My eCMR and My DeCA, and for the monthly record of Time Registry if your company gave you access.

Where are the eCMR and DeCA documents my company sent me?

Open Work in the left menu and press My eCMR or My DeCA. Only issued documents that were issued or changed in the last 14 days are listed; drafts and cancelled ones are never shown, so ask your company for an older document. Your account must be linked to the company, and Work appears in the menu once a company with the Work module has assigned you a transport order; a document assigned on its own does not add it.

How do I sign an eCMR on my phone?

Open My eCMR and press Sign sender, Sign driver or Sign consignee on the document. Check or type the Signer name (and the ID number for the sender and the consignee), sign in the box with your finger and press Save signature. A DeCA needs no signature.

Where do I add my licence, CAP or medical certificate so that I get an expiry reminder?

Open Documents in the left menu and press Add document. Enter the Document name and the Expires on date, and add front and back photos if you like. The Driver document expiry reminder warns you before the date, and the Driver card expiry reminder uses the expiry date read from your card file.

Modules & plans

Why do I not see Payroll, Time Registry, Fuel tickets or Work in my menu?

These entries belong to the companies you are linked to. Payroll, Time Registry and Fuel tickets appear only when a linked company has the module switched on and ticks Payroll access, Time registry access or Fuel tickets access for you. Work appears once a company with the Work module has assigned you a transport order. Link your account under Settings, then Link, and ask your company.

Is the Payroll page my payslip?

No. It is a forecast on screen, calculated from your most recent file and your company's payroll settings, and the app does not create a payslip, PDF or spreadsheet. The current period is an estimate that can change when you upload a newer file. Ask your company about your actual pay.

Privacy & data

Can my company see my data?

Only after you link your account to it. The company then receives your driver details (name, card number, birth date, driving licence number and card expiry), all your card files, old and new, and the documents from your Documents page, and it can open your reports and download your files. Your trip notes stay private unless you switch on Share trip notes for that company.

How do I stop a company from seeing my data?

Open Settings, then Link, and press Delete in the row of the company, then confirm. The company stops receiving your new uploads, but the files already copied to it stay there. Deleting your whole account removes the copies held by the companies you are still linked to at that moment.

What happens to my data if I delete my account?

Open Profile, then the Security tab, press Request account deletion and open the link that arrives at your recovery email within 60 minutes. Opening it deletes the account at once and cannot be undone: your files and trip notes are removed, and so are the driver copies and files held by the companies you are still linked to. To remove only your driver record and its files, use Delete driver and all files on the Driver tab of Profile.

Other modules

See it with real data

The full product is open as a read-only demo with realistic data. Then create your free account and upload your first card in under a minute.